AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers

AutoCADMEP2015forDesigners

CADCIMTechnologies525St.AndrewsDrive

Schererville,IN46375,USA(www.cadcim.com)

ContributingAuthor

ShamTickooProfessor

DepartmentofMechanicalEngineeringTechnologyPurdueUniversityCalumetHammond,Indiana,USA

AutoCADMEP2015forDesignersShamTickoo

NOTICETOTHEREADERPublisherdoesnotwarrantorguaranteeanyoftheproductsdescribedinthetextorperformanyindependentanalysisinconnectionwithanyof the product information contained in the text. Publisher does not assume, and expressly disclaims, any obligation to obtain and includeinformationotherthanthatprovidedtoitbythemanufacturer.The reader isexpresslywarned toconsiderandadoptall safetyprecautions thatmightbe indicatedby theactivitieshereinand toavoidallpotentialhazards.Byfollowingtheinstructionscontainedherein,thereaderwillinglyassumesallrisksinconnectionwithsuchinstructions.Thepublishermakesnorepresentationorwarrantiesofanykind,includingbutnotlimitedto,thewarrantiesoffitnessforparticularpurposeormerchantability,norareanysuchrepresentationsimpliedwithrespecttothematerialsetforthherein,andthepublishertakesnoresponsibilitywithrespecttosuchmaterial.Thepublishershallnotbeliableforanyspecial,consequential,orexemplarydamagesresulting,inwholeorpart,fromthereader’suseof,orrelianceuponthismaterial.

www.cadcim.com

CADCIMTechnologies525StAndrewsDriveSchererville,Indiana46375,USAwww.cadcim.comCopyright©2015byCADCIMTechnologies,USA.Allrightsreserved.PrintedintheUnitedStatesofAmericaexceptaspermittedundertheUnitedStatesCopyrightActof1976.Nopartofthispublicationmaybereproducedordistributedinanyformorbyanymeans,orstoredinthedatabaseorretrievalsystemwithoutthepriorpermissionofCADCIMTechnologies.ISBN978-1-936646-72-2

CADCIMTechnologies

DEDICATION

Toteachers,whomakeitpossibletodisseminateknowledgetoenlightentheyoungandcuriousminds

ofourfuturegenerations

Tostudents,whoarededicatedtolearningnewtechnologiesandmakingtheworldabetterplacetolivein

THANKS

TothefacultyandstudentsoftheMETdepartmentofPurdueUniversityCalumetfortheircooperation

ToemployeesofCADCIMTechnologiesfortheirvaluablehelp

CADCIM Technologies provides effective and affordable virtual online training on various softwarepackages including Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing (CAD/CAM), computer programminglanguages,animation,architecture,andGIS.Thetrainingisdelivered‘live’viaInternetatanytime,anyplace,andatanypacetoindividualsaswellasstudentsofcolleges,universities,andCAD/CAMtrainingcenters.Themainfeaturesofthisprogramare:

TrainingforStudentsandCompaniesinaClassroomSettingHighly experienced instructors and qualified engineers at CADCIM Technologies conduct the classesunder the guidance ofProf. ShamTickooofPurdueUniversityCalumet,USA.This teamhas authoredseveral textbooks that are rated “oneof thebest” in their categories and areused invarious colleges,universities,andtrainingcentersinNorthAmerica,Europe,andinotherpartsoftheworld.

TrainingforIndividualsCADCIMTechnologieswithitscosteffectiveandtimesavinginitiativestrivestodeliverthetraininginthecomfortofyourhomeorworkplace, therebyrelievingyoufromthehasslesof traveling to trainingcenters.

TrainingOfferedonSoftwarePackagesCADCIMTechnologiesprovidesbasicandadvancedtrainingonthefollowingsoftwarepackages:

CAD/CAM/CAE:CATIA,Pro/ENGINEERWildfire,CreoParametric,SolidWorks,Autodesk Inventor,Solid Edge, NX, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, Customizing AutoCAD, AutoCAD Electrical, EdgeCAM,AutoCADMEP,AutoCADPlant3D,AutodeskSimulationMechanical,andANSYS

ComputerProgramming:C++,VB.NET,Oracle,AJAX,andJava

AnimationandStyling:Autodesk3dsMax,3dsMaxDesign,Maya,Softimage,andAliasDesign

ArchitectureandGIS:AutodeskRevitArchitecture,AutoCADCivil3D,AutodeskRevitStructure,RevitMEP,STAAD.Pro,Primavara,MSPandAutoCADMap3D

Formoreinformation,pleasevisitthefollowinglink:http://www.cadcim.com

TABLEOFCONTENTSDedicationiiiPrefacexiv

Chapter1:IntroductiontoAutoCADMEPIntroductionGettingStartedwithAutoCADMEPAutoCADMEPInterfaceComponentsNewTabCreateLearnDrawingAreaCommandWindowViewCubeIn-canvasViewportControlsApplicationStatusBarDrawingStatusBarInvokingCommandsinAutoCADMEPCommandLineRibbonApplicationMenuToolPalettesMenuBarShortcutMenuAutoCADMEPDialogBoxesStartingaNewDrawingOpenaDrawingUseaTemplateStartfromScratchUseaWizard

SavingWorkPlacesListFileNameFilesoftypeSaveinViewsCreateNewFolder

UponelevelSearchtheWebToolsDrop-Downlist

AutoSaveBackupFilesChangingAutomaticTimedSavedandBackupFilesintoAutoCADMEPFileFormatUsingtheDrawingRecoveryManagertoRecoverFilesEPDBackupFiles

ClosingaDrawingOpeninganExistingDrawingOpeninganExistingDrawingUsingtheSelectFileDialogBoxOpeninganExistingDrawingUsingtheStartupDialogBoxOpeninganExistingDrawingUsingtheDragandDropMethod

QuittingAutoCADMEPCreatingandManagingNewWorkspaceCreatingaNewWorkspacesModifyingtheWorkspaceSettings

AutoCADMEP’SHelpAutodeskExchangeAppsInfoCenterBarAdditionalHelpResourcesSelfEvaluationTest

Chapter 2: Getting Started with AutoCADMEPIntroductionWorkflowSpecifyingtheHVACParametersStartingaProjectLinkingSystemFiletotheArchitecturalPlanSpecifyingSpacesandZonesCalculatingLoads

ProjectBrowserCreatingaNewProjectFile

ProjectNavigatorProjectTabConstructTabViewsTabSheetsTab

SpaceCreatingSpacesEditingSpaces

ZoneWorkspaces

HVACPipingElectricalPlumbingSchematicArchitectureCustomize

Self-EvaluationTestReviewQuestions

Chapter 3: Working with ArchitectureWorkspaceIntroductionArchitectureWorkspaceCreatingWallsWallCurtainWallCurtainWallUnit

CreatingDoorsDoorOpeningDoor/WindowAssembly

CreatingWindowWindowCornerWindow

CreatingRoofsandSlabsRoofSlabRoofSlab

CreatingStairsandRailingsStairRailingStairTower

Creatinggrids,Beams,Columns,andBracesEnhancedCustomGridCustomGridConvertColumnGridColumnCustomColumnBeamBrace

CreatingPrimitivesBoxPyramidCylinder

RightTriangleIsoscelesTriangleConeDomeSphereArchGableBarrelVaultDrapeDoric

Tutorial1Tutorial2Self-EvaluationTestReviewQuestionsExercise1

Chapter4:CreatingtheHVACSystemIntroductionEquipmentAirHandlerAirTerminalFanDamperVAVUnitEquipment

DuctLineSizingtheDuctLineRoutingtheDuctLine

DuctDuctFlexDuct

DuctFittingDuctFittingDuctCustomFittingDuctTransitionUtility

Tutorial1Self-EvaluationTestReviewQuestionsExercise1

Chapter5:CreatingPipingSystemIntroductionAddingEquipmentHeatExchangerPump

TankValveEquipment

CreatingPipelinesPipeParallelPipe

AddingPipeFittingsPipeFittingPipeCustomFitting

CreatingaCustomMulti-viewPartTutorial1Self-EvaluationTestReviewQuestionsExercise1

Chapter6:CreatingPlumbingSystemIntroductionPlumbingWorkspaceFilterPumpShowerSinkWaterClosetandUrinalEquipment

PlumbingLinePropertiesPalettePlumbingFittingPropertiesPalette

Chapter 7: Creating Electrical SystemLayoutIntroductionAddingEquipmentGeneratorJunctionBoxSwitchboardEquipment

PanelDescriptionStyleAligntoObjects

RotationJustificationPresetElevationElevationSystemCreatecircuitsCircuitSettingsNameRatingVoltagephase-to-neutralVoltagephase-to-phasePhasesWiresMaintypeMainsize(amps)Designcapacity(amps)PaneltypeEnclosuretypeMountingAICratingFedfromNotes

DeviceDescriptionStyleLayoutmethodAligntoobjectsRotationJustificationPresetElevationElevationSystemIDInserttagElectricalProperty

CableTraySystemElevationHorizontalVerticalWidthHeightUseRise/RunUseRouting

CableTrayFitting

WireDescriptionStyleSegmentHeightOffsetRadiusPresetElevationElevationSystemShowcircuitsfromthepanelsCircuitConnectedcircuitsConnectedloadHotsizeNeutralsizeGroundsizeNewRunConduitRoutingpreferenceNominalsizeSpecifycutlengthCutlengthJustifyHorizontalOffsetVerticalOffsetSlopeFormatSlopeBendAngleBendRadiusConnectionDetailsPreferencesStyle

ParallelConduitsConduitFittingDescriptionSystemPartCurrentSizeNominalDiameterOtherDimensionsRolloutElevationSpecifyrotationonscreenRotationConnectionDetails

CircuitManagerCreateNewCircuitCreateMultipleCircuitsDeleteCircuitShowCircuitedDevicesCircuitReportCutCircuitCopyCircuitPasteCircuitCalculateWires

Chapter8:RepresentationandSchedulesIntroductionCreatingVerticalSectionEnableLiveSectionDisableLiveSectionToggleBodyDisplayReverseGenerateSection

CreatingHorizontalSectionCreatingaSectionLineCreatingElevationLineCreatingHiddenLineProjectionSlicingthemodelRefreshingSectionsandElevationsinaBatchInsertingDetailComponentsEditDatabaseAddGroupAddComponentEditDelete

CreatingSchedulesAirTerminalDevicesScheduleFanScheduleVAVFanPoweredBox(ElectricHeat)ScheduleSpaceEngineeringScheduleDuctQuantityScheduleDuctFabricationContractScheduleTablePipe&FittingSchedule

PipeQuantityMechanicalPumpScheduleMechanicalTankScheduleDeviceScheduleLightingDeviceScheduleConduit&FittingScheduleElectrical&MechanicalEquipmentSchedule3-PhaseBranchPanelSchedule1-PhaseBranchPanelScheduleDistributionBoardScheduleSwitchboardSchedulePanelSchedulePlumbingFixtureSchedulePlumbingFixture&PipeConnectionScheduleWaterHeater(Gas)ScheduleDoorScheduleDoorSchedule-ProjectBasedWindowScheduleRoomScheduleSpaceSchedule-BOMASpaceInventoryScheduleWallScheduleScheduleStylesTableEditing

Chapter9:WorkingwithSchematicsIntroductionSchematicWorkspaceEquipmentSchematicSymbolSchematicLineSchematicLineStylesSchematicRepresentationofanExistingSystem

Chapter10:ProjectStartingaNewProjectFile

CreatingCategoriesintheProjectCreatingArchitecturalDrawingsCreatingHVACDrawingsCreatingPipingDrawingsCreatingElectricalDrawingsIndexI-1

PrefaceAutoCADMEP2015AutoCADMEP, also known as AMEP, is based on the AutoCAD Architecture platform. Here, MEPstandsforMechanical,Electrical,andPlumbing.ThesoftwarehasalltherequiredfeaturesforcreatingaMechanical,Electrical,andPlumbingsystem.ItincludesallthefeaturesoftheAutoCADplatformsuchasBlocks, Layers, 3D Models, and so on. It also includes architectural features such as walls, doors,windows,andsoon.In AMEP, you can add objects with actual parameters to the project. These objects are available invariouscategoriesofAutoCADMEPlibraryandcanbecustomizedaccordingtotherequirementsoftheusers.AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers textbook is written with the intention of helping the readerseffectivelyusethedesigninganddraftingtoolsofAutoCADMEP2015.Thistextbookprovidesasimpleand clear explanation of tools that are commonly used in AutoCAD MEP 2015. After reading thistextbook,youwillbeabletodesignHVACsystem,pipingsystem,plumbingsystem,andelectricallayoutof a building. The chapter on schematics will enable the users generate the schematic drawings of asystemforeasyrepresentation.Theexamplesandtutorialsusedinthistextbookensurethattheuserscanrelatetheknowledgefromthistextbookwiththeactualindustrydesigns.Themainfeaturesofthistextbookareasfollows:•TutorialApproachThe author has adopted the tutorial point-of-view and the learn-by-doing approach throughout thetextbook.Thisapproachguidestheuserseasilyunderstandtheprocessofdesigninganddraftingwiththehelpoftutorials.

•Real-WorldProjectsasTutorialsTheauthorhasusedabout9real-worldmechanicalengineeringprojectsas tutorials in this textbook.Thisenablesthereaderstorelatethetutorialstotheengineeringindustry.Inaddition,thereareabout7exercisesthatarealsobasedonthereal-worldengineeringprojects.

•TipsandNotesAdditionalinformationrelatedtovarioustopicsisprovidedtotheusersintheformoftipsandnotes.

•HeavilyIllustratedTextThetextinthisbookisheavilyillustratedwithabout400linediagramsandscreencaptureimages.

•LearningObjectivesThefirstpageofeverychaptersummarizesthetopicsthatarecoveredinthatchapter.

•Self-EvaluationTest,ReviewQuestions,andExercisesEvery chapter endswith a Self-Evaluation Test so that the users can assess their knowledge of thechapter. The answers to Self-EvaluationTest are given at the end of the chapter.Also, theReviewQuestionsandExercisesaregivenattheendofeachchapterandtheycanbeusedbytheInstructorsastestquestionsandexercises.

SymbolsUsedintheTextbookNoteTheauthorhasprovidedadditionalinformationrelatedtovarioustopicsintheformofnotes.TipTheauthorhasprovidedalotofusefulinformationtotheusersaboutthetopicbeingdiscussedintheformoftips.NewThisiconindicatesthatthecommandortoolbeingdiscussedisnew.EnhancedThisiconindicatesthatthecommandortoolbeingdiscussedisenhanced.FormattingConventionsUsedintheTextbookPleaserefertothefollowinglistfortheformattingconventionsusedinthistextbook.•Namesoftools,buttons,options,andpalettesarewritteninboldface.•Namesofdialogboxes,drop-downs,drop-downlists,listboxes,areas,editboxes,checkboxes,radiobuttons,andpalettesarewritteninboldface.

•Valuesenteredineditboxesarewritteninboldface.•Namesandpathsofthefilesarewritteninitalics.Example:TheWalltool,theOKbutton,theLeftoption,andsoon.Example: The Detail Component Manager dialog box, the Walls drop-down, the Width edit box in thePROPERTIESpalette,theSchematicCurvecheckbox in theDrafting Settingsdialogbox, theKeyboard entryradiobuttonoftheUserPreferencestabintheOptionsdialogbox,andsoon.

Example:Enter5intheRadiuseditbox.Example:C:\amep\c03,c03tut03.dwg,andsoon

NamingConventionsUsedintheTextbookToolIfyouclickonaniteminaRibbonandacommandisinvokedtocreate/editanobjectorperformsomeaction,thenthatitemistermedastool.Forexample:ToCreate:Linetool,Dimensiontool,WalltoolToModify:Movetool,Explodetool,RotatetoolAction:ZoomAlltool,Pantool,CopytoolIfyouclickonanitemintheRibbonandadialogboxisinvokedwhereinyoucansettheproperties tocreate/editanobject,thenthatitemisalsotermedastool,refertoFigure1.Forexample:AirHandlertool,Pumptool,JunctionBoxtool

ButtonTheiteminadialogboxthathasa3DshapelikeabuttonistermedasButton.Forexample,OKbutton,Cancelbutton,Applybutton,andsoon.DialogBoxThenamingconventionsusedforthecomponentsinadialogboxarementionedinFigure1.

Figure1ThecomponentsofadialogboxTOOLPALETTEAtoolpaletteistheoneinwhichasetofcommontoolsaregroupedtogetherforperforminganaction.For example, TOOL PALETTES - PIPING, TOOL PALETTES - ARCHITECTURAL, TOOLPALETTES-HVAC,andsoon,refertoFigure2.

FIGURE2TOOLSINTHETOOLPALETTES-ARCHITECTURALPROPERTIESPaletteThePROPERTIES palette looks similar to the tool palette but in this palette, only the properties of the

objects are displayed. You can edit these properties as per your requirement. Figure 3 shows thePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedafterselectingawallfromthedrawingarea.

Figure3PropertiesinthePROPERTIESpaletteFreeCompanionWebsiteIthasbeenourconstantendeavortoprovideyouthebesttextbooksandservicesataffordableprice.Inthis endeavor, we have come out with a Free Companion website that will facilitate the process ofteachingandlearningofAutoCADMEP.Ifyoupurchasethisbook,youwillgetaccesstothefilesontheCompanionwebsitebyvisitingwww.cadcim.com.Thefollowingresourcesareavailableforthefacultyandstudentsinthiswebsite:FacultyResources•TechnicalSupportYoucangetonlinetechnicalsupportbycontactingtechsupport@cadcim.com.

•InstructorGuideSolutionstoallreviewquestionsandexercisesinthetextbookareprovidedinthisguidetohelpthefacultymemberstesttheskillsofthestudents.

•PowerPointPresentationsThecontentsof thebookare arranged inPowerPoint slides that canbeusedby the faculty for theirlectures.

•PartFilesThepartfilesusedinillustrations,tutorials,andexercisesareavailableforfreedownload.

Note that you can access the faculty resources only if you are registered as faculty atwww.cadcim.com/Registration.aspx

StudentResources•TechnicalSupportYoucangetonlinetechnicalsupportbycontactingtechsupport@cadcim.com.

•PartFilesThepartfilesusedinillustrationsandtutorialsareavailableforfreedownload.

StayConnectedTo get the latest information about our textbooks, videos, teaching/learning resources, and other suchupdates, follow us on Facebook (www.facebook.com/cadcim) and Twitter (@cadcimtech). Formoreinformation about our latest video tutorials, you can also subscribe to our YouTube channel(www.youtube.com/cadcimtech).Youcanaccessadditionallearningresourcesbyvisitinghttp://allaboutcadcam.blogspot.com.Ifyoufaceanyprobleminaccessingthesefiles,pleasecontactthepublisheratsales@cadcim.comortheauthoratstickoo@purduecal.eduortickoo525@gmail.com.Prefacexv

Preface

Chapter1

IntroductiontoAutoCADMEP

LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•StartAutoCADMEP•UsethecomponentsoftheAutoCADMEPinterface•InvokeAutoCADMEPcommandsfromthekeyboard,menu,toolbar,shortcutmenu,TOOLPALETTES,andribbon•UsethecomponentsofdialogboxesinAutoCADMEP•Startanewdrawing•Saveaworkusingvariousfile-savingcommands•Closeadrawing•Openanexistingdrawing•ExitAutoCADMEP•UsevariousoptionsofAutoCADMEPhelp

INTRODUCTIONAutoCADMEPisbasedontheAutoCADArchitectureplatform.SinceitbelongstotheAutoCADfamily,ithasallthefeaturesofAutoCADsuchasBlocks,Layers,3DModels,andsoon.Also,thesoftwarehasalltheimportantarchitecturalfeaturessuchas,walls,doors,windows,andsoon.AutoCADMEPisalsoreferred to as AMEP where MEP stands for Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing. Therefore, thesoftwarehasalltherequiredfeaturesforcreatingaMechanical,Electrical,andPlumbingsystem.Inthischapter,youwill learn tostartAutoCADMEPandusevariouscomponentsdisplayed in theAutoCADMEPinterface.GETTINGSTARTEDWITHAUTOCADMEPWhenyou installAutoCADMEP2015on your system, three shortcuts pointing to theAutoCADMEP2015 - English (Global), AutoCADMEP 2015 - English (US Imperial), and AutoCADMEP 2015 -English(USMetric)willbecreatedonthedesktop.YoucanstartAutoCADMEPbydouble-clickingonanyof these three icons. Ifyoudouble-clickonAutoCADMEP2015-English (US Imperial), theunitsavailable in drawing will be in Inch, Feet, andMile. If you double-click on AutoCADMEP 2015 -English(USMetric), theunitsavailableinthedrawingwillbeinMillimeter,Centimeter,andMeter.Ifyoudouble-clickonAutoCADMEP2015-English(Global),AutoCADMEPwillstartusingtheglobaltemplate.

NoteIn this textbook, the global unit system is followed, so you need to start AutoCADMEP 2015 bydouble-clickontheAutoCADMEP2015-English(Global)iconfromthedesktop.AUTOCADMEPINTERFACECOMPONENTSTheinitialAutoCADMEPinterfacecomprisesofdrawingarea,commandwindow,menubar, titlebar,severaltoolbars,modelandlayouttabs,andStatusBar,refertoFigure1-1.Thetitlebarislocatedonthe

top of the interface screen and displays AutoCAD logo and the name of the current drawing. Othercomponentsarediscussednext.

Figure1-1AutoCADMEPinterfacecomponentsNewTabInAutoCADMEP2015, theNewTab is displayedwith the startup interfacewindow. It only appearswhenall thedrawingtemplatesareclosedorwhennodrawingisopen.Itcontainstwoslidingframes,CreateandLearn.Theseframesarediscussednext.CREATEWhenyouclickontheCREATEslidingframe,theCREATEpagewillbedisplayed.IntheCREATEpage,youcanaccesssamplefile,recentfiles,templates,productupdates,andcanconnectwiththeonlinecommunity.TheCREATE page is divided into three columns:GetStarted,RecentDocuments, andConnect,asshowninFigure1-2.

Figure1-2ThestartupinterfacewindowofAutoCADMEP2015withtheCREATEpageLEARNWhenyouclickontheLEARN slidingframe, theLEARNpagewillbedisplayed.Thispagecontainsinformationonnewlyintroducedtools,securityupdates,andsoononAutoCADMEP2015.YouaccesstheLEARNpagebyclickingonLEARNbuttononthe leftat thebottomof thepage.It isdividedintothreecolumns:What’sNew,GettingStartedVideos,andSecurityUpdateswithOnlineResources,asshowninFigure1-3.

Figure1-3ThestartupinterfacewindowofAutoCADMEP2015withtheLEARNpage

DrawingArea

ClickontheStartDrawingbuttonundertheGetStartedcolumnintheCREATEslidingframetoopenthe drawing area. The drawing area covers amajor portion of the screen. In this area, you can drawobjectsandusethecommands.Todrawtheobjects,youneedtodefinethecoordinatepoints.Positionofthepointingdevice isrepresentedonthescreenbythecursor.There isacoordinatesystemiconat thelowerleftcornerofthedrawingarea.Thedrawingareaalsohasthestandardwindowsbuttonssuchasclose,minimize,andmaximizeonthetoprightcorner.Thesebuttonshavethesamefunctionsasforanyotherstandardwindow.CommandWindowThecommandwindowatthebottomofthedrawingareahasthecommandbarwhereyoucanenterthecommands.Italsodisplaysthesubsequentpromptsequencesandthemessages.Youcanchangethesizeofthe window by placing the cursor on the top edge (double line bar known as the grab bar) and thendragging it. This way you can increase its size to see all the previous commands you have used. Bydefault, the command window displays only three lines. You can also press the F2 key to displayAutoCADTextwindow,whichdisplaysthepreviouscommandsandprompts.

ViewCubeViewCubeisavailableonthetoprightcornerofthedrawingareaandisusedtoswitchbetweenstandardandisometricviewsorrollthecurrentview.In-CanvasViewportControlsIn-CanvasViewportControlsisavailableonthetopleftcornerofthedrawingscreen.Itenablesyoutochangetheview,visualstyleaswellastheviewport.ApplicationStatusBarTheApplicationStatusBarislocatedatthebottomoftheinterface.Thisbarisalsoreferredtoasthestatusbar.Itcontainssomeusefulinformationandbuttons,refertoFigure1-4,thathelpyouinchangingthestatusofsomeAutoCADMEPfunctions.Youcantogglebetweentheonandoffstatesofmostofthesefunctionsbyusingthecorrespondingoption.YoucancustomizetheApplicationStatusBarbyusingtheCustomizebuttonavailableontherightontheStatusBar.SomeoftheoptionsintheApplicationStatusBararediscussednext.

Figure1-4TheApplicationStatusBar

DrawingCoordinatesThe information about the coordinates is displayed at the lower left corner of the Status Bar. TheCOORDS systemvariable controls the display type of the coordinates. If the value of theCOORDSvariableissetto0,thecoordinatedisplayisstatic,thatis,thecoordinatevaluesdisplayedintheStatusBarwillchangeonlywhenyouspecifyapoint.IfthevalueoftheCOORDSvariableissetto1or2,thecoordinatedisplaywillbedynamic.Whenthevariableissetto1,AutoCADMEPconstantlydisplaystheabsolute coordinates of the cursor with respect to the UCS origin. The relative polar coordinates(length<angle)aredisplayedwhenyouareinanAutoCADMEPcommandandtheCOORDSvariableissetto2.ClickontheDrawingCoordinatesareatotogglethecoordinatestatusfromontooffandviceversa.ModelorPaperspaceTheModelorPaperspacebuttonisusedtotogglebetweenthemodelspaceandthepaperspace.GRIDMODETheGRIDMODE button is used to toggle the display of the grid lines on and off on the screen. InAutoCADMEP, thegrid linesareusedas reference lines todrawobjects.TheF7functionkeycanbeusedtoturnthegriddisplayonoroff.SNAPMODEOnchoosingthisbutton,youcanmovethecursorinfixedincrements.TheF9keyactsasatogglekeytoturnthesnapofforon.InferConstraintsIfthisbuttonischosen,thensomeofthegeometricconstraintswillbeautomaticallyappliedtothesketchwhileitisdrawn.DynamicInputTheDynamicInputbuttonisusedtoturntheDynamicInputmodeonoroff.Turningitonfacilitatesthe

heads-updesignapproachbecauseallcommands,prompts,anddimensionalinputswillnowbedisplayedin the drawing area and you do not need to look at theCommand prompt all the time.This saves thedesigntimeandalsoincreasestheefficiencyoftheuser.IftheDynamicInputmodeisturnedon,youwillbe able to enter the commands through thePointerInput boxes, and the numerical values through theDimensionalInput boxes.Youwill also be able to select the command options through theDynamicPromptoptionsinthegraphicswindow.ToturntheDynamicInputmodeonoroff,usetheF12key.ORTHOMODEOn choosing theORTHOMODE button, you can draw lines at right angles only.You can use the F8functionkeytoturntheorthomodeonoroff.PolarTrackingThePolarTracking button is used to turn the polar tracking on. If you turn the polar tracking on, themovementofthecursorisrestrictedalongapathbasedontheanglesetasthepolarangle.YoucanalsousetheF10functionkeytoturnonthisoption.Notethatturningthepolartrackingon,automaticallyturnsofftheorthomode.IsometricDraftingInAutoCADMEP2015,youcancreateanisometricdraftingbyusinganyworkingplane.Toactivatearequiredworkingplane,choosetheIsometricDraftingbuttonfromthestatusbar.Onchoosingthisbutton,a flyout will be displayed with the isoplaneLeft, isoplaneTop, or isoplane Right option. You canchoosetherequiredoptionfromthisflyouttoactivatetherespectiveworkplane.ObjectSnapTrackingThisbuttonisusedtoturntheobjectsnaptrackingonoroff.Onchoosingthisbutton,theinferencinglineswillbedisplayed.Inferencinglinesaredashedlinesthataredisplayedautomaticallywhenyouselectasketchingtoolandtrackaparticularkeypointonthescreen.YoucanalsochoosetheF11functionkeytoturnonorofftheobjectsnaptracking.ObjectSnapOnchoosingtheObjectSnapbutton,youcanusetherunningobjectsnapstosnapontoapoint.YoucanalsousetheF3functionkeytoturntheobjectsnaponoroff.ThestatusofOSNAP(offoron)doesnotpreventyoufromusingtheimmediatemodeobjectsnaps.Show/HideLineweightThisbuttonisusedtoturnonoroffthedisplayoflineweightsinthedrawing.Ifthisbuttonisnotchosen,thedisplayoflineweightwillbeturnedoff.TransparencyThisbuttonisusedtoturnonoroffthetransparencysetforadrawing.YoucansetthetransparencyinthePropertiespanelorinthelayerinwhichthesketchisdrawn.SelectionCyclingOn choosing this button, you can cycle through and select the overlapping objects close to the other

entities.Onselectinganentitywhenthisbuttonischosen,theSelectionlistboxwillbedisplayedwithalistofentities.3DObjectSnapOn choosing this button, you can snap the key point on a solid or a surface.You can also use the F4functionkeytoturnonoroffthe3Dobjectsnap.DynamicUCSThisbuttonisusedtoenableordisabletheuseofdynamicUCS.AllowingthedynamicUCSensuresthattheXYplaneoftheUCSgetsdynamicallyalignedwiththeselectedfaceofthemodel.YoucanalsousetheF6functionkeytoturntheDynamicUCSbuttononoroff.FiltersobjectselectionInAutoCADMEP2015,youcanfilterobjectsbyusingtheFiltersobjectselectionbutton.Ifyouwanttoselectonlyvertex,edge,face,solidhistory,orthedrawingviewcomponentsofa3Dobjectthenyoucanchoose therequiredoptionfromtheflyoutwhich is invokedbyclickingon thesmallarrowlocatedonright of the Filters object selection button. You can also select multiple objects using the selectionwindow.TheDrawingViewComponentsoptionisusedtoselectthecomponentsofanassemblyorthepartsinamulti-body. Using this option, you can select components either individually, or through windowselection.YoucanalsoclearthefiltersbychoosingtheFilterobjectselectionbuttonagain.ShowgizmosYoucanmove, rotate,andscalea3Dobjectbychoosing theShowgizmosbuttonfromtheStatusBar.WhenyouclickonthesmallarrowavailablenexttotheShowgizmosbutton,aflyoutisdisplayedwiththeMoveGizmo,RotateGizmo,andScaleGizmooptions.ShowannotationobjectsThis button is used to control the visibility of the annotative objects that do not support the currentannotationscaleinthedrawingarea.AddScalestoannotativeobjectswhentheannotativescalechangesIfthisbuttonischosenthentheannotationscalesthataresetcurrenttoalltheannotativeobjectspresentinthedrawingareappliedautomaticallytothedrawing.AnnotationScaleofthecurrentviewTheannotationscalecontrolsthesizeanddisplayoftheannotativeobjectsinthemodelspace.Whenyouchoosethisbutton,aflyoutwillbedisplayedshowingalltheannotationscalesavailableforthecurrentdrawing.WorkspaceSwitchingWhen you choose this button, a flyout is displayed. You can use the options in this flyout to switchbetween different workspaces like HVAC, Piping, Electrical, and so on. You can also customize a

workspaceorcreateanewworkspacebyusingtheoptionsinthisflyout.AnnotationMonitor

Figure1-5Thenon-associativeannotationTheAnnotationMonitorbuttonisusedtoturntheAnnotationMonitoronoroff.Ifitisturnedon,allthenon-associativeannotationswillgethighlightedwithabadgeplacedonthem,asshowninFigure1-5.Inthisfigure,alineleaderisnotassociatedwithline.CurrentdrawingunitsTheCurrent drawing units button displays and controls the units of drawing.When you choose thisbutton,aflyoutisdisplayed.Thisflyoutshowsalltheunitsystemsavailableforthedrawing.QuickPropertiesOnchoosingthisbutton,thepropertiesoftheselectedsketchedentitywillbedisplayedinapanel.ReplaceZvaluewithcurrentelevationThis toggle button is used to replace the elevation valuewith the specifiedZ value.When this togglebuttonischosen,thecomponentsarecreatedontheplanehavingtheelevationequaltotheZvalueenteredforthepreviouslycreatedcomponent.ElevationTheelevationicondisplaysavalueofthecurrentelevation.Tospecifyelevation,clickontheelevationvaluedisplayedintheApplicationStatusBar;theElevationOffsetdialogboxwillbedisplayed.YoucansettheelevationeitherbyspecifyingtheZoffsetvalueorbypickingapointfromthedrawing.HardwareAccelerationThisbuttonisusedtosettheperformanceofthesoftwaretoanacceptablelevel.CatalogStatusThisbuttonisusedtocheckthestatusofequipmentintheMEPdatabase.Ifthedatabaseisnotupdatedthenyoucanregeneratethedatabasebyusingthisbutton.Todoso,double-clickontheCatalogStatusbuttonintheApplicationStatusBar;youwillbepromptedtospecifythenameofcatalogforwhichyouwant to regenerate the database.There are five catalogs inAutoCADMEP:Cabletray,Conduit,Duct,

Mvpart,andPipe.Youcanupdateanyof thecatalogsbyspecifying itsnameoryoucanupdateall thecatalogsbyspecifyingAllatthecommandprompt.CleanScreenThisbuttonisusedtodisplaytheexpandedviewofthedrawingareabyhidingallthetoolbarsexceptthecommand window, Status Bar, and menu bar. The expanded view of the drawing area can also bedisplayed by using the CTRL+0 keys. Choose theClean Screen button again to restore the previousdisplaystate.

Tip.YoucanincreasethedisplayareaofthescreenbypressingtheCTRL+0keysorbychoosingView>CleanScreenfromthemenubar.Notethatthe0keyonthenumerickeypadofthekeyboardcannotbeusedfortheCleanScreenoption.YoucanalsochoosetheCleanScreenbuttonintheApplicationStatusBartohideallthetoolbars.CustomizationThisbuttonisusedtoaddorremovetoolsintheApplicationStatusBar.Plot/PublishDetailsReportAvailableThis icon is displayed in theApplication StatusBar when a plotting or publishing activity is beingperformedinthebackgroundoriscompleted.Whenyouclickonthisicon,thePlotandPublishDetailsdialogbox,whichprovidesthedetailsabouttheplottingandpublishingactivity,willbedisplayed.YoucancopythisreporttotheclipboardbychoosingtheCopytoClipboardbuttonfromthedialogbox.DrawingStatusBarTheDrawingStatusBarisdisplayedinbetweenthedrawingareaandthecommandwindowbydefault,refertoFigure1-6.TheannotatedDrawingStatusBarisshowninFigure1-7.ThebuttonsavailableintheDrawingStatusBararediscussednext.

Figure1-6TheDrawingStatusBarDisplayConfigurationWhenyouclickonthisbutton,aflyoutwillbedisplayedwithMEPDesignasthedefaultconfiguration.Variousoptionsavailableinthisflyoutareusedtocontrolthelevelofdisplayoftheobjectscreatedinthedrawingareawhenviewedfromdifferentdirections.Theoptionsintheflyoutarearrangedaccordingtotheir area of application. For example, the options related to theElectrical workspace are arranged

together.

Figure1-7TheannotatedDrawingStatusBarGlobalCutPlaneThisoptionisusedtospecifythecutplaneheightanddisplayrangefortheobjectsinthedrawingarea.IfyouclickonthevaluedisplayednexttoGlobalCutPlaneintheDrawingStatusBar, theGlobalCutPlanedialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure1-8.

Figure1-8TheGlobalCutPlanedialogbox

SurfaceHatchToggleUsingthisbutton,youcanturnon/offthedisplayofthesurfacehatchinthedrawingarea.

LayerKeyOverridesTheLayer Key Overrides button is used to enable or disable the overrides applied on the layersavailable in the drawing file.Whenyou click on this button, theLayerKeyOverrides dialog box isdisplayed, refer to Figure 1-9. Using the options available in this dialog box, you can configure thepresetsforanyofthelayersavailableinthedrawing.Also,youcanenableordisabletheoverridesforanyofthelayeravailable.

Figure1-9TheLayerKeyOverridesdialogbox

ManageXrefsTheManageXrefsiconisdisplayedintheDrawingStatusBarwheneveranexternalreferencedrawingis attached to the selected drawing. This icon displays a message whenever the Xreffed drawing isreloaded.TofinddetailedinformationregardingthestatusofeachXref in thedrawingandtherelationbetweenvariousXrefs,clickontheManageXrefsicon;theEXTERNALREFERENCESpalettewillbedisplayedshowingthedifferentXrefobjects.IsolateObjectsWhenyouclickonthisbutton,aflyoutisdisplayed.Therearetwobuttonsinthisflyout:IsolateObjectsandHideObjects.UsingtheIsolateObjectsbutton,youcanisolatetheselectedobjectssothatonlytheselectedobjectswillbedisplayedinthedrawingarea.Iftherearesomeobjectsalreadyisolated,thentheIsolateObjectsbuttonwillbedisplayedasaredbulbintheDrawingStatusBar.Toendisolationordisplay a hidden object, click this button again and choose theEndObject Isolation option. To hideobjects,choosetheHideObjectsoptionfromtheflyout.DrawingStatusBarMenuThis button is available in the right of theDrawing Status Bar. When you click on this button, theDrawingStatusBarmenuwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure1-10.YoucanhideordisplayanyofthebuttonsintheDrawingStatusBarbyusingtherespectivecheckboxinthemenu.

Figure1-10TheDrawingStatusBarmenu

InvokingCommandsinAutoCADMEPOn starting AutoCADMEP, when you are in the drawing area, you need to invoke AutoCADMEPcommandstoperformanyoperation.Forexample,todrawapipeline,enterthePIPEADDcommandatthecommandpromptandthendefinethestartpointandtheendpointofthepipe.Similarly,ifyouwanttoeraseobjects,youmustinvoketheERASEcommandandthenselecttheobjectsforerasing.InAutoCADMEP,youcaninvokethecommandsbyusing:CommandLineRibbonApplicationmenuTOOLPALETTESMenubarShortcutmenuToolbarCommandLineYoucaninvokeanyAutoCADMEPcommandfromtheCommandlinebytypingthecommandnameandthen pressing ENTER. As you type the first letter of the command, AutoCADMEP displays all theavailable commands startingwith the letter typed. If theDynamicInput is on and the cursor is in thedrawingarea,bydefault,thecommandwillbeenteredthroughthePointerInputbox.ThePointerInputboxisasmallboxdisplayedontherightofthecursor.However,ifthecursoriscurrentlyplacedonanytoolbar ormenu bar, or if theDynamic Input is turned off, the commandwill be entered through theCommandprompt.Beforeyouenteracommand,theCommandpromptisdisplayedasthelastlineinthecommandwindowarea.Ifitisnotdisplayed,youmustcanceltheexistingcommandbypressingtheESC(Escape)key.ThefollowingexampleshowshowtoinvoketheLINEcommandusingthekeyboard:Command:LINEorL(Liscommandalias)

RibbonIn AutoCADMEP, you can also invoke a tool from theRibbon. When you start the AutoCADMEPsession for the first time, by default theRibbon is displayed below theQuickAccessToolbar. TheRibbonconsistsofvarioustabs.Thetabshavedifferentpanelswhichinturnhavetoolsarrangedinrows.Forexample,thetoolsforcreating,modifying,andannotatingtheobjectsareavailableintheAnnotatetabinpanelsinsteadofbeingspreadoutintheentiredrawingareaindifferenttoolbarsandmenus,refertoFigure1-11.

Figure1-11TheRibbonwiththeAnnotatetabchosenSomeofthetoolshavesmallblackdownarrows.Thisindicatesthatthetoolshavingsimilarfunctionsaregroupedtogether.Tochooseatool,clickonthedownarrow;adrop-downwillbedisplayed.Choosetherequired tool from the drop-down displayed. Note that if you choose a tool from the drop-down, thecorrespondingcommandwillbeinvokedandthetoolthatyouhavechosenwillbedisplayedinthepanel.Forexample,todrawacircleusing2points,clickonthedownarrownexttotheCircle,Center,RadiustoolintheDrawpaneloftheHometab;aflyoutwillbedisplayed.ChoosetheCircle,2-Pointtoolfromtheflyoutandthendrawthecircle.YouwillnoticethattheCircle,2-PointtoolisdisplayedinplaceoftheCircle,Center,Radiustool.

Choosethedownarrowtoexpandthepanel.Youwillnoticethatapushpinisavailableattheleftcornerofthepanel.Clickonthepushpintokeepthepanelintheexpandedstate.Also,someofthepanelshavean inclinedarrowat the lower-right corner.Whenyou left clickonan inclinedarrow,adialogbox isdisplayed.Youcandefinethesettingofthecorrespondingpanelinthedialogbox.Youcanreorderthepanelsinthetab.Todoso,pressandholdtheleftmousebuttononthepaneltobemovedanddragittotherequiredposition.YoucanalsoundocktheRibbon.Todoso,right-clickontheblank space in theRibbon and choose theUndock option; theRibbon gets undocked.You canmove,resize,anchor,andauto-hidetheRibbonusingtheshortcutmenuthatwillbedisplayedwhenyouright-clickon theheadingstrip.Toanchor the floatingRibbon to the leftor rightof thedrawingarea in thevertical position, right-click on the heading strip of the floatingRibbon; a shortcutmenu is displayed.Choosethecorrespondingoptionfromthisshortcutmenu.TheAuto-hideoptionwillhidetheRibbonintotheheadingstripandwilldisplayitonlywhenyoumovethecursoroverthisstrip.YoucancustomizethedisplayoftabsandpanelsintheRibbon.TocustomizetheRibbon,right-clickonanyoneofthetoolsinit;ashortcutmenuwillbedisplayed.Onmovingthecursoroveroneoftheoptions,aflyoutwillbedisplayedwithatickmarkbeforealloptionsandthecorrespondingtaborpanelwillbedisplayedintheRibbon.Select/clearappropriateoptiontodisplay/hideaparticulartaborpanel.ApplicationMenuTheApplicationmenuisavailableatthetop-leftoftheAutoCADMEPwindow.ItcontainssomeofthetoolsthatarealsoavailableintheQuickAccessToolbar.ClickthedownarrowontheApplicationmenutodisplaythetools,asshowninFigure1-12.Youcansearchacommandusingthesearchfieldonthetopof theApplicationmenu. To search a tool, enter the complete or partial name of the command in thesearchfield;therelevanttoollistwillbedisplayed.Ifyouclickonatoolfromthelist,thecorrespondingcommandwillgetactivated.

Figure1-12TheApplicationmenu

By default, theRecentDocument button is chosen in theApplication menu. Therefore, the recentlyopeneddrawingswillbedisplayed.Ifyouhaveopenedmultipledrawingfiles,choosetheOpenbutton;thedocumentsthatareopenedwillbelistedintheApplicationmenu.Tosetthepreferencesofthefile,choose theOptions button available at the bottom of theApplication menu. To exit AutoCADMEP,choosetheExitAutoCADMEP2015buttonnexttotheOptionsbutton.

TOOLPALETTESTheTOOLPALETTESinAutoCADMEPhelpsyoutoplaceandsharehatchpatternsandblocksinthecurrentdrawinginaconvenientway.Bydefault,theTOOLPALETTESaredisplayedontheleftinthedrawingarea.IftheTOOLPALETTESarenotdisplayedthenchooseToolsfromtheToolsdrop-downin theBuild panel of theHome tab in theRibbon or choose theCTRL+3 keys to display theTOOLPALETTES.YoucanresizetheTOOLPALETTESusingtheresizingcursorthatisdisplayedwhenyouplacethecursoronthetoporbottomextremityoftheTOOLPALETTES.TheTOOLPALETTESwillbediscussedindetailinlaterchapters.MenuBarYoucanalsoselectcommandsfromthemenubar.Menubarisnotdisplayedbydefault.Todisplaythemenubar,choosethedownarrowintheQuickAccessToolbar;aflyoutisdisplayed.ChoosetheShowMenuBaroptionfromit;themenubarwillbedisplayed.Youcaninvokeacommandbyleft-clickingonamenu.InAutoCADMEP,therearefourmenusavailable:File,Window,Help,andExpress.TheFile,Window,andHelpmenusaredisplayedinthemenubaronlywhenthereisnodrawingopeninAutoCADMEP. TheFile menu has the options to manage the drawing file. Using the options available in theWindowmenu,youcanclosethecurrentsession,switchbetweentwosessions,orcandisplaymultiplesessionsinthedisplaywindow.TheoptionsintheHelpmenuareusedtodisplaythehelpdocumentation.TheExpressmenuwillbedisplayedwhenyouareinthedrawingenvironment.IthasdifferentoptionssuchasBlocks,Text,Layouttools,Dimension,Selectiontools,Modify,Draw,Filetools,Webtools,

Tools,Weblinks,ExpresstoolsFAQ,andHelp.ThevariousoptionswhicharepresentintheExpressmenuareusedforperformingoperationstogetthedesiredresults.

ShortcutMenuAutoCADMEPhasprovidedshortcutmenusasaneasyandconvenientwayofinvokingtherecentlyusedtools. These shortcut menus are context-sensitive, which means that the tools present in them aredependentontheplace/objectforwhichtheyaredisplayed.Ashortcutmenuisinvokedbyright-clickingandisdisplayedatthecursorlocation.Youcanright-clickanywhereinthedrawingareatodisplaythegeneral shortcutmenu. Itgenerallycontainsanoption to select thepreviously invoked tool againapartfromthecommontools,refertoFigure1-13.

Figure1-13Partialviewofshortcutmenuwiththerecentlyusedcommands

Ifyouright-clickinthedrawingareawhileacommandisactive,ashortcutmenu,withtheoptionsrelatedtothatparticularcommand,willbedisplayed.Figure1-14showstheshortcutmenuwhentheDucttoolisactive.

Figure1-14ShortcutmenudisplayedwhentheDUCTtoolisactiveIfyouright-clickontheNewTab,ashortcutmenuwillbedisplayedthatcontainstheoptionsforcreatingnewdrawings,refertoFigure1-15.

Figure1-15ShortcutmenufortheNewTabYoucanalsoright-clickonthecommandwindowtodisplayashortcutmenu.ThismenudisplaysthesixmostrecentlyusedcommandsandsomeofthewindowoptionslikeCopyandPaste,refertoFigure1-16.ThecommandsandtheirpromptentriesaredisplayedintheHistorywindow(previouscommandlinesnotvisible)andcanbeselected,copied,andpastedinthecommandlineusingtheshortcutmenu.Asyoupresstheuparrowkey,thepreviouslyenteredcommandsaredisplayedinthecommandwindow.Oncethedesiredcommandisdisplayedatthecommandbar,youcanexecuteitbysimplypressingtheENTERkey.YoucanalsocopyandeditanypreviouslyinvokedcommandbylocatingitintheHistorywindowand then selecting the command lines. After selecting the desired command lines from the Historywindow,right-clicktodisplayashortcutmenu.ChooseCopyfromthemenuandthenpastetheselected

linesattheendofthecommandline.

Figure1-16CommandlinewindowshortcutmenuYoucan right-clickon thecoordinatedisplayareaof theApplicationStatusBar to display a shortcutmenu.Thismenucontainstheoptionstomodifythedisplayofcoordinates,asshowninFigure1-17.

Figure1-17TheStatusBarshortcutmenuAUTOCADMEPDIALOGBOXESTherearecertaincommands,whichwheninvoked,displayadialogbox.Whenyouchooseaniteminamenu, a dialog box is displayed. For example,when you chooseNew from theFilemenu, theSelectTemplatedialogboxisdisplayed.In theApplicationmenu,whenyouchoosean itemitmaydisplayadialogboxalthoughtherearenoellipseswiththatitem.Forexample,whenyouchooseOptionsfromtheApplicationmenu,theOptionsdialogboxisdisplayed.Adialogboxcontainsanumberofpartslikethedialog label, radio buttons, text or edit boxes, check boxes, slider bars, image boxes, and commandbuttons. These components are also referred to as tiles. Some of the components of a dialog box areshowninFigure1-18.

Figure1-18ComponentsofadialogboxYoucanselectthedesiredtileusingthepointingdevice,whichisrepresentedbyanarrowwhenadialogbox is invoked.The titlebardisplays thenameof thedialogbox.The tabsspecify thevarioussectionswithagroupofrelatedoptionsunderthem.Thecheckboxesaretoggleoptionsformakingaparticularoptionavailableorunavailable.Thedrop-down listdisplaysan itemandanarrowon the rightwhichwhenselecteddisplaysalistofitemstochoosefrom.Youcanmakeaselectionintheradiobuttons.Onlyonecanbeselectedatatime.Thepreviewdisplaysthepreviewimageoftheitemselected.Thetextboxisanareawhereyoucanenteratextlikeafilename.Itisalsocalledaneditbox,becauseyoucanmakeany change to the text entered. In some dialog boxes, there is the [...] button, which displays anotherrelateddialogbox.Therearecertainbuttons(OK,Cancel,andHelp)atthebottomofthedialogbox.Thenameimpliestheirfunctions.Thebuttonwhichishighlightedisthedefaultbutton.TheHelpbuttoninthisdialogboxisusedtodisplayhelponthevariousfeaturesofthedialogbox.

STARTINGANEWDRAWINGApplicationMenu:New>DrawingCommand:NEWQuickAccessToolbar:NewMenuBar:File>NewYoucanopenanewdrawingusing theNew tool in theFilemenu.Whenyou invoke theNew tool, bydefault theSelect template dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown in Figure 1-19. This dialog boxdisplaysa listofdefault templatesavailable inAutoCADMEP2015.Thedefault selected template isAecbModel(GlobalCtb).dwt,whichstartstheAutoCADMEPenvironmentwithglobalunitsystem.Youcanselectanyother template tostartanewdrawing.Thedrawingwilluse thesettingsof theselectedtemplate.Youcanalsoopenanydrawingwithoutusinganytemplateeitherinmetricorimperialsystem.Todoso,choosethedownarrowontherightoftheOpenbuttonfromtheSelectTemplatedialogboxandselect theOpenwithnoTemplate-Metricoptionor theOpenwithnoTemplate-Imperialoptionfromtheflyout.

Figure1-19TheSelecttemplatedialogbox

You can also open a newdrawing using theUseaWizard andStart fromScratch options from theCreateNewDrawingdialogbox.ToinvoketheCreateNewDrawingdialogbox,enterSTARTUP inthecommandwindowandthenenter1asthenewvalueforthissystemvariable.InvoketheNewtool;theCreateNewDrawingdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure1-20.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.

Figure1-20ThedefaulttemplatesdisplayedintheCreateNewDrawingdialogboxonchoosingtheUseaTemplatebutton

If youhavestartedanewAutoCADMEPsessionwith theSTARTUP variable set to1 then theStartupdialogboxwillbedisplayed.TheoptionsintheStartupdialogboxaresameasthatoftheCreateNewDrawingdialogboxwiththeonlydifferencethatintheStartupdialogbox,theOpenaDrawingbuttonwillbeactivated.

OpenaDrawingBydefault,thisoptionisnotavailable.YoucanaccessthisoptiononlywhenyoustartanewsessionofAutoCADMEP. You can open a drawing by using theOpen button which is discussed later in thischapter.UseaTemplateWhenyouchoosetheUseaTemplatebuttonfromtheCreateNewDrawingdialogbox,AutoCADMEPdisplaysalistoftemplates,refertoFigure1-20.ThedefaultselectedtemplatefileisAecbmodel(globalctb).dwt.You can select any of the template files from the list. The new drawingwill have the samesettings as specified in the template file.Thepreviewof the template file selected is displayed in thedialog box.You can also define your own template files that are customized to your requirements.Todifferentiatethetemplatefilesfromthedrawingfiles,thetemplatefileshavea.dwtextensionwhereasthedrawingfileshavea.dwgextension.Anydrawingfilecanbesavedasatemplatefile.YoucanusetheBrowsebuttontoselectothertemplatefiles.WhenyouchoosetheBrowsebutton,theSelectatemplatefiledialogboxisdisplayedwiththeTemplatefolderopen,displayingallthetemplatefiles.StartfromScratchWhenyouchoosetheStartfromScratchbutton,refertoFigure1-21,AutoCADMEPprovidesyouwithoptions to start a new drawing that contains the default AutoCADMEP setup for Imperial orMetricdrawing.IfyouselecttheImperialoptionfromtheDefaultSettingsarea,thelimitsare12X9,textheightis0.20,anddimensionsandlinetypescalefactorsis1.

Figure1-21TheCreateNewDrawingdialogboxwithStartfromScratchbuttonselected

UseaWizardTheUseaWizard button allowsyou to set the initial drawing settings before actually starting a newdrawing.WhenyouchoosetheUseaWizardbutton,theQuickSetupandAdvancedSetupoptionsaredisplayedintheSelectaWizardarea,refertoFigure1-22.IfyouselecttheQuickSetupoption,youcanspecifytheunitsandthelimitsoftheworkarea.IftheAdvancedSetupoptionisselected,thenyoucansettheunits,limits,andtheothertypesofsettingsforadrawing.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.

Figure1-22ThewizardoptionsdisplayedonchoosingtheUseaWizardbutton

AdvancedSetupThis option allows you to preselect the parameters of a new drawing such as the units of linear and

angular measurements, type and direction of angular measurements, approximate area desired for thedrawing,precisionfordisplayingtheunitsafterdecimal,andsoon.WhenyouselecttheAdvancedSetupwizardoptionfromtheCreateNewDrawingdialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton,theAdvancedSetupwizardisdisplayed.TheUnitspageisdisplayedbydefault,asshowninFigure1-23.

Figure1-23TheUnitspageoftheAdvancedSetupwizard

This page is used to set the units for measurement in the current drawing. The different units ofmeasurement that you can choose from are Decimal, Engineering, Architectural, Fractional, andScientific.Youcanselecttherequiredunitofmeasurementbyselectingtherespectiveradiobutton.Youwill notice that the preview image is modified accordingly. You can also set the precision for themeasurementunitsbyselectingitfromthePrecisiondrop-downlist.

ChoosetheNextbuttontoopentheAnglepage,asshowninFigure1-24.YouwillnoticethatanarrowappearsontheleftofAngleintheAdvancedSetupwizard.Thissuggeststhatthispageiscurrent.

Figure1-24TheAnglepageoftheAdvancedSetupwizard

This page is used to set the unit for angular measurements and its precision. The units for anglemeasurement are Decimal Degrees, Deg/Min/Sec, Grads, Radians, and Surveyor. The units for anglemeasurement can be set by selecting any one of these radio buttons as required. The preview of theselected angular unit is displayed on the right of the radio buttons. The precision format changesautomaticallyinthePrecisiondrop-downlistdependingontheanglemeasuringsystemselected.Youcanthenselecttheprecisionfromthedrop-downlist.The next page is theAngleMeasure page, as shown in Figure 1-25. This page is used to select thedirectionofthebaselinefromwhichtheangleswillbemeasured.YoucanalsosetyourowndirectionbyselectingtheOtherradiobuttonandthenenteringthevalueintheeditboxdisplayedbelowit.ThiseditboxgetsactivatedonlywhenyouselecttheOtherradiobutton.

Figure1-25TheAngleMeasurepageoftheAdvancedSetupwizard

ChooseNexttodisplaytheAngleDirectionpagetosettheorientationfortheanglemeasurement,refertoFigure1-26.Bydefault theanglesarepositive ifmeasured inacounterclockwisedirection.This isbecause theCounter-Clockwise radiobutton is selected. Ifyou select theClockwise radiobutton, theangleswillbeconsideredpositivewhenmeasuredintheclockwisedirection.

Figure1-26TheAngleDirectionpageoftheAdvancedSetupwizard

Tosetthelimitsofthedrawing,choosetheNextbutton;theAreapagewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure1-27.Youcanenterthewidthandlengthofthedrawingareaintherespectiveeditboxes.

Figure1-27TheAreapageoftheAdvancedSetupwizard

NoteEvenafteryouincreasethelimitsofthedrawing,thedrawingdisplayareadoesnotincrease.YouneedtoinvoketheZoomAlltoolfromtheNavigationBartoincreasethedrawingdisplayarea.

QuickSetupWhenyouselecttheQuickSetupoptionfromtheCreateNewDrawingdialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton,theQuickSetupwizardisdisplayed.Thiswizardhastwopages:UnitsandArea.TheUnitspageisopenedbydefault,asshowninFigure1-28.TheoptionsintheUnitspagearesimilartothoseintheUnitspageoftheAdvancedSetupwizard.Theonlydifferenceisthatyoucannotsettheprecisionfortheunitsinthiswizard.

Figure1-28TheUnitspageoftheQuickSetupwizard

ChooseNexttodisplaytheAreapage,asshowninFigure1-29.TheAreapageoftheQuickSetup issimilartothatoftheAdvancedSetupwizard.Inthispage,youcansetthedrawinglimits.

Figure1-29TheAreapageoftheQuickSetupwizard

Tip.WhenyouopenanAutoCADMEPsession,adrawingwillbeopenedautomatically.ButyoucanopenanewdrawingusingtheoptionssuchasStartfromScratchandUseaWizardfromtheStartupdialogboxbeforeenteringintoAutoCADMEPenvironment.Asmentionedearlier, thedisplayof theStartupdialogbox is turnedoffbydefault.Refer to thesectionofStartingaNewDrawing toknow

howtoturnonthedisplayofthisdialogbox.SAVINGWORKTheQSAVE,SAVEAS,andSAVEcommandsallowsyoutosaveyourwork.WhenyouchoosetheSavetoolfromtheQuickAccessToolbar,theQSAVEcommandisinvoked.Ifyouaresavingthedrawingforthe first time in the present session, theSAVEAS command will be invoked in place of theQSAVEcommandandyouwillbepromptedtoenterthefilenameintheSaveDrawingAsdialogbox,asshowninFigure1-30.You can enter the name for the drawing and then choose theSave button. If you havemodifiedadrawingfile,choosetheSavetooltosaveit;thesystemsavesthefilewithoutpromptingyoutoenterafilename.Thisallowsyoutodoaquicksave.WhenyouchooseSaveAsfromtheApplicationmenuorchoosetheSaveAstoolfromtheQuickAccessToolbar,theSaveDrawingAsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,refertoFigure1-30.Evenif thedrawinghasbeensavedwithafilename,usingthistoolyoucanspecifyanewnameforthedrawing.Youcanalsousethistoolwhenyoumakecertainchangestoatemplateandwanttosavethechangedtemplatedrawingbutleavetheoriginaltemplateunchanged.

Figure1-30TheSaveDrawingAsdialogboxTheoptionsintheSaveDrawingAsdialogboxarediscussednext.PlacesListAcolumnoficonsisdisplayedontheleftsideofthedialogbox.Theseiconscontaintheshortcutstothefoldersthatarefrequentlyused.Youcanquicklysaveyourdrawingsinoneofthesefolders.TheHistoryfolderdisplaysthelistofthemostrecentlysaveddrawings.Youcansaveyourpersonaldrawingsinthe

DocumentsorFavoritesfolder.TheFTPfolderdisplaysthelistofvariousFTPsitesthatareavailableforsavingthedrawing.Bydefault,noFTPsitesareshowninthedialogbox.ToaddanFTPsitetothedialogbox,choosetheToolsbuttonontheupper-rightcornerofthedialogboxtodisplayashortcutmenuandselectAdd/ModifyFTPLocations.TheDesktopfolderdisplaysthelistofcontentsonthedesktop.TheBuzzsawiconsconnectyoutotheirrespectivepagesontheWeb.YoucanaddanewfolderinthislistforaneasyaccessbysimplydraggingthefolderontothePlaceslistarea.Youcanrearrangeallthesefoldersbydraggingthemandthenplacingthematthedesiredlocations.Itisalsopossibletoremovethefolders, which are not in frequent use. To do so, right-click on the particular folder and then selectRemovefromtheshortcutmenu.Now,youcanalsosavethedocumentonAutodeskCloud.Theoptionforsavingthedocumentisdiscussednext.TheAutodesk360iconisavailableonthetopleftintheSaveDrawingAsdialogbox,refertoFigure1-30.It isusedtosharedataonlinewiththeuserswhohaveanAutodeskaccount.Whenyouchoosethisbutton,theAutodesk-SignInwindowwillbedisplayed.Now,youcansignintouploadyourdocumentorfileinAutodeskCloud.FilenameTosaveyourwork,enterthenameofthedrawingintheFilenameeditboxbytypingorbyselectingitfromthedrop-downlist.Ifyouhavealreadyassignedanametothedrawing,itwillbedisplayedintheeditboxasthedefaultname.Ifthedrawingisunnamed,thedefaultnameDrawing1willbedisplayedintheFileNameeditbox.FilesoftypeTheoptionsintheFilesoftypedrop-downlistareusedtospecifythedrawingformatinwhichyouwanttosavethefile,refer toFigure1-31.Forexample, tosave thefileasanAutoCAD2007drawingfile,selectAutoCAD2007/LT2007Drawing(*.dwg)fromthedrop-downlist.

Figure1-31TheFilesoftypedrop-downlist

SaveinThe current drive and path information is listed in theSave indrop-down list.AutoCADMEPwillinitiallysavethedrawinginthedefaultfolder,butifyouwanttosavethedrawinginadifferent folder,youhavetospecifythepath.Forexample,tosavethepresentdrawingashouseintheC1folder,choose

thearrowbuttonintheSaveindrop-downlisttodisplaythedrop-downlist.SelectC: fromthedrop-downlist;allfoldersintheCdrivewillbelistedintheFilelistbox.Double-clickontheC1folder,ifitis already listed there orcreatea new folderC1 by choosing theCreateNewFolderbutton. Selecthousefromthedrop-downlist,ifitisalreadylistedthere,orenteritintheFilenameeditboxandthenchoose the Save button. Your drawing (house) will be saved in theC1 folder (C:\C1\house.dwg).Similarly,tosavethedrawingintheDdrive,selectD:fromtheSaveindrop-downlist.

Tip.Thefilenameyouentertosaveadrawingshouldmatchitscontents.Thishelpsyoutorememberthedrawingdetailsandmakesiteasiertorefertothemlater.Also,thefilenamecanbe255characterslongandcancontainspacesandpunctuationmarks.

ViewsTheViews drop-down list has the options for the type of listing of files and displaying the previewimages,refertoFigure1-32.

Figure1-32TheViewsdrop-downlist

List,Details,andThumbnailsOptionsIfyouchoosetheDetailsoption,itwilldisplaythedetailedinformationaboutthefiles(size,type,date,andtimeofmodification)intheFileslistbox.Inthedetailedinformation,ifyouclickontheNamelabel,thefilesarelistedwiththenamesinalphabeticalorder.Ifyoudouble-clickontheNamelabel,thefileswillbelistedinreverseorder.Similarly,ifyouclickontheSizelabel,thefilesarelistedaccordingtotheirsizeinascendingorder.Double-clickingontheSizelabelwilllistthefilesindescendingorderofsize.Similarly,youcanclickontheTypelabelortheModifiedlabeltolistthefilesaccordingly.IfyouchoosetheListoption,allfilespresentinthecurrentfolderwillbelistedintheFilelistbox.IfyouselecttheThumbnails option, the list box displays the preview of all the drawings, alongwith their namesdisplayedatthebottomofthedrawingpreview.Also,thepreviewofthefileisdisplayedinthePreviewimagebox.CreateNewFolderIfyouchoosetheCreateNewFolderbutton,AutoCADMEPcreatesanewfolderwiththenameNewFolder.ThenewfolderisdisplayedintheFilelistbox.Youcanchangethenameofthefolderifrequired.UponelevelWhen you choose theUp one level button, the folders that are up by one level are displayed. Forexample,ifyouareintheSamplesubfolderoftheAutoCADMEP2015folder,thenchoosingtheUponelevelbuttonwillopentheAutoCADMEP2015folder.

SearchtheWebWhenyouchoosethisbutton,theBrowsetheWeb-Savedialogboxisdisplayed.Usingtheoptionsinthisdialogbox,youcanaccessandstoreAutoCADMEPfilesatanonlinelocation.YoucanalsousetheALT+3keystobrowsetheWebwhenthisdialogboxisavailableonthescreen.ToolsDrop-DownListTheAdd/ModifyFTPLocationsoptionintheToolsdrop-downlistisusedforaddingormodifyingtheFTPsites.ThesesitescanthenbebrowsedfromtheFTPshortcutinthePlaceslist.TheAddCurrentFoldertoPlacesandAddtoFavoritesoptionsaddthefolderdisplayedintheSaveineditboxtothePlaces list or to the favorites folder, respectively. TheOptions option displays theSaveasOptionsdialogboxwhereyoucan save theproxy imagesof thecustomobjects. Ithas theDWGOptions andDXFOptionstabs.TheSecurityOptionsoptiondisplays theSecurityOptionsdialogbox,which isusedtoconfigurethesecurityoptionsofthedrawing.AUTOSAVEAutoCADMEP allows you to save yourwork automatically at specific intervals. To change the timeintervals, choose the Options button from the Application Menu; the Options dialog box will bedisplayed. In thisdialogbox, enter thedurationafterwhich the filewillbe savedautomatically in theMinutesbetweensaves textboxintheFileSafetyPrecautionsareaof theOpenandSave tab.Thisduration depends on the power supply, hardware, and type of drawings. AutoCAD MEP saves thedrawingwith the file extension .sv$. You can also change the time interval by using theSAVETIMEsystemvariable.

Tip.Althoughtheautomaticsavefeaturesavesyourdrawinguptoacertaintimeinterval,youshouldnotcompletelydependon itbecause theprocedure forconverting thesv$ file intoadrawing file iscumbersome. Therefore, it is recommended that you save your files regularly using theQSAVE orSAVEAScommands.BACKUPFILESIf a drawing file already exists and you use Save or Save As tool to update the current drawing,AutoCADMEPcreatesabackupfile.AutoCADMEPtakesthepreviouscopyofthedrawingandchangesit from .dwg to .bak. The updated drawing is saved as a drawing file with the .dwg extension. Forexample,ifthenameofthedrawingismyproj.dwg,AutoCADMEPwillchangeittomyproj.bakandsavethecurrentdrawingasmyproj.dwg.ChangingAutoSavedandBackupFilesintoAutoCADMEPFileFormatInsomecases,youmayneedtochangetheformatofautosavedandbackupfilesintoAutoCADMEPfileformat.TochangethebackupfileintoanAutoCADMEPfileformat,openthefolderinwhichyouhavesaved thebackupor theautosavedfileusing theWindowsExplorer.ChooseOrganize>Folderand

SearchOptions fromthemenubartoinvoketheFolderOptionsdialogbox.ChoosetheView tabandunder the Advanced settings area, clear the Hide extensions for known file types check box, ifselected.Exit thedialogbox.Rename the automatic saveddrawingor thebackup filewith a differentname and also change the extension of the drawing from .sv$ or .bak to .dwg. After you rename thedrawing,youwillnoticethattheiconoftheautomaticsaveddrawingorthebackupfileisreplacedbytheAutoCADMEP icon. This indicates that the auto saved drawing or the backup file is changed to anAutoCADMEPdrawing.UsingtheDRAWINGRECOVERYMANAGERtoRecoverFilesThefilesthataresavedautomaticallycanalsoberetrievedbyusingtheDrawingRecoveryManager.You canopen theDRAWINGRECOVERYMANAGER by choosingDrawingUtilities >Open theDrawingRecoveryManagerfromtheApplicationMenuorbyenteringDRAWINGRECOVERYatthecommandbar.Incaseofasystemcrash,theDrawingRecoverymessageboxwillbedisplayedonstartingAutoCADMEPagain,refertoFigure1-33.Themessageboxinformsyouthattheprogramunexpectedlyfailedandyou can open themost suitable among the backup files created byAutoCADMEP.Choose theClosebutton from theDrawingRecoverymessage box; theDRAWINGRECOVERYMANAGER will bedisplayedontheleftofthedrawingarea,asshowninFigure1-34.

Figure1-33TheDrawingRecoverymessagebox

Figure1-34TheDRAWINGROCOVERYMANAGER

NoteTheDRAWINGRECOVERYMANAGERwillbeavailableonlywhentheautomaticsavefeatureisactive.TheBackupFilesrolloutliststheoriginalfiles,thebackupfiles,andtheautomaticallysavedfiles.Selectafile;itspreviewwillbedisplayedinthePreview rollout.Also, the informationcorrespondingto theselectedfilewillbedisplayedintheDetailsrollout.Toopenabackupfile,double-clickonitsnameintheBackupFiles rollout. Alternatively, right-click on the file name and then chooseOpen from theshortcutmenu. It is recommended thatyousave thebackup fileat thedesired locationbeforeyoustartworkingonit.

EPDBackupFilesTheElectrical ProjectDatabase is used tomanage all drawings related to the electrical circuits for aproject.Asyoucreateandmodifyelectricalcircuitsforaproject,youcanusethecircuitmanagertoviewandmanagepanelandcircuit information.Bydefault,AutoCADMEPcreatesabackupofall theEPDfiles.ThesebackupfilesareusedwhentheEPDfilesgetcorruptduetosystemcrashorwhenfilesgetincorrectlylinked.YoucanspecifythenumberofdatabackupfilesintheElectricalPreferencesdialogboxdisplayedonchoosing theElectricalbutton in thePreferences panel from theManage tabof theRibbon.Youcancreateupto99backupfilesforasingleElectricalProjectDatabase.CLOSINGADRAWINGYoucanusetheCLOSEcommandtoclosethecurrentdrawingfilewithoutactuallyquittingAutoCADMEP.Todoso,chooseClose>CurrentDrawingfromtheApplicationMenuorenterCLOSEat thecommandbar;thecurrentdrawingfilewillbeclosed.Ifmultipledrawingfilesareopen,chooseClose>AllDrawingsfromtheApplicationMenu.Ifmultipledrawingfilesofasingleprojectareopen,choose

Close > All Project Drawings from theApplicationMenu. If you have not saved the drawing aftermakingthelastchangestoitandyouinvoketheCLOSEcommand,AutoCADMEPdisplaysadialogboxthatallowsyou tosave thedrawingbeforeclosing.Thisdialogboxgivesyouanoption todiscard thecurrent drawing or the changesmade to it. It also gives you an option to cancel the command. Afterclosing thedrawing, if you are still inAutoCADMEP fromwhereyou canopen a newor an alreadysaveddrawingfile.YoucanalsousetheClosebutton(X)inthedrawingareatoclosethedrawing.NoteYoucancloseadrawingevenifacommandisactive.

OPENINGANEXISTINGDRAWINGYoucanopenanexistingdrawingfilebyusingoneofthefollowingthreemethods:byusingtheSelectFiledialogbox,byusingtheCreateNewDrawingdialogbox,andbydragginganddropping.OpeninganExistingDrawingUsingtheSelectFileDialogBoxIfyouarealreadyinthedrawingeditorandyouwanttoopenadrawingfile,choosetheOpentoolfromtheQuickAccessToolbar;theSelectFiledialogboxwillbedisplayed.Alternatively,invoketheOPENcommand todisplay theSelectFiledialogbox, refer toFigure1-35.Youcanselect thedrawing tobeopenedusingthisdialogbox.Thisdialogboxissimilartothestandarddialogboxes.Youcanchoosethefileyouwanttoopenfromthefolderinwhichitisstored.YoucanchangethefolderfromtheLookindrop-downlist.Youcanthenselectthenameofthedrawingfromthelistboxoryoucanenterthenameofthedrawing fileyouwant toopen in theFilename editbox.After selecting thedrawing file,youcanchoosetheOpenbuttontoopenthefile.

Figure1-35TheSelectFiledialogbox

Whenyouselectafilename,previewoftheselectedfileisdisplayedinthePreviewbox.Youcanalsousethisboxtoidentifythecontentsofadrawing.YoucanalsochangethefiletypebyselectingitintheFilesoftypedrop-downlist.Apartfromthedwgfiles,youcanopenthedws(standard),dwt (template)filesorthedxffiles.YouhaveallthestandardiconsinthePlaceslistthatcanbeusedtoopendrawingfilesfromdifferent locations.Whenyouclickon thedownarrowadjacent to theOpenbutton,adrop-downlistisdisplayed,asshowninFigure1-36.Youcanchooseamethodforopeningthefileusingthisdrop-downlist.Thesemethodsarediscussednext.

Figure1-36TheFilesoftypedialogbox

OpenRead-OnlyToviewadrawingwithoutmodifyingit,selecttheOpenRead-Onlyoptionfromthedrop-downlist.Ifyou try to save the opened drawing with the original file name, AutoCADMEP warns you that thedrawing file iswrite protected.However, you can save the edited drawingwith a different file nameusingtheSAVEAScommand.Thiswayyoucanpreserveyourdrawing.

PartialOpenThePartialOpen option enables you to open only a selected view or a selected layer of a selecteddrawing.Thisoptioncanbeusedtoeditsmallportionsofacomplicateddrawingandthensaveitwiththe complete drawing.When you select thePartialOpen option from theOpen drop-down list, thePartialOpen dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 1-37, which contains different views andlayersoftheselecteddrawing.WhenyouselectacheckboxforalayerandthenchoosetheOpenbutton,onlytheobjectsdrawninthatparticularlayerforthedrawingaredisplayedinthenewdrawingwindow.Youcanmakethechangesandthensaveit.

Figure1-37ThePartialOpendialogbox

LoadingAdditionalObjectstoPartiallyOpenedDrawingOnce you have opened a part of a drawing and made the necessary changes, you may want to loadadditionalobjectsorlayersontheexistingones.Todoso,enterPARTIALOADatthecommandbar;thePartialLoaddialogboxwillbedisplayed,which is similar to thePartialOpen dialogbox.Youcanchooseanotherlayerandtheobjectsdrawninthatlayerwillbeaddedtothepartiallyloadeddrawing.

Note1.ThePartialLoadoptionisnotenabledintheFilemenuunlessadrawingispartiallyopened.

2.Loadingadrawingpartiallyisagoodpracticewhenyouareworkingwithobjectsonaspecificlayerinalargecomplicateddrawing.

3.IntheSelectFiledialogbox,thepreviewofadrawingwhichwaspartiallyopenedandthen

savedisnotdisplayed.

Tip.Ifadrawingwaspartiallyopenedandsavedpreviously, it ispossible toopen itagainwith thesame layers and views. AutoCADMEP remembers the settings thereforewhen you open a partiallyopeneddrawing,adialogboxisdisplayedaskingforanoptiontofullyopenitorrestorethepartiallyopeneddrawing.SelectInitialViewSelect theSelectInitialView checkbox if youwant to loada specificview initiallywhenAutoCADMEPloadsthedrawing.Thisoptionwillwork,if thedrawinghassavedviews.Thisisgenerallyusedwhileworkingonalargecomplicateddrawing,inwhichyouwanttoworkonaparticularportionofthedrawing.Youcansavethatparticularportionasaviewandthenselectittoopenthedrawingnexttime.Youcansaveadesiredview,byusingtheVIEWcommand.Ifthedrawinghasnosavedviewsthenonselectingthisoption,thelastviewwillbeloaded.IfyouselecttheSelectInitialViewcheckboxandthentheOKbutton,AutoCADMEPwilldisplaytheSelectInitialViewdialogbox.Youcanselecttheviewnamefromthisdialogbox,andAutoCADMEPwillloadthedrawingwiththeselectedviewdisplayed.OpeninganExistingDrawingUsingtheStartupDialogBoxIf you have set theSTARTUP system variable value as1, theStartup dialog boxwill be displayedwhenever you start a newAutoCADMEP session. The first button in this dialog box is theOpen aDrawing button. When you choose this button, a list of the most recently opened drawings will bedisplayedforyoutoselectfrom,refertoFigure1-38.TheBrowsebuttondisplaystheSelectFiledialogbox,whichallowsyoutobrowsetoanotherfile.

Figure1-38Listoftherecentlyopeneddrawings

NoteThedisplayofthedialogboxesrelatedtoopeningandsavingdrawingswillbedisabled,iftheSTARTUPandtheFILEDIAsystemvariablesaresetto0.

OpeninganExistingDrawingUsingtheDragandDropMethodYoucanalsoopenanexistingdrawinginAutoCADMEPbydraggingitfromtheWindowExploreranddroppingitintoAutoCADMEP.Ifyoudroptheselecteddrawinginthedrawingarea,thedrawingwillbeinsertedasablockandasaresultyoucannotmodifyit.But,ifyoudragthedrawingfromtheWindowExploreranddropitanywhereotherthanthedrawingarea,AutoCADMEPopenstheselecteddrawing.QUITTINGAUTOCADMEPYoucanexit theAutoCADMEPprogrambyusing theEXITorQUIT command.Even if youhave anactive command, you can chooseExit AutoCADMEP 2015 from theApplicationMenu to quit theAutoCADMEPprogram.Incasethedrawinghasnotbeensaved,adialogboxisdisplayedwiththeYesandNobuttons.ChoosetheYesbuttontosavethedrawing.NotethatifyouchooseNointhisdialogbox,allthechangesmadeinthecurrentlisttillthelastsavewillbelost.YoucanalsousetheClosebutton(X)ofthemainAutoCADMEPwindowtoendtheAutoCADMEPsession.CREATINGANDMANAGINGWORKSPACESAworkspaceisdefinedasacustomizedarrangementofRibbon,toolbars,menus,andwindowpalettesintheAutoCADMEPenvironment.Youcancreateyourownworkspaces,inwhichonlyspecifiedtoolbars,menus,andpalettesareavailable.WhenyoustartAutoCADMEP,bydefault,theHVACworkspaceisthecurrentworkspace.YoucanselectanyotherpredefinedworkspacefromtheflyoutdisplayedonchoosingtheWorkspaceSwitching fromtheApplicationStatusBar, refer toFigure1-39.Youcanalsoset theworkspacebyusingtheWORKSPACEcommand.

Figure1-39Thepredefinedworkspaces

CreatingaNewWorkspaceTocreate anewworkspace, customize theRibbon and invoke thepalettes to bedisplayed in thenewworkspace. Next, select the Save Current As option from the flyout displayed on choosing theWorkspaceSwitchingbuttonfromtheApplicationStatusBar;theSaveWorkspacedialogboxwillbedisplayed, as shown in Figure 1-40.Enter the name of the newworkspace in theName edit box andchoosetheSavebutton.

Figure1-40TheSaveWorkspacedialogbox

Thenewworkspace is now the currentworkspace and is added to thedrop-down list in the title bar.Similarly, you can create workspaces based on your requirement and switch from one workspace toanotherbyselecting thenamefromthe flyoutdisplayedonchoosing theWorkspacesSwitching buttonfromtheApplicationStatusBar.ModifyingtheWorkspaceSettingsAutoCADMEPallowsyoutomodifytheworkspacesettings.Todoso,selecttheWorkspaceSettingsoption from the flyout displayed on choosing theWorkspaces Switching button from theApplicationStatus Bar; theWorkspace Settings dialog box will be displayed, as shown in Figure 1-41. AllworkspacesarelistedintheMyWorkspacedrop-downlist.YoucanmakeanyoftheworkspacesasMyWorkspacebyselectingitintheMyWorkspacedrop-downlist.TheoptionsintheWorkspaceSettingsdialogboxarediscussednext.

Figure1-41TheWorkspaceSettingsdialogbox

MenuDisplayandOrderAreaTheoptions in this area areused to control thedisplay and theorder of displayofworkspaces in theWorkspace Switching drop-down list. By default, workspaces are listed in the sequence of theircreation.Tochangetheorder,selectaworkspaceandchoosetheMoveUporMoveDownbutton.Tocontrol the display of the workspaces, you can select or clear the check boxes. You can also add aseparatorbetweenworkspacesbychoosingtheAddSeparatorbutton.Aseparatorisalinethatisplaced

betweentwoworkspacesintheflyoutdisplayedonchoosingtheWorkspacesSwitchingbuttonfromtheApplicationStatusBar,asshowninFigure1-42.

Figure1-42TheflyoutdisplayedonchoosingtheWorkspacesSwitchingbutton

WhenSwitchingWorkspacesAreaBy default, theAutomatically save workspace changes radio button is selected in this area, so thechanges made in the current workspace will be automatically saved when you switch to the otherworkspace.IfyouselecttheDonotsavechangestoworkspace radiobuttonthenwhileswitchingtheworkspaces,thechangesmadeinthecurrentworkspacewillnotbesaved.Therefore,whenyouinvokethisworkspaceagain,itwilldisplaywithdefaultsettings.AUTOCADMEP’SHELPYoucangettheon-linehelpanddocumentationabouttheworkingofAutoCADMEP2015commandsbyusing the options from theHelpmenu in the title bar, refer to Figure1-43.You can accessAutoCADMEP’shelpbypressingtheF1functionkey.OnpressingtheF1functionkey,theAutoCADMEP2015-Helpwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure1-44.TheentirehelpdocumentationonAutoCADMEP2015isavailableonthispage.Youcansearchforinformationaboutanycommandortoolonthispage.Youcanaccessthispagewithouttheinternetconnectionalso.But,ifyouwanttousetheofflinehelpthenyouneedto download the help file first. You can download the offline help from Autodesk website. SomeimportantoptionsintheHelpmenuarediscussednext.

Figure1-43TheHelpmenu

Figure1-44TheAutodeskAutoCADMEP2015-Help

CustomerInvolvementProgramThisoptionin thehelpmenuisusedtoshare informationaboutyoursystemconfigurationandusageofAutodesk products. The collective information is used byAutodesk for the improvement of Autodesksoftware.

AboutAutoCADMEP2015This option gives you information about the release, serial number, licensed to, and also the legaldescriptionaboutAutoCADMEP.AUTODESKEXCHANGEAPPSAutodeskExchangeAppsenablesyoutocustomizeAutoCADMEP2015accordingtoyourrequirements.Inthiswindow,yougetvariousuniqueanddesignspecificapps.TheseappsallowyoutoconnecttotheAutoCADMEPnetwork,shareinformationanddesigns,andsoon.OnchoosingtheAutodeskExchangeAppsbuttonfromthetitlebar,theAutodeskExchange|Appswindowwillbedisplayedinyourdefaultbrowser,refertoFigure1-45.Youcandownloadanduseanyoftheappsdependingonyourrequirement.

Figure1-45TheAutodeskExchange|AppswindowINFOCENTERBARAnInfoCenter bar is displayed at the top right corner in the title bar thatwill help you sign into theAutodeskOnlineservices,refertoFigure1-46.YoucanalsoaccessAutoCADMEPcommunitybyusingcertainkeywords.

Figure1-46TheInfoCenterbar

ADDITIONALHELPRESOURCES

•YoucangethelpforacommandbypressingtheF1keywhileworking.TheHelpHTMLpagecontaininginformation about the command is displayed. You can exit the dialog box and continue with thecommand.

•YoucangethelpaboutadialogboxbychoosingtheHelpbuttoninthatdialogbox.•AutodeskhasprovidedseveralresourcesthatyoucanusetogetassistancewithyourAutoCADMEPquestions.Thefollowingisalistofsomeoftheresources:

a.AutoCADMEPTechnicalAssistancewebsite:http://knowledge.autodesk.comb.AutoCADMEPDiscussionGroupswebsite:http://forums.autodesk.com• You can also get help by contacting the author, Prof. Sham Tickoo, at techsupport@cadcim.com,tickoo525@gmail.com,andStickoo@purduecal.edu

SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:1.You can increase the display area of the screen by using theClean Screen button available in theApplicationStatusBar.(T/F)

2.TheAutoCADTextWindowisusedtowritetextinthedrawingarea.(T/F)3.TheIsolateObjectsbuttonisusedtodisplayorhidetheselectedobject.(T/F)4.TheCLOSEcommandisusedtoclosetheAutoCADMEPapplication.(T/F)5.Torestrictthemovementofcursoralongaspecificangle,youneedtoturnonthe__________snap.6.Usingthe__________command,youcanchangethetimeintervalofautomaticsave.7.TheStartupdialogboxisdisplayedwhentheSTARTUPvariableissetto__________.8.YoucansignintotheAutodeskOnlineServicesbyusingtheoptionsavailableinthe__________bar.AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest1.F,2.F,3.T,4.F,5.PolarTracking,6.SAVETIME,7.1,8.InfoCenter,

Chapter2

GettingStartedwithAutoCADMEP

LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•Understandtheworkflowpath•UsetheProjectBrowser•Understandtheconceptofspace•Specifythespaceobjectsettings•Workwithspacestylesandtools•Understandtheconceptofzones•WorkspaceswitchinginMEP

INTRODUCTIONAutoCAD MEP, a software based on AutoCAD platform, is used to design, draft, and documentelectrical,mechanical,andpipingsystemofbuildings.Thefirststepwhilecreatingsuchasystemis tocreate a project.Thereafter drawings are added to this project to represent various components of thebuilding like electrical system, ducts, and so on. These drawings are then arranged according to theworkflowoftheproject.WORKFLOWWorkflowisasequenceofconnectedstepsrequiredtocreateaspecifictypeofsystem.Itisdependentonthesystemtobecreated.Forexample,foranHVACsystem,theworkflowisshowninFigure2-1.Thestepsinvolvedinthisworkflowarediscussednext.

Figure2-1WorkflowforanHVACsysteminAutoCADMEP

SpecifyingtheHVACParametersIn this step, you need to specify all the parameters required to create an HVAC system. Some of theparameters are duct size, duct rise and drop, flow rate, cut length, and so on. On the basis of theseparameters,thehierarchyofdrawingsinprojectwillbedecided.StartingaProjectInthisstep,youneedtocreateaprojectfiletolinkthedrawingsofasystemtoeachother.Forexample,thedrawingsrelatedtoHVACsystemwillbeinterlinkedandwillbeinthesameproject.Asaresult,youcaneasilymanipulatetheparametersofthesystem.LinkingSystemFiletotheArchitecturalPlanTocreateanHVACsystem,youneedtohaveanarchitecturalplan.Inthisstep,youwilllinktheHVACsystemfiletothearchitecturalplanfileusingthePROJECTNAVIGATOR.Afterthecompletionofthisstep,youcanreroutetheHVAClinesaccordingtothearchitecturalplan.SpecifyingSpacesandZones

In this step, you need to create spaces and zones using the tools available in AutoCADMEP. Thesespaces are used for exporting the building information related to the heating and cooling loads. Thespacesarefurtherdividedintozoneswhichrepresenttheactualheatingandcoolingloads.CalculatingLoadsInthisstep,youneedtocalculatetheheatingandcoolingloadsforthebuilding.ThesecalculationsareperformedbyusingtheanalysistoolsavailableinAutoCADMEP.NoteInthistextbook,theglobalunitsystemisfollowed,thereforeyouneedtostartAutoCADMEP2015bydouble-clickingontheAutoCADMEP2015-English(Global)iconavailableonthedesktop.

PROJECTBROWSERTheProjectBrowserisusedtomanageprojectfiles.Aprojectfilecontainstherecordofdrawingfilesrelatedtoacategory.Forexample,abuildingprojectfilemayhavearecordofdrawingfilesrelatedtopiping, electrical, anddifferent typesof floors.Youcancreate anewproject filebyusing theoptionsavailableintheProjectBrowser.Also,youcanconfigureanexistingprojectfile.TheProjectBrowsercan be invoked by entering thePROJECTBROWSER command at the command bar or by using theApplicationMenu.ToinvokeitfromtheApplicationMenu,hoverthecursorontheOpenoptioninthemenu;aflyoutwillbedisplayed.ChoosetheProjectbuttonfromtheflyout;theProjectBrowserwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-2.IntheProjectBrowser,thelistofprojectsavailableintheselecteddirectoryisdisplayedintheleftpaneof theProjectBrowser.Tochange the currentdirectory, choose theMyProjects button from the leftareaofthedialogbox;adrop-downlistwillbedisplayedhavingshortcutstosomecommondirectoriessuchasDocumentsandDesktop.Usingtheseshortcuts,youbrowsetothedesireddirectoryandselectthecategoryasthecurrentdirectory;alltheprojectsavailableintheselecteddirectorywillbedisplayedinthe left pane of theProject Browser. In addition to the existing projects, you can also create a newprojectfilebyusingtheoptionsavailableintheProjectBrowser.Theproceduretocreateanewprojectfileisdiscussednext.CreatingaNewProjectFileAnewprojectfilecanbecreatedbyusingtheNewProjecttoolavailableatthebottomleftcorneroftheProjectBrowser.On choosing this tool, theAddProject dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown inFigure2-3.

Figure2-3TheAddProjectdialogbox

There are three edit boxes available in this dialogboxnamely:ProjectNumber,ProjectName, andProjectDescription.TheProjectNumbereditbox isused tospecifyauniquenumberfor theprojectfile.TheProjectNameeditboxisusedtospecifythenamefortheprojectfile.TheProjectDescriptioneditboxisusedtospecifythedescriptionabouttheprojectfile.Youcanuseanyofstandardtemplatesfortheproject.Todoso,selecttheCreatefromtemplateprojectcheckboxfromtheAddProjectdialogbox;theeditboxwillbeactivatedbelowthecheckbox.Next,choosetheBrowsebuttonavailablenexttotheeditboxactivated;theSelectProjectdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-4.

Figure2-4TheSelectProjectdialogbox

BrowsetothelocationwheretemplatefilesarestoredandthenchoosetheOpenbuttonafterselectingthedesired template file; the selected template filewill be used for the current project. Note that in thistextbook, the standard template used is Commercial Template Project (Metric).apj. To select thetemplate, browse to the location C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\MEP 2015\enu\Template\CommercialTemplateProject(Metric)andthenselecttheCommercialTemplateProject(Metric)templatefile.Next,choosetheOpenbutton;thepathoftheselectedfilewillbeaddedtotheeditboxdisplayedbelowtheCreatefromtemplateprojectcheckbox.SpecifythenameofprojectintheProjectNameeditboxandchoosetheOKbuttonfromtheAddProjectdialogbox;aproject filewith thespecifiednamewillbecreatedandalsoacopyofdrawingfilesinthetemplateprojectwillbecreatedinthenewprojectfolder.Theextensionoftheprojectfileis.apt.Now,closetheProjectBrowserbychoosingtheClosebutton.OnclosingtheProjectBrowser,thePROJECTNAVIGATORwillbedisplayed,refertoFigure2-5.

Figure2-5TheProjectNavigatorPROJECTNAVIGATORTHEPROJECTNAVIGATOR ISUSEDTONAVIGATETHEDRAWINGFILESOFAPROJECT.

USINGTHEPROJECTNAVIGATOR,YOUCANEDITORCREATEBUILDINGDRAWINGSAND

OTHERDOCUMENTATIONDATA.THEPROJECTNAVIGATORHASFOURTABS:PROJECT,CONSTRUCTS,VIEWS,ANDSHEETS.THESETABSAREDISCUSSEDNEXT.

ProjectTabTheProject tabhasthreeareas.Theseareasdisplaythetoplevelinformationoftheproject.ThetoolsavailableatthebottomofthePROJECTNAVIGATORareusedtoconfiguretheproject.TheoptionsavailableintheProjecttabarediscussednext.

CurrentProjectTheCurrentProjectareaisusedtostoretheprojectfilename,projectfilenumber,anddescriptionof

theproject.

LevelsTheLevelsareacontainsinformationofvariouslevelsusedintheprojectfile.IncaseofAutoCADMEP,levelreferstofloor.Inthisarea,levelnamesaredisplayedintheNamecolumnandtheircorrespondingheightvaluesaredisplayedintheElevationcolumn.DivisionsAreaTheDivisionsareacontainsinformationofvariousdivisionsofthebuilding.Adivisionisthesegmentofabuildingalongthehorizontalplane.ProjectBrowserTheProject Browser tool is used to invoke the Project Browser dialog box. This dialog box hasalreadybeendiscussed.CloseCurrentProjectTheClose Current Project tool is used to close the current project file as well as the PROJECTNAVIGATOR.Thetoolpaletteopenedinthecurrentprojectwillalsogetclosed.ContentBrowserTheContentBrowsertoolisusedtodisplaytheAutodeskContentBrowser2015windowrelated tothecurrentlyloadedproject,refertoFigure2-6.Inthisfigure,thenameofthecurrentprojectisSampleProject - Project Standards. When you double-click on the project icon in theAutodesk ContentBrowser 2015 window, different components related to the current project are displayed in differentcategories,refertoFigure2-7.

Figure2-6TheAutodeskContentBrowser2015

Figure2-7TheAutodeskContentBrowserdisplayingcomponentcategories

WhenyouclickonanyofthecategoriesshowninFigure2-7,thecomponentsrelatedtothatcategorywillbedisplayedinAutodeskContentBrowser2015.Youcan importanyof thecomponentsavailable inAutodeskContentBrowser2015totheTOOLPALETTES.Todoso,pressandhold the leftmousebuttonontheiiconofthecomponentandthendragittotheTOOLPALETTES,refertoFigure2-8.ThecomponentwillbeplacedintheTOOLPALETTES.

Figure2-8ComponentbeingplacedintheToolPalettesRefreshProjectThe Refresh Project tool is used to refresh the current project. When a project file is usedsimultaneouslybymultipleindividualsonanetwork,thenthoseindividualsmaynotbehavingthelatestupdateddrawing.Insuchcases,itbecomesveryimportanttoupdatetheprojectfilebyusingtheRefreshProjectbutton.SynchronizeProjectsTheSynchronizeProjectstoolisusedtosynchronizethecurrentprojectwiththeAECprojectstandards.To synchronize the project, choose the Synchronize Projects tool available at the bottom of thePROJECTNAVIGATOR.Ondoing so, theAnalyzingProjectDrawingswindowwill be displayedshowingtheprogressofsynchronizationofdrawingfiles.Whenallthedrawingfilesaresynchronizedtothe AEC Project standards, the Synchronize Project with Project Standards dialog box will bedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-9.ThedrawingfilesavailableinthecurrentprojectaredisplayedintheHostDrawingcolumn of this dialog box. For every file, the status for the availability of the updatedversionisdisplayedintheStatuscolumnofthedialogbox.YoucansynchronizethedrawingfileswhichshowNewerVersionintheirStatuscolumn.Tosynchronizeadrawingfile,clickon itscorrespondingfieldintheActioncolumn;adrop-downlistwillbedisplayed.SelecttheUpdatefromStandardoptionfromthedrop-downlist;theselectedfilewillbesynchronized.Similarly,youcansynchronizemorethanonefileatatimebypressingandholdingtheCTRLkeywhileselectingthefiles.OnselectingtheUpdatefromStandardoptionforalltheselectedfiles,theupperhalfshowstheobjectsinthedrawingfileoftheproject that donotmatchwith theAECProject standards and canbeupdated from the standards.Thelowerhalf shows the files that arenot present in theproject standards and canbeskipped or ignoredwhilesynchronizingtheprojectbyselectingtheappropriateoptionfromtheActiondrop-downlist.

Figure2-9TheSynchronizeProjectwithProjectStandardsdialogbox

ConfigureProjectStandardsTheConfigureProjectStandardstoolisusedtosetuptheprojectstandard.Theseprojectstandardsareused to synchronize the project drawings. When you choose this tool, theConfigure AEC ProjectStandardsdialog boxwill be displayed, refer to Figure 2-10. TheStandard Styles tab is chosen bydefaultinthedialogbox.YoucanstandardizeanyoftheobjectsavailableintheObjectslistofthistabby selecting the check box corresponding to the object in the dialog box. If you choose theSynchronization tab, threeradiobuttonswillbedisplayed:Automatic,Semi-automatic,andManual.TheManualradiobuttonisselectedbydefault.Asaresult,allthedrawingstandardsneedtobeappliedmanually.Projectdrawingswillnotbesynchronizedwiththeprojectstandards.Ifyouselect theSemi-automaticradiobutton,theprojectstandardswillbeappliedonlywhentheprojectdrawingisopened.Also,youwillbepromptedtoapplyprojectstandardoneachopenedprojectdrawing.IfyouselecttheAutomatic radio button, the project standards will be applied on each opened drawing without anyprompt.UsingtheoptionsintheAutoCADStandards tab,youcanloadanyAutoCADStandardfile toapplyasstandardontheprojectdrawings.

Figure2-10TheConfigureAECProjectStandardsdialogbox

ConstructsTabThe options in theConstructs tab are used to modify the drawing files available in the project. OnchoosingtheConstructstab,thePROJECTNAVIGATORwillbemodified,asshowninFigure2-11.Someoftheoptionsinthistabhavealreadybeendiscussed.Theremainingoptionsavailableinthistabarediscussednext.

Figure2-11ThePROJECTNAVIGATORwiththeConstructstabchosen

ConstructsAreaTheConstructsareahasallthedrawingsofthecurrentprojectarrangedinatreestructure.Inthetree,thedrawingfilesare divided into twomain categories:Constructs andElements , which are further categorized according to their purpose/function. Forexample,thearchitecturaldrawingsarestoredintheArchitecturalcategory.Youcanopenanyofthedrawingsavailableinthesefoldersbydouble-clickingonit.AddCategoryTheAddCategorytoolisusedtoaddanewcategoryinthePROJECTNAVIGATORtocategorizethedrawing files according to their usage. To do so, select a node from theConstructs rollout of thePROJECTNAVIGATORandthenchoosetheAddCategorytool;thecategorywillbeaddedundertheselectednode.AddConstructTheAddConstructtoolisusedtoaddanewconstructionintheproject.Whenyouchoosethistool,theAddConstructdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-12.Youcanadddescriptionaboutthenewconstruct,changethename,editcategory,andchangethe templateusingthefieldsavailable in thedialog box. In this dialog box, check boxes corresponding to each level of floor in the building areavailableintheAssignmentsarea.Selectthecheckboxescorrespondingtothelevelstowhichyouwanttoaddtheconstruction.Ifyouselectmultiplecheckboxesinthisdialogbox,thentheobjectscreatedintheconstructionwillspanbetweenthelevelsselected.Therefore,it isrecommendedtoselectonlyonecheckbox.Youcanopen thenewlycreatedconstructbyusing theOpenindrawingeditor checkbox.WhenyouselectthischeckboxandchoosetheOKbutton,theAddConstructdialogboxwillcloseandthenewlycreatedconstructionwillopeninAutoCADMEPforediting.AddElement

TheAddElementtoolisusedtoaddanewelementtotheproject.Whenyouchoosethistool,theAddElementdialogboxwillbedisplayed.SpecifytherequiredparametersandchoosetheOKbutton;anewelementisaddedtotheElementscategory.YoucaneditthenewlyaddedelementbyselectingtheOpenindrawingeditorcheckbox.

Figure2-12TheAddConstructdialogboxShowExternalReferenceTheShowExternalReferencetoolisusedtodisplayexternalreferencesforanydrawinginthecurrentproject. When you select a drawing in the PROJECT NAVIGATOR and choose this button, theExternalReferences dialog box will be displayed, refer to Figure 2-13. In theDetails area of thisdialogbox,theinformationabouttheselecteddrawingisdisplayed.

Figure2-13TheExternalReferencesdialogbox

ViewsTabOnchoosingthistab,thePROJECTNAVIGATORwillbemodified,refertoFigure2-14.TheoptionsintheViewstabareusedtoadd,modify,ordeleteageneralview,adetailview,orasectionviewintheproject.Someoftheoptionsinthistabhavealreadybeendiscussed.Theremainingoptionsinthistabarediscussednext.

Figure2-14ThePROJECTNAVIGATORwiththeViewstabchosenViewsAreaIn thisarea,differentviewsof theprojectdrawingsaredisplayed ina tree structure.Theseviewsaredivided intodifferent categorieson thebasisof their applicationareas.For example, all thedrawingsrelatedtointeriorofthebuildingareavailableintheInteriorscategoryintheViewstree.Youcanopenanyofthedrawingviewsbydouble-clickingonit.

AddViewTherearethreetypesofviewsthatcanbeaddedtotheViewarea:Generalview,Section/Elevationview,andDetailview.TheAddViewtoolisusedtoaddanewviewtotheViewarea.OnchoosingtheAddViewtool,theAddViewdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-15.

Figure2-15TheAddViewdialogbox

There are three options available in this dialog box:AddaGeneralView,Add a Section/ElevationView,andAddaDetailView.Onchoosinganoption,therespectivedialogboxwillbedisplayed.Forexample,whenyouchoosetheAddaGeneralViewoption,theAddGeneralViewdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-16.

Figure2-16TheAddGeneralViewdialogbox

Usingtheoptionsavailableinthisdialogbox,youcansetthegeneralpropertiesoftheview.Threepagesare available in this dialog box:General,Context, andContent.TheGeneral page is displayed bydefaultinthisdialogbox.Inthispage,youneedtoenterthegeneralinformationsabouttheview.Afterentering thegeneral information,choose theNext button; theContext pagewill bedisplayed, refer toFigure2-17.

Figure2-17TheAddGeneralViewdialogboxwiththeContextpagedisplayed

Onthispage,youcanselecttheportionsofthebuildingthatyouwanttoincludeinthecurrentview.Todoso,youcanselectthecheckboxescorrespondingtotheportionsofthebuildingrequiredtobeincludedinthe current view. After selecting the check boxes, choose theNext button; theContent page will bedisplayed,refertoFigure2-18.

Figure2-18TheAddGeneralViewdialogboxwiththeContentpagedisplayed

Inthispage,youcanselectthecheckboxescorrespondingtothoseelementsthatyouwanttodisplayinthecurrentview.Afterspecifyingtherequiredparameters,choosetheFinishbuttontoexitthedialogbox.ThenewlycreatedviewwillbedisplayedintheViewsareaofthePROJECTNAVIGATOR.RegenerateViewTheRegenerateViewtoolisusedtoregeneratealltheviewssothatyoucangettheupdatedversionofthedrawingviews.Thistoolisalsousedtoupdatethereferenceoftheviews.RepathXrefTheRepathXreftoolisusedtoreconnecttheexternalreferenceswhosenamesorlocationshavebeenchanged.

SheetsTabOnchoosingthistab,thePROJECTNAVIGATORwillbemodified,refertoFigure2-19.Theoptionsin theSheets tab are used to add, modify, or delete the sheets available in the project. Some of theoptionsinthisdialogboxhavealreadybeendiscussed.Theremainingoptionsarediscussednext.

Figure2-19ThePROJECTNAVIGATORwiththeSheetstabchosen

SheetSetViewAreaAllthedrawingsheetsavailableinthecurrentprojectaredisplayedintheSheetSetViewareainatreestructure.Youcanopenanyofthedrawingsheetsbydouble-clickingonit.AddSheetsTheAddSheetstoolisusedtoaddanewsheetintheproject.Todoso,choosethistool;theNewSheetdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-20.Inthisdialogbox,youneedtospecifythesheetnumber,sheettitle,andfilenameintheirrespectiveeditboxes.Onspecifyingthesheetnumberandthesheettitleintheeditboxes,adefaultfilenameisdisplayedintheFilenameeditbox.Youcanchangethis

file name or retain it. The folder path and the template path for the current sheet are displayed in theFolderpathandSheettemplatefields,respectively.Thesefieldscannotbemodifiedinthisdialogbox.Afterspecifyingtherequiredparameters,choosetheOKbuttonfromthisdialogbox;thenewlycreatedsheet will be added in the project and will be displayed at the bottom of the list in thePROJECTNAVIGATOR.Youcaneditthissheetbydouble-clickingonit.

Figure2-20TheNewSheetdialogbox

PublishThePublishtoolisusedtopublishthecompletesheetsetinDWF,PDF,orDWFxfileformat.Topublisha sheet set, choose the Publish tool from the PROJECT NAVIGATOR; the AutoCAD MEP 2015messageboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-21.ChoosetheOKbuttonfromthismessagebox;theSpecifyDWFxFiledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-22.ChoosetheSelectbuttonfromthisdialogbox;thePublishJobProgressmessageboxwillbedisplayed.

Figure2-21TheAutoCADMEP2015messagebox

Figure2-22TheSpecifyDWFxFiledialogbox

Thismessageboxshowstheprogressofplotting/publishingofthedrawingsheets.Whentheprocessofpublishingcompletes,thePlotandPublishJobCompletemessagewillbedisplayedatthebottomrightcornerandtheplotfilewillbecreatedatthelocationspecifiedintheSpecifyDWFxFiledialogbox.Toviewthedetailsoftheplotfile,clickontheClicktoviewplotandpublishdetailslinkinthemessageboxdisplayedatthebottomrightcorneroftheapplicationwindow;thePlotandPublishDetailsdialogboxwillbedisplayedwiththedetailsoftheplotfile.

SPACESpaceisanentityusedinAutoCADMEPtofindouttechnicalinformationaboutaspecificsectionofanarchitecturaldrawingofaproject.Forexample,ifyouwanttomakeaspecificsectionofadrawingasanoffice,thenyouneedtoassigncorrespondingspacestyletothatsection.Thepropertiesofthatofficesuchasarea,airflow,height,equipment,andloadarestoredinthespacestyle.Toassignaspacestyletoanarea,youneedtocreateaspacefirst.Themethodtocreateaspaceisdiscussednext.

CreatingSpacesTocreateaspace,choosetheSpacetoolfromtheSpacedrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometaboftheArchitectureworkspace.Thistoolisalsoavailableintheotherworkspaces.YoucaninvokethistoolfromanyoftheworkspacesbyenteringtheSPACEADDcommandatthecommandbar.Ondoingso,the PROPERTIES palette will be displayed. By default, the Rectangle option is selected in thecommandbar.YouneedtoselectCreatetypefromcommandbar.Ondoingso,differentoptionswillbedisplayed.Select theInsertoption;a spaceofdefault sizewillbeattached to thecursor.Youneed toclick in the drawing area to specify the position of the space.As soon as you specify the position ofspace,youwillbeprompted tospecify the rotationvalue for thespace.Specify the rotationvalue; the

spacewillbepositionedatthedefinedpoint.TheCommandpromptforcreatingthespaceisgivennext.ChoosetheSpacetool.Startcorneror[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height]:CSetcreatetype[Insert/Polygon/Generate]<Rectangle>:IInsertionpoint or [Name/STyle/Create type/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:Entertheco-ordinatesoftheinsertionpointorclickinthedrawingarea.Rotationor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch/Undo]<0>:Entertherotationangleofthespace.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch/Undo]:TheoptionsavailableintheCommandpromptarediscussednext.NameTheNameoptionisusedtodefineanameforthespacecreatedbyusingtheSPACEADDcommand.Bydefault,theSpacenameisassignedtothenewlycreatedspace.STyleTheSTyleoptionisusedtochangethestyleofthespace.Bydefault,theStandardstyleisselected.YoucanchangethespacestylebyusingtheSPACESTYLEcommand.Thiscommandwillbediscussedlaterinthischapter.CreatetypeTheCreatetypeoptionisusedtochangethetypeofspacetobecreated.Thespacetobecreatedcanbea rectangle, a polygon, or it can be associative to the boundary objects. The Command prompt afterselectingtheCreatetypeoptionisgivennext.Startcorneror[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height]:CSetcreatetype[Insert/Polygon/Generate]<Rectangle>:According to the aboveCommandprompt, there are four options to create a space.These options arediscussednext.Insert:IfyouselecttheCreatetypecommandfrom theCommand bar, a list of optionswill be displayed.Choose theInsertoptionor press I and thenpress theENTERkey; the spacewill be created according to the targetdimensions specified in thedesignrulesofthespacestyle.Figure2-23showsaspacecreatedbyusingtheInsertoption.TheCommandpromptforcreatingaspacebyusingtheInsertoptionisgivennext.

Figure2-23ThespacecreatedbyusingtheInsertoption

Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:Specifytheinsertionpoint.Rotationor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch/Undo]<defaultvalue>:Specifytherotationvalueforthespace.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch/Undo]:

Rectangle:Bydefault,thisoptionisselectedatthecommandbar.Youcanspecifythelengthandwidthofthespacetobeinsertedinthedrawingarea.Specifythefirstcornerpoint;theothercornerpointoftherectanglewillgetattachedtothecursor,asshowninFigure2-24.Also,youwillbepromptedtospecifytheendcornerpoint.Eitherclickinthedrawingareatospecifytheendcornerpointorentertheco-ordinatesoftheendcornerpoint.

Figure2-24Therectangularspacewithcursorattachedtothecornerpointoftherectangle

Polygon:Bychoosingthisoption,youcancreateapolygonalspacebymanuallydefiningthesegmentsofthepolygon.Youcancreateapolygontypespaceeitherbyusingthearcsorbyusingthelines.Figure2-25showsthepolygontypespacecreatedbyusingthearcsandFigure2-26showsthepolygontypespacecreatedbyusingthelines.

Figure2-25Thepolygontypespacecreatedbyusingarcs

Figure2-26ThepolygontypespacecreatedbyusinglinesGenerate:Onchoosingthisoption,thespacecreatedwillbeassociativetotheboundaryobjects.Ifyoudo not have any objectwith its space boundaries defined orwith a valid space boundary, then theAnalyzingPotentialSpacesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-27.YoucanuseallthevisibleobjectstocreateaboundingspacebychoosingtheUseallvisibleobjectstoboundspacesoptionfromthedialogbox.Youcanalsoselectanobjecttocreatetheboundspace.Todoso,choosetheSelectobjectsthatshouldboundspacesoptionfromthedialogbox.

Figure2-27TheAnalyzingPotentialSpacesdialogbox

AfterselectingtheCreatetypeoptionfromthecommandbar,selecttheInsertoption.Thefollowingoptionsappearinthecommandbar.LengthTheLengthoptionisusedtochangethelengthofthespacetobecreated.Bydefault,thetargetdimensionofthespacestyleisusedasthelengthofthespace.TheCommandprompttochangethelengthisgivennext.

Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:LLength<defaultvalue>:Enterthedesiredvalueoflength.WIdthTheWIdthoptionisusedtochangethewidthofthespacetobecreated.Bydefault,thetargetdimensionofspacestyleisusedasthewidthofthespace.TheCommandprompttochangethewidthisgivennext.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:WILength<defaultvalue>:Enterthedesiredvalueofwidth.HeightTheHeightoptionisusedtochangetheheightofthespacetobecreated.Bydefault,thetargetdimensionofspacestyleisusedastheheightofthespace.TheCommandprompttochangetheheightisgivennext.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:HLength<defaultvalue>:Enterthedesiredvalueofheight.MOveTheMOveoption isused tomove thespacecreated.Thisoption isavailableonly ifyouhavechosenInsertfromtheCreatetypeoptions.Aftermovingthespace,youcanalsorotatethespacebyaspecifiedangle.TheCommandprompttomovethespaceisgivennext.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:MOInsertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:Specifytheinsertionpointbyclickingorenteringthecoordinates.Rotationor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch/Undo]<0>:Specifytherotationanglebyclickingorenteringthevalue.SIzeTheSIzeoptionisusedtospecifythesizeofthespacetobecreated.ThisoptionisavailableonlyifyouhaveselectedInsertfromtheCreatetypeoptions.TheCommandpromptforspecifyingthesizeofthespaceisgivennext.

Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:SIInsertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:Specifytheinsertionpointbyclickingorenteringthecoordinates.Newsizeor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch/Undo]<10’-0”>:Specifytheinsertionpointbyclickingorenteringthedimensions.Rotationor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch/Undo]<0>:Specifytherotationanglebyclickingorenteringthevalue.DragpointTheDrag point option is used to change the orientation of the space to be created. This option isavailableonlyifyouhaveselectedInsertfromtheCreatetypeoptions.TheCommandprompttochangetheorientationofthespaceisgivennext.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:DInsertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:EnterDagainifyouwanttochangetheorientationorpressENTERtoexit.MAtchTheMAtch option is used tomatch the style of the newly created spacewith an existing space.ThisoptionisavailableonlyifyouhaveselectedInsertfromtheCreatetypeoptions.TheCommandprompttochangetheorientationofthespaceisgivennext.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:MASelectaspacetomatch:Selectthespacecreatedearliertouseitspropertiesfornewspace.Match[Style/Length/Width/Height]<All>:Enteranyoftheoptionsavailableintheprompttomatchtheproperties.Bydefault,theAlloptionisselected,soallthepropertiesofselectedspacearecopiedinthenewspace.Now,clickinthedrawingareatoplaceit.ArcThisoption is used to create an arc in a polygon type space. TheArc option is available onlywhenPolygonisselectedfromtheCreatetypeoptions.TheCommandprompttocreateapolygontypespaceusinganarcisdiscussednext.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:CSetcreatetype[Rectangle/Polygon/Generate]<Insert>:PStartpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height/Arc]:AStartpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height/Line]:Specifythefirstpointofthearc.Secondpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height/Line/Undo]:Specifythesecondpointofthearc.Nextpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height/Line/Undo]:Specifythethirdpointtocompletethearc.

Second point or [Name/STyle/CReate type/Height/Line/Close/Ortho/Undo]: Specify the next point orenterCtoclosethearcforcreatingthespace.LineThisoptionisusedtocreateapolygonbyusingtheline.TheLineoptionisavailableonlywhenPolygonis selected from theCreate type options and thenArc is chosen in the next prompt. The Commandprompttocreateapolygontypespaceusinglinesisdiscussednext.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:CSetcreatetype[Rectangle/Polygon/Generate]<Insert>:PStartpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height/Arc]:AStartpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height/Line]:LStartpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height/Arc]:Specifythestartpointofthepolygon.Nextpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height/Arc/Undo]:Specifytheendpointofthefirstlineofthepolygon.Next point or [Name/STyle/Create type/Height/Arc/Ortho/Undo]:Specify the end point of the secondlineofthepolygon.Nextpointor[Name/STyle/CReatetype/Height/Arc/Close/Ortho/Undo]:SpecifythenextpointorenterCtoclosethepolygon.EditingSpacesYoucanperformvariouseditingoperationsonthecreatedspaces.Forexample,youcanchangethespacestyleordivideaspace.Whenyouselectaspacefromthedrawingarea,theSpacecontextualtabwillbeavailableintheRibbon,refertoFigure2-28.Theoptionsinthistabarediscussednext.

Figure2-28TheSpacecontextualtab

SelectSimilarTheSelectSimilartoolisusedtoselectallthosecomponentsfromthedrawingareawhichhavethesamestyleandlayerastheselectedobject.Theobjectswiththesamestyleandpropertiesbutdifferentlayerswillnotbeselectedbythistool.ObjectViewerTheObjectViewertoolisusedtodisplaytheselectedobjectinaseparate3Dpreviewwindow.Whenyouchoosethistool,theselectedobjectwillbedisplayedinaseparatewindow,asshowninFigure2-29.

Figure2-29TheObjectViewerdialogbox

Various tools suchasParallel,Perspective,andZoomWindow are in themain toolbarof thisdialogbox.Thesetoolsareusedtochangethedisplayofview.IsolateObjectsDrop-downThisdrop-downisavailableintheGeneralpaneloftheSpacecontextualtaboftheRibbon.Thetoolsinthisdrop-downareusedtocontrolthevisibilityoftheobjects.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.

IsolateObjectsThistoolisusedtohideallthedeselectedobjectsfromthedrawingarea.

HideObjectsThistoolisusedtohidetheselectedobjectsfromthedrawingarea.

EndIsolationThistoolisusedtodisplayallthehiddenobjects.

EditinSectionThisdrop-downisavailableintheGeneralpaneloftheSpacecontextualtabintheRibbon.Thetoolsinthisdrop-downareusedtoeditthespacecreated.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.EditinSection

Thistoolisusedtoeditanobjectinapredefinedsection.EditinElevationThistoolisusedtoeditthespaceatacertainelevationdistancefromtheselectedreference.

EditinPlanThistoolisusedtoeditthespaceatcertainplandistancefromtheselectedreference.

EditStyleThisdrop-downisavailableintheGeneralpaneloftheSpacecontextualtabintheRibbon.Thetoolsinthisdrop-downareusedtomodifythestyleofthespace.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.EditStyleByusingtheoptionsinthisdialogbox,youcanchangedifferentpropertiesoftheselectedspacesuchaslengthandwidthofthespace,targetarea,andvariousoffsetvalues.Whenyouchoosethistool,theSpaceStylePropertiesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-30.Usingtheoptionsinthedialogbox,youcanmodifythestyleoftheselectedspace.

Figure2-30TheSpaceStylePropertiesdialogbox

SpaceStylesWhenyouchoosethistool,theStyleManagerdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-31.ThespacestylesavailableinthecurrentdrawingfilearedisplayedintheleftareaofthisdialogboxundertheSpaceStylescategory.Ifyouselectanyspacestylefromthisarea,theoptionstochangethespace style will be displayed in the right area of the dialog box. These options are similar to theoptionsdisplayedintheSpaceStylePropertiesdialogbox.

Figure2-31TheStyleManagerdialogboxDisplayThemeStyleWhenyouchoosethistool,theStyleManagerdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-32.VariousthemestylesavailableinthedrawingaredisplayedintheleftareaofthisdialogboxundertheDisplayThemeStylescategory.Ifyouchooseathemestylefromthisarea,theoptionstochangethepropertiesoftheselectedthemearedisplayedintherightarea.Usingtheseoptions,youcanchangethepropertiesoftheselectedthemelikeitstitle,textstyle,symbol,andsoon.

Figure2-32TheStyleManagerdialogboxwiththemestyleoptions

ZoneTemplatesTheZoneTemplates tool is used to change the properties of the selected zone template such as itscontents,modifiers,andname.Todoso,choosetheZoneTemplatestool;theStyleManagerdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshownFigure2-33.

Figure2-33TheStyleManagerdialogboxwithZoneTemplatesselected

Various zone template styles available in thedrawing are displayed in the left areaof this dialog boxundertheZoneTemplatescategory.Whenyouchooseatemplatestylefromtheleftarea,theoptionsto

changethepropertiesoftheselectedtemplatestylearedisplayedintherightarea.Using theseoptions,youcanchangethepropertiesoftheselectedtemplatestyle.Similarly,youcanchangethezonestylebyusingtheZoneStyletoolavailableinthesamedrop-down.

CopyStyleThistoolisusedtocreateacopyofthestyleoftheselectedobject.DimensionThistoolisusedtoaddAECdimensiontoanobject.Toaddadimension,choosethistoolandselecttheobjecttowhichyouwanttoadddimension;thedimensionwillbeattachedtothecursor.Now,youcanplacethedimensionatthedesiredlocation.

TagThis tool is used to add a tag to the object. To add a tag, chooseSpace >General >Tag from theRibbon;youwillbepromptedtoselectanobjectonwhichyouwanttoaddatag.Onselectingtheobject,thetagwillbeattachedtothecursor.Now,placethetagatthedesiredlocation.Whenyouclicktoplacethetag,theEditPropertySetDatadialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-34.

Figure2-34TheEditPropertySetDatadialogbox

Using the fields available in this dialogbox, you can change the properties of the tag for the selectedobject.UpdateDrop-downThis drop-down is available in theModify panel. The tools available in this drop-down are used toupdate spaces.There are two tools available in this drop-down:SelectedSpace andAllAssociativeSpaces.TheSelectedSpacetoolisusedtoupdatetheselectedspace.TheAllAssociativeSpacestoolisusedtoupdateallthespacesassociatedwiththeselectedspace.

EditinPlaceThistoolisusedtoeditanextruded3Dspace.Todoso,chooseSpace>Modify>EditinPlace fromtheRibbon;theEdit inPlace:SpaceBodyModifiercontextual tabwillbedisplayedandtheselectedspacewillbeconvertedintoafreeformspace.Now,usingtheverticesandcontrolpointsavailableinthefreeformspace,youcanedittheshapeandsizeofthespace.Whenyouhoverthecursoroverthecenterpointofaselectedface,aninformationboxwiththeeditingoptionswillbeattachedtothecursor,refertoFigure 2-35. You can cycle between various options to edit a space by pressing the CTRL key afterselectingthecenterpointofitscorrespondingface.

Figure2-35Theinformationboxshowingvariouseditingoptions

EditSurfacesThistoolisusedtoeditonlythefacesofthespace.ChooseSpace>Modify>EditSurfaces fromtheRibbon;theselectedspacewillbeconvertedintoafreeformspace.Now,usingthemidpointsofedges,youcaneditthefacesoftheselectedspace.Also,aplusiconwillbedisplayedatthebottomfaceofthespace,refertoFigure2-36.Usingthisplusicon,youcanaddwindowsanddoorstotheselectedspace.

Figure2-36Spacewitheditingpoints

EditVerticesThistoolisusedtoaddavertextotheselectededge.Todoso,chooseSpace>Modify>EditVerticesfrom theRibbon; the vertex will be attached to the cursor and you will be prompted to click in thedrawingareatoaddthevertex,refertoFigure2-37.Next,clickinthedrawingarea;thevertexwillbeaddedtothecorrespondingedge.Toremovethevertex,pressandholdtheCTRLorSHIFTkeyandthenclickonthevertextoberemoved.

NoteTousetheEditinPlace,EditSurfaces,andEditVerticestools,youneedtoswitchtoisometricviewport.

Figure2-37Spacewithitsvertexattachedtothecursor

MakeAssociativeThistoolisusedtomaketheboundingobjectsassociativetotheselectedspace.Todoso,chooseSpace>Modify>MakeAssociativefromtheRibbon;theobjectsboundingthespacewillbecomeassociativewithit.Notethatformakingspaceassociativewiththeobject,theboundaryoftheobjectmustenclosetheselectedspace.CreatePolylineThistoolisusedtocreateapolylinearoundtheselectedspace.Tocreateapolylinearoundaselectedspace,chooseSpace>Modify>CreatePolylinefromtheRibbon;apolylinewillbecreatedaroundtheselectedspace.DivideSpaceTheDivideSpacetoolisavailableintheModifypaneloftheSpacetab.Thistoolisusedtodividetheselectedspacebyusingaline.InterferenceThetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downareusedtoaddorremoveaninterferenceconditionfromaselectedspace.RemoveVoidTheRemoveVoidtoolisusedtoremoveaselectedvoidfromthespace.Space/ZoneManagerTheSpace/ZoneManagertoolisavailableintheHelperspaneloftheSpace tab.Thistoolisusedtochangethepropertiesoftheselectedspaceorzone.

ShowBoundariesTheShowBoundariestoolisavailableintheHelperspaneloftheSpacetab.Thistoolisusedtoshoworhidetheboundaryoftheselectedspace.Thistoolisavailableonlyforassociatedspaces.ZONEAzone is a groupof spaceswhich areused for a specific function; for example, a zone created for aspecific temperaturecondition.Youcancreateazoneorzonesbyusing theZone tool available in theSpacedrop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHome taboftheRibbon.Whenyouchoosethis tool,aboxwillgetattachedtothecursorandyouwillbepromptedtospecifythelocationwherethezonetagistobeinserted.Clickinthedrawingarea;thezonewillbecreatedandnameofthezonewillbedisplayedalongwiththebox.Bydefault,Zoneisdisplayedasthenameforthecreatedzone.YoucanchangethisnamebyusingtheName fieldinthePropertypalette.Youcaneditazonebyusingtheoptionsavailable in theZonecontextualtab.TheZonecontextualtabisdisplayedonselectingthezone.Theoptionsavailableinthistabhavealreadybeendiscussedthischapter.ResetAllThisoptionisusedtorevertallthechangestakenplaceduetothegripeditingofboundaries.Todoso,chooseSpace>Boundary>ResetAllfromtheRibbonandselectthespaceswhoseboundariesaretoberesettooriginalstate.WORKSPACESAworkspace is a combination ofmenus, toolbars,Ribbon, palettes, and control panels. It is used torepresentacustomizeddrawingenvironmentbasedontheuserrequirement.InAutoCADMEP,sixdefaultworkspaces are available in theWorkspaceSwitching flyout of theApplication StatusBar, refer toFigure2-38.TheseworkspacesareHVAC,Piping,Electrical,Plumbing,Schematic,andArchitecture.

Figure2-38TheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout

TheoptionsintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyoutarediscussednext.HVACThe tools in theHVAC workspace are used for designing heating, ventilation, and air conditioning

system. Therefore, on invoking theHVAC workspace, the tools related to the HVAC design will bedisplayed.PipingThetoolsinthePipingworkspaceareusedforroutingandcreatingpipelinesinthebuilding.Toswitchto thisworkspace, choose thePiping option from theWorkspace Switching flyout; the options in theRibbon andTOOLPALETTESwill change according to theworkspace.Note that some options forplumbingarealsoavailableinthisworkspace.ElectricalThe tools in the Electrical workspace are used for creating electrical circuits, panels, devices,equipment, and cable trays. To switch to this workspace, choose the Electrical option from theWorkspaceSwitchingflyout;theoptionsintheRibbonandTOOLPALETTESwillchangeaccordingtotheworkspace.PlumbingTools available in thisworkspace are similar to the tools in thePiping workspace. The tools in thisworkspaceareusedforroutingandcreatingplumbinglinesinthebuilding.Toswitchtothisworkspace,choosethePlumbingoptionfromtheWorkspaceSwitching flyout; theoptions in theRibbonandToolPaletteswillchangeaccording to theworkspace.Someof theoptionsforpipingarealsoavailable inthisworkspace.Plumbingisconcernedwiththedrainageandotherwaterrelatedapplications,whereaspipinghasabroadapplicationareasuchasgassupplyandpetroleumlines.SchematicSchematics is the symbolic representation of an object. Using the Schematic workspace, you canrepresent MEP objects in the form of symbols. Some of the tools available in this workspace areschematiclinesandschematicsymbols.ArchitectureThe tools in theArchitectureworkspaceareused tocreatearchitecturalobjectssuchaswalls,doors,windows, and stairs.An architectural layout creates foundation for other domains like piping,HVAC,electrical,andsoon.Toswitchtothisworkspace,choosetheArchitectureoptionfromtheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout;theRibbonandTOOLPALETTESwillchangeaccordingly.You can switch between theworkspaces anytimeduring designing by using theWorkspace Switchingflyout. Also, you can customize any of the workspaces by using theCustomize tool available in theWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Thistoolisdiscussednext.CustomizeTheCustomizetoolisusedtocustomizetheuserinterfaceofAutoCADMEP.OninvokingthistoolfromtheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout,theCustomizeUserInterfacedialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-39.Theareasinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.

Figure2-39TheCustomizeUserInterfacedialogbox

CustomizationinAllFilesTheoptionsinthisareaareusedtoselectthecustomizationfiletobeusedformodification.Also,youcanchangethepropertiesoftheselecteditemfromthisarea.Onselectinganoptionfromthisarea,therelatedpropertiesaredisplayedinthePropertiesareaavailableontherightofthisdialogbox.CommandListTheoptionsinthisareaareusedtocustomizetheselectedcommand.Onselectingacommandfromthisarea,theButtonImageareaisdisplayedat thetoprightcornerof thisdialogbox.Youcanchangetheiconusedfortheselectedbuttonbyusingtheoptionsavailableinthisarea.

PropertiesTheoptionsinthisareaareusedtochangethespecificationsoftheselectedoption.SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:1.TheextensionforAutoCADMEPprojectfilesis.apt.(T/F)2.Whilechangingthecurrentdirectoryofprojectfiles,youcancreateacategory.(T/F)3.ThePROJECTNAVIGATORisusedtomanagethedrawingfilesofaproject.(T/F)

4.InAutoCADMEP,alevelreferstoa__________.5.The _____________ tool is used to display theAutodeskContent Browser related to the currentloadedproject.

6.Azoneisadivisionof___________whichisusedforaspecificfunction.7.The___________toolisusedtoaddaninstanceoftheselectedobjecttothedrawing.REVIEWQUESTIONSAnswerthefollowingquestions:1.TheSynchronizeProjects tool is used to synchronize the current projectwith the previous projectstandards.(T/F)

2.YoucancreateaspacebyusingtheSPACEADDcommand.(T/F)3.TheCustomizetoolisusedtocustomizetheuserinterfaceofAutoCADMEP.(T/F)4.Schematicsisthe___________representationofanobject.5.Youcanedita3Dextrudedspacebyusing____________tool.AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest1.F,2.T,3.T,4.floor,5.ContentBrowser,6.space,7.AddSelected

Chapter3

WorkingwithArchitectureWorkspace

LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•Addcolumnsandgrids•Addwalls•Addwindowsanddoors•Addstairs,railings,andstairtower•Addroofsandslabs•Createlayouts

INTRODUCTIONInAutoCADMEP,beforedesigninganMEPproject,itsarchitecturalmodelisrequired.Anarchitecturalmodel consists of the following elements:Walls,Doors,Windows, Floors, Stairs, Roofs, Beams, andColumns.Italsoconsistsofstandardviews,sheets,andunits.YoucanaddtheseelementsintheprojectusingtheArchitectureworkspace.Inthischapter,youwilllearntousevarioustoolsandoptionstoaddandcreatearchitecturalelementsusingtheArchitectureworkspace.ARCHITECTUREWORKSPACEToworkwiththearchitecturalplans,youneedtoinvoketheArchitectureworkspace.Todoso,choosetheArchitectureoptionfromtheflyoutdisplayedonchoosingtheWorkspaceSwitchingbuttonavailablein the Application Status Bar; the tools required for performing architectural operations will bedisplayedintheRibbon,refertoFigure3-1.

Figure3-1TheRibbondisplayedoninvokingtheArchitectureworkspace

Theprocedureofcreatingvariouscomponentsofanarchitecturalstructuresuchaswall,door,window,grid,andsoonarediscussednext.

CREATINGWALLSWallsare thebuildingblocksofastructure.The tools tocreateawallareavailable in theWalldrop-downof theBuildpanel in theHome tabof theRibbon, refer toFigure3-2.Thereare three tools forcreatingwalls:Wall,CurtainWall,andCurtainWallUnit.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.

Figure3-2TheWalldrop-downlistWallThistoolisusedtocreatethestraightandcurvedwalls.Tocreateawall,choosetheWalltoolfromtheWalldrop-downavailable in theBuildpanelof theHome tab in theRibbon;youwillbeprompted tospecify the start point of the wall. Also, the PROPERTIES palette will be displayed. The promptsequenceforcreatingawallbychoosingtheWalltoolisgivennext.Startpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:SpecifytheStartpointofthewallsegment.End point or [STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:Specify the end point of thecurrentwallsegmentandstartingpointofthenextwallsegment.Endpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc/Undo]:Specifytheendpointofthecurrentwallsegmentandstartingpointofthenextwallsegment.Endpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc/Undo/Close/ORtho close]: Specify the endpointofthecurrentwallsegmentandstartingpointofthenextwallsegment.Endpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc/Undo/Close/ORthoclose]:NoteYou can also invoke the tools given in theRibbonby entering the corresponding command at thecommandprompt.There are various options available in the command prompt to change the properties of the wall.Alternatively, you can select these options from the shortcut menu displayed on right-clicking in thedrawingarea.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.STyleThisoptionisusedtochangethestyleofthewalltobecreated.YoucancreateawallstylebyusingtheStyleManagerwhichwillbediscussedlaterinthischapter.Bydefault,theStandardstyleischosenasthewallstyle.GroupThisoptionisusedtospecifythecleanupgroupforthewall.ThesecleanupgroupsarecreatedbyusingStyleManagerwhichisdiscussedlater.Whentwowallsofthesamegroupintersecteachother,theygetautomaticallycleanedupattheintersectionpoint,refertoFigure3-3.Figure3-4shows the intersecting

wallsoftwodifferentgroups.

Figure3-3Theintersectingwallsofsamecleanupgroup

Figure3-4Theintersectingwallscreatedoftwodifferentgroups

WIdthThis option is used to specify the width of a wall. The width specified using this option will beapplicableforallthewallsthatarecreatedafterspecifyingthisvalue.Thepromptsequenceforchangingthewidthofawallisgivennext.Startpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:WIWidth<240>:Specifythedesiredwidth.Startpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:HeightThisoptionisusedtospecifytheheightofthewall.Theheightspecifiedusingthisoptionwillbeusedforallthewallstobecreatedafterwards.Toviewtheheightofwall,youneedtoswitchtotheisometricview.Thepromptsequenceforchangingtheheightofwallisgivennext.Startpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:HHeight<3000>:Specifythedesiredheight.

Startpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:OFfsetThisoptionisusedtosetthedistanceofcenterlineofthewallfromthewalledge.Bydefaultthevalueissettozero.Figure3-5showsawallbeingcreatedusingtheOFfsetoption.

Figure3-5Thewallbeingcreatedwithcenterlineatitsdefaultposition

FlipThisoptionisusedtoflipthedirectionofwallcreationtoeithersideofthecursor.YoucanalsopresstheCTRLkeyoncetochangethedirectionofthewall.NoteTheFlipCommandworksonlyiftheJustificationoptionselectedfromthePROPERTIESpaletteiseitherLeftorRight.JustifyThisoptionisusedtoswitchthecursorpositiontotheright,center,andleftpointsofthewall.Whenyouchoose this option, four options will be available at the command prompt to justify the wall. ThecommandpromptforjustifyingthewallafterchoosingtheWalltoolisgivennext.Startpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:JJustification[Left/Center/Right/Baseline]<Baseline>:Enterthejustificationoption.Startpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:Thejustificationoptionsavailableatthepromptarediscussednext.LeftTheLeftoptionisusedtojustifythewallontheleftofthecursor.

CenterTheCenteroptionisusedtojustifythewallonthecenterofthecursor.RightTheRightoptionisusedtojustifythewallontherightofthecursor.BaselineTheBaselineoptionisusedtojustifythewallonthecenterofthebaseline.

YoucanalsouseSHIFTtotogglebetweenthejustificationoptions.MatchThisoptionisusedtomatchthepropertiesofthewalltobecreatedwithanexistingwall.Onchoosingthisoption;youwillbepromptedtoselectawallwithwhichthepropertieswillbematched.Atthenextprompt,enterthepropertynamestobematched.Theoptionsavailableat thispromptareStyle,Group,Width,Height, Justify, andAll.After specifying the options, youwill be prompted to specify the startpointofthewall.Specifythestartpointandtheendpointofthewalltocreateawallhavingpropertiessimilartotheoneselectedformatching.ArcThis option is used to create awall in the shape of an arc. The command prompt for creating an arcshapedwallisgivennext.Command:WALLADDStartpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:ArcStartpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Line]:SpecifytheStartpointofthewallsegment.Midpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Line]:Specify theMidpointof thewallsegment.Endpointor [STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Line]:Specify theEndpointof thewallsegment.Midpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Line/Undo/Close]:Specify the Mid point of thenextwallsegmentorenterClosetoclosethewallsegment.Endpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Line/Undo/Close]:Specify the Mid point of thenextwallsegmentorenterClosetoclosethewallsegment.NoteIfthemidpointofanarcistakenintheoppositedirection,awallofinfinitelengthwillbecreated.LineThisoption isused tocreatestraightwalls.Thisoptionwillbeavailableat thecommandpromptonlywhentheArcoptionisactive.Thecommandpromptforcreatinganarcshapedwallisalreadydiscussed.UndoThisoptionisusedtoinvertthechangesmadebythepreviouscommand.UsingtheUndooption,youcaninvertthechangesmadebythewallcommandinthecurrentsession.CloseThisoptionisusedtocreateawallthatmakesaclosedboundarybyjoiningtheotherwalls.Whenyouchoosethisoption,awallconnectingthefirstandlastwallsiscreated.

ORthocloseThis option is used to create two joining wall segments to make a closed boundary of walls. Thecommandpromptforcreatingawallusingthisoptionisgivennext.Command:WALLADDStartpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:SpecifytheStartpointofthewallsegment.Endpoint or [STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:Specify theEnd point of thewallsegment.Endpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc/Undo]:SpecifytheEndpointofthewallsegment.Endpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc/Undo/Close/ORthoclose]:ORthoPointonwall indirectionof close:Click on the direction inwhich youwant the twoperpendicularconnectingwallstomeet;thejoiningwallswillbecreated,refertoFigure3-6andFigure3-7.

Figure3-6Thecornerpointtobeselectedfortheperpendicularwalls

Figure3-7ThewallcreatedafterselectingthecornerpointusingtheORthocloseoptionYoucanalsochangethepropertiesofawallbyusingthePROPERTIESpalette.SelectthewallandthenenterthePRcommandatthecommandprompt;thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-8.Variousrolloutsavailableinthispalettearediscussednext.

Figure3-8ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonselectingawall

BASICRolloutTheoptionsavailableinthisrolloutareusedforbasicsettings.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisrolloutandtheyarediscussednext.GeneralTheoptions in this rolloutareused for specifyinggeneral settings suchas the layer,descriptionof thewall,andthesegmenttype.IntheStylePreviewareaofthisrollout,youcanchangethewallstyletypedirectly and see the preview of the wall style. You can also change the cleanup properties for theintersectingwallsbyusingtheoptionsinthisrollout.DimensionsThe options in this rollout are used to specify the height,width, and length of thewall.You can alsojustifythewallbyusingtheJustifyoptionavailableintherollout.

LocationTheoptionsavailableinthisrolloutareusedtochangetherotationangleandelevationofthewall.YoucanalsochangetheinsertionpointandtheorientationofwallbyusingtheLocationdialogboxwhichisdisplayedonchoosingtheAdditionalinformationoptionavailableinthisrollout.ADVANCEDRolloutTheoptionsavailableinthisrolloutareusedforchangingtheadvancedsettingssuchascleanups,styles,andworksheets.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.CleanupsTheoptionsinthisrolloutareusedforchangingthecleanupradiusforintersectingwalls.Youcanalso

applyoverridesforthestartandendcleanupradiibyusingtheoptionsavailableinthisrollout.StyleOverridesTheoptionsinthisrolloutareusedtooverridethestartingandendingendcapstyles.YoucanalsosetthepriorityofawallwithrespecttoanintersectingwallbyusingthePriorityoverridesoptionavailableinthisrollout.WorksheetsTheoptionsinthisrolloutareusedtomodifythecross-sectionofthewall.Youcanalsospecifythestartpointandtheendpointofthemodifiersbyusingtheoptionsinthisrollout.CurtainWallThistoolisusedtocreateacurtainwall.Acurtainwallisanon-structuralwallwhichisusedtoavoidthe effectofweatheron thebuilding.Thiswall doesnot support any load in thebuilding.ThecurtainwallscreatedbyusingtheCurtainWalltoolcanbestraightorcurved.Thecommandpromptforcreatingacurtainwallisgivennext.Command:CURTAINWALLADDStartpointor[STyle/Height/Match/Arc]:Specifythestartpointofthewallsegment.End point or [STyle/Height/Match/Arc]:Specify the end point of the currentwall segment and startpointofthenextwallsegment.Endpoint or [STyle/Height/Match/Arc/Undo]:Specify the end point of the currentwall segment andstartpointofthenextwallsegment.Endpointor [STyle/Height/Match/Arc/Undo/Close/ORthoclose]:Specify theendpointof thecurrentwallsegmentandstartpointofthenextwallsegmentorenterClosetocreateaclosingwall.Theoptionsavailableatthecommandpromptarealreadydiscussed.YoucanalsousethePROPERTIESpalettetochangepropertiesofthecreatedwall.TheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteforacurtainwallarediscussednext.BASICRolloutThe options available in this rollout are used for basic settings.Most of the options available in thisrolloutaresameasdiscussedearlier.Restoftheoptionsarediscussednext.DimensionsTheoptionsinthisrolloutareusedtochangethebaseheight,length,startmiter,andendmiter.ADVANCEDRolloutTheoptionsavailable in thisrolloutareusedtochangetheadvancedsettings.Theoptionsavailable inthisrolloutarealreadydiscussed.CurtainWallUnitThistoolisusedtocreateaunitofcurtainwalls.Onchoosingthistool,youwillbepromptedtospecify

the startpointof thewall.Specify the startpointof thewall;youwillbeprompted to specify theendpointofthewall.Specifytheendpointofthewall;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheheightofthewall.Onspecifyingtheheight,theCurtainWallUnitStylesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-9.

Figure3-9TheCurtainWallUnitStylesdialogbox

Select a curtainwall unit style from the dialog box and choose theOK button; thewall unitwith thedefined specificationswill be created in the drawing area.Using thePROPERTIES palette, you canchangethepropertiesofacurtainwallunit.Theoptionsavailableforacurtainwallunitarethesameasdiscussedearlier.

CREATINGDOORSDoorsaremovablestructuresusedtoclosetheentranceofaroomorbuilding.ThetoolstocreateadoorareavailableintheDoordrop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon,refertoFigure3-10. There are three tools available in the Door drop-down: Door, Opening, and Door/WindowAssembly.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.

Figure3-10TheDoordrop-downlistDoorThistoolisusedtocreatedoorsofaspecifiedprofile.Tocreateadoor,choosetheDoortoolfromtheDoor drop-down; thePROPERTIES palettewill be displayed, refer to Figure 3-11 and youwill beprompted toselectawalloragridassembly.YoucanpressENTERtocreateadoorasan individualentityoryoucanattachthedoorwithawall.Toattachadoortothewall,selectanexistingwall;youwillbeprompted toselectan insertionpoint.Select thedesiredpointon thewall; thedoorwillbecreated

with the parameters specified in thePROPERTIES palette. The options available in theDimensionsrolloutofthepalettearediscussednext.

Figure3-11ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheDoortool

StandardsizesThisdrop-downlistdisplaysvariousstandardsizescreatedbyusingtheStyleManager.YoucanchooseanyofthestandardsizesforthedoororyoucanspecifyacustomsizebyusingtheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.

Tip. To add an arched door, choose the Style Manager tool from the Style & Display panel intheManagetab;theStyleManagerwillbedisplayed.IntheStyleManager,createanewdoorstylewitharchshape.TheStyleManagerwillbediscussedinthelaterchapters.WidthThisoptionisusedtospecifythewidthofthedoor,refertoFigure3-12.Thisoptionisusedtocustomizeastandarddoor.Bydefault,thewidthspecifiedbyDoorstyleisdisplayedinthisfield.Youcanchangethevalueinthisfieldasperyourrequirement.

HeightThisoptionisusedtospecifytheheightofthedoor,refertoFigure3-12.Thisoptionisusedtocustomizea standard door. By default, the height specified in theDoor style is displayed in this field. You canchangethevalueinthisfieldasperyourrequirement.

Figure3-12SpecificationsofanarcheddoorMeasuretoTheoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifywhetherthewidthandheightofthedoorismeasuredfromtheinneredgeoftheframeortheouteredgeoftheframe.SwingangleThisoptionisusedtospecifythemaximumangleatwhichthedoorcanbeopened.You can change the parameters related to the location of a door by using the options available in theLocationrollout.SomeoftheoptionsavailableintheLocationrolloutofthepalettearediscussednext.OpeningPercentUsing this edit box,youcan specify theopeningpercentageof thedoor.Thisoptionwill be availablewhenyouselectthearchtypeorhalfroundtypedoor.VerticalalignmentTheoptions in thisdrop-downlistwillbeavailableonly if theselecteddoor isanchored.Using theseoptions,youcanspecifywhethertheheightofthedoorwillbemeasuredfromthethresholdofthedoororfromtheheadofthedoor.HeadHeight/ThresholdHeightTheHeadHeight orThresholdHeight option gets activated depending on the selectionmade in theVertical alignment drop-down list. Using these options, you can specify the height of door from thehead/threshold.

RestoftheoptionsinthePROPERTIESpalettehavealreadybeendiscussed.OpeningThistoolisusedtocreateanopeningofaspecifiedprofileinthewall.Tocreateanopening,choosetheOpening tool from theDoordrop-down in theBuildpanelof theHome tab; youwill beprompted toselect awall or press ENTER. Select thewall onwhich youwant to create an opening; youwill bepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpoint.Clicktospecifytheinsertionpointonthewall;theopeningwillbecreated.Onselectinganopening,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-13.SomeoftheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteareusedtochangethepropertiesofanopening.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.

Figure3-13ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonselectinganopening

ShapeThisdrop-down list isavailable in theGeneral rolloutof theBasic rollout.Theoptions in thisdrop-downlistareusedtochangetheshapeoftheopening.Thereare13typesofpredefinedshapesavailableinthisdrop-downlistforcreatinganopening.YoucancustomizetheshapeofanopeningbyselectingtheCustomoptionfromthedrop-downlist.OnselectingtheCustomoption,theProfiledrop-downlistwillbedisplayedbelow theShape drop-down list.Youcancreate the selectedcustomprofilesofopeningusingthisdrop-downlist.Width

ThisoptionfromtheDimensionsrolloutisusedtospecifythewidthofopening.HeightThisoptionfromtheDimensionsrolloutisusedtospecifytheheightofopening.

VerticalalignmentThis drop-down list is available in theLocation rollout. The options in this drop-down list will beavailableonlyiftheselectedopeningisanchored.Usingtheseoptions,youcanspecifywhethertheheightofopeningwillbemeasuredfromthesillleveloftheopeningortheheadoftheopening.Door/WindowAssemblyThistoolisusedtocreateadoororwindowassembly.Theassemblycontainsrequirednumberofdoors,windows,orboth.Tocreateadoor/windowassembly,choosetheDoor/WindowAssemblytoolfromtheDoordrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youwillbepromptedtoselectawall,agridassembly,orpressENTER.Selectawall;youwillbeprompted tospecify the insertionpoint fordoor/windowassembly.Clickatthedesiredpointonthewall;ananchoreddoor/windowassemblywillbecreated.TheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteforadoor/windowassemblyaresameasdiscussedearlier.CREATINGWINDOWWindowsareopeningsinawallordoortofacilitatethepassagetolight.Ifnotclosed,theyalsoallowairandsoundtopassthroughthewallordoor.InAutoCADMEP,windowsarecreatedbyusingthetoolsavailableintheWindowdrop-down.Thisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab.Thetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downlistarediscussednext.WindowThis tool isused tocreateastandardwindow.Tocreateawindow,choose theWindow tool from theWindowdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youwillbepromptedtoselectawall,agridassembly,orpressENTER.Selectawall;youwillbepromptedtospecifyaninsertionpoint.Clickonthewalltospecifythepoint;thewindowwillbecreatedatthespecifiedpoint.Clickonthewalltocreate more windows or press ENTER to exit the command. You can set the opening percentage ofwindowbyusingtheOpeningpercent fieldavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.TheotheroptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpalettehavealreadybeendiscussed.CornerWindowThistoolisusedtocreateawindowatthepointwheretwowallsmeet.Thiswindowcanonlybecreatedonacorneredwall.Tocreateacornerwindow,choosetheCornerWindowtoolfromtheWindowdrop-down available in the Build panel; you will be prompted to select a wall. Select a wall which isconnectedtotheotherwallatthecorner;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpoint.ClickonthewalltoplacethewindowandpressENTERtoexitthecommand.Therearethreeconditionsforcreatingacornerwindow.Theyare:1.Thewallsmeetingtocreateacornermustbein“L”shape.

2.Walljointsmustbecreatedbylinearwallsonly.3.Walljointsmustbecleanedproperly.VariousoptionsavailableintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalettearediscussednext.StandardsizesThe options in this drop-down list are used to change the standard size of the corner window. ThestandardsizesaregeneratedbyusingtheStyleManager.Thepatternofsizedisplayedinthisdrop-downlistisgivennext.(Width1xWidth2)xHeightHereWidth1andWidth2representwidthofthewindowintwodifferentdirections,andHeightistheheightofwindowfrombottomedgetotopedge.WidthThisfieldshowsthetotalwidthofthewindow.ThisisthesumoftheWidth1andWidth2values.Youcannotchangethevalueofthisfield.Width1Thiseditboxisusedtochangethevalueofthewidthinthefirstdirection.Whenyouclickonthiseditbox,abuttonwillbedisplayedontherightoftheeditbox.Onchoosingthisbutton,youcanspecifythevalueofwidthbyselectingtwopointsinthedrawing.ThevaluechangedinthiseditboxisalsoreflectedintheWidthfieldandtheStandardsizesdrop-downlist.Width2Thiseditboxisused tochangethevalueofwidth in theseconddirection.Whenyouclickon thiseditbox,abuttonwillbedisplayedontherightoftheeditbox.Onchoosingthisbutton,youcanspecifythevalueofwidthbyselectingtwopointsinthedrawing.ThevaluechangedinthiseditboxisalsoreflectedintheWidthfieldandtheStandardsizesdrop-downlist.HeightThiseditboxisusedtochangethevalueofheightofthewindow.MeasuretoTheoptionsavailable in thisdrop-down listareused tospecifywhether thevalueofwidthandheightwillbemeasuredfrominsideoftheframeoroutsideoftheframe.OpeningmeasureTheoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythewidthmeasurementpattern.Therearethreeoptionsavailable in thisdrop-down list:Insideofopening,Outsideof opening, andCenter ofopening.Insideofopening

Whenyouchoosethisoption,thewidthofthefirstsideofcornerwindowismeasuredfromtheinneredgeoftheothersideofthecornerwindow.OutsideofopeningWhenyouchoosethisoption,thewidthofthefirstsideofcornerwindowismeasuredfromtheouteredgeoftheothersideofthecornerwindow.CenterofopeningWhenyouchoosethisoption,thewidthoffirstsideofcornerwindowismeasuredfromthecenteroftheedgeofothersideofthecornerwindow.OpeningpercentUsingthiseditbox,youcanspecifytheopeningpercentageofthewindow.CREATINGROOFSANDSLABSThetoolstocreateroofsandslabsareavailableintheRoofSlabdrop-down,refertoFigure3-14.Thetoolsinthisdrop-downareRoofSlab,Roof,andSlab.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.

Figure3-14TheRoofSlabdrop-down

RoofSlabThistoolisusedtocreateasegmentofroof.Thissegmentdoesnothaveadirectconnectionwithotherentities.Tocreatearoofslab,choosetheRoofSlabtoolfromtheRoofSlabdrop-downavailableintheBuild panel of theHome tab; you will be prompted to specify the start point of the roof slab. Thecommandsequenceforcreatingaroofslabisgivennext.Specifystartpointor[STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch]:SpecifytheStartpointoftheroofslab.Specifynextpointor[STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch]:Specify thenextpointofthewallsegment.Specify next point or [STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch/Undo/Orthoclose]:Specifythenextpointofthewallsegment.Specify next point or [STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch/Undo/Orthoclose/Close]:SpecifythenextpointofthewallsegmentorENTERClosetoclosetheboundary.Specify next point or [STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch/Undo/Orthoclose/Close]:SpecifythenextpointofthewallsegmentorENTERClosetoclosetheboundary.

After selecting a roof slab, the PROPERTIES palette will be displayed, as shown in Figure 3-15.VariousoptionsavailableintheDimensionsrolloutofthispalettearediscussednext.

Figure3-15ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonselectingaroofslab

ThicknessThiseditboxisusedtospecifythethicknessoftheroofslab.Whenyouclickonthiseditbox,abuttonisdisplayedontherightofit.Onchoosingthisbutton,youcanspecifythevalueofthicknessbyselectingtwopoints.VerticaloffsetThiseditboxisusedtospecifytheoffsetvalueoftheslabfromtheoriginalpositioninverticaldirection.Youcanalsospecifytheoffsetvaluebyselectingtwopoints.HorizontaloffsetThis edit box is used to specify the offset value of slab from the original position in the horizontaldirection.Youcanalsospecifytheoffsetvaluebyselectingthetwopoints.EdgesThisbutton isavailablebelow theHorizontaloffset editbox.Whenyouchoose thisbutton, theRoof

SlabEdgesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-16.Also,apreviewofthechangesmadein the edges are displayed in the Preview area on the right in the dialog box. You can change theparameterssuchasoverhangvalue,edgestyle,andedgecuttypebyusingthetabledisplayedontheleftinthedialogbox.Variouscolumnsavailableinthistablearediscussednext.

Figure3-16TheRoofSlabEdgesdialogbox

EdgeAlledgesof the selected roof slabaredisplayed in thiscolumnby their sequencenumbers.Whenyouselectanysequencenumber,itsrespectiveedgeishighlightedinthePreviewarea.A-OverhangUsingthefieldsavailableinthiscolumn,youcanchangetheoverhangvalue.Overhangistheareaofslabwhichisoutofthesupportboundary.EdgeStyleBy default, the values in this column are set toNONE.You can choose any predefined style for slabedges.YoucandefineanEdgeStylebyusingtheRoofSlabEdgeStylenodeintheStyleManager.

B-EdgeCutInthiscolumn,edgecutmethodsaredisplayed.Therearetwooptionsforedgecut:SquareandPlumb.TheSquareoption isused tocut theedgeperpendicular to the roof slabwhereas thePlumb option isusedtocuttheedgeperpendiculartotheground.

C-AngleInthiscolumn,youcanspecifyananglefortheedge.Ifyouenterapositivevalue,thebottomedgewillextend.Ifanegativevalueisentered,thenthetopedgewillextend.RiseThiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueofriseforaroofslab.Riseistheslopedifferencebetweenthestartandendedgesoftheslopeofroofslabalongverticaldirection.Youcanalsospecifythevalueofrisebyselectingtwopoints.Todoso,choosethebuttondisplayedattherightofthiseditbox;youwillbepromptedtoselectpoints.Selectthepointstospecifytherisevalue.RunThisfieldisusedtodisplaythevalueofrunforaroofslab.Runisthehorizontalspanoftheslope.Thevalueinthisfieldisgenerallyfixed.SlopeThis edit box is used to specify the valueof slope for a roof slab.Thevalueof slope is specified indegrees.AnychangeinthevaluespecifiedintheRiseorRuneditboxisreflectedintheSlopeeditbox.HoldfasciaelevationTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtomanagethefasciaofroof.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:No,Byadjustingoverhang,andByadjustingbaselineheight.NoWhenyouchoosethisoption,thealignmentoffasciaisignored.ByadjustingoverhangWhenyouchoosethisoption,thefasciaisalignedwiththeroofslabbyadjustingtheoverhang.ByadjustingbaselineheightWhenyouchoosethisoption,thefasciaisalignedwiththeroofslabbyadjustingthebaselineheight.PivotPointXThiseditboxisusedtospecifythepositionofpivotpointofroofslabinXdirection.YoucancalculatethevalueofpositioninXdirectionbyusingtheQuickCalcbuttonavailableontherightoftheeditbox.Youcanalsouse thePickPoint tool to specify thepivotpoint locationwhich isdiscussed in thenextsection.PivotPointYThiseditboxisusedtospecifythepositionofpivotpointofroofslabinYdirection.Alternatively,youcanspecifythepositionofpointbyusingthePickPointtoolavailableontherightoftheeditbox.YoucanalsousetheQuickCalcbuttonasdiscussedearlier.PivotPointZThiseditboxisusedtospecifythepositionofpivotpointofroofslabinZdirection.Alternatively,you

canspecifythepositionofpointbyusingthePickPointtoolavailableontherightoftheeditbox.YoucanalsousetheQuickCalcbuttonasdiscussedearlier.RoofThistoolisusedtocreateamulti-peakedroof.Tocreateamulti-peakedroof,invoketheRooftoolfromtheRoofSlabdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youwillbepromptedtospecifythe roof points. Specify the roof points; the roof will be created with the specified roof points. ThePROPERTIESpaletteonselectingaroofwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-17.

Figure3-17ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonselectingaroof

TheoptionsavailableintheLowerSloperolloutofthePROPERTIESpalettearediscussednext.TheoptionsavailableintheGeneral,Dimensions,andLocationrolloutsaresameasdiscussedearlier.TheoptionsavailableintheLowerSloperolloutarediscussednext.PlateheightThiseditboxisusedtospecifytheheightofthebasepointofrooffromtheground.Youcanalsospecifytheplateheightbyusingtwopoints.Inthiscase,youneedtochoosethePickPointbuttonavailableontherightoftheeditbox.RiseThiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueofriseforaroof.Riseisthedifferenceinstartandendedgesoftheslopeofroofalongverticaldirection.Youcanalsospecifythevalueofrisebyselectingtwopoints.Todoso,choosethebuttondisplayedattherightofthiseditbox;youwillbepromptedtoselectpoints.Selectanytwopointsonthescreentospecifytherisevalue.

RunThisfieldisusedtodisplaythevalueofrunforaroof.Runisthehorizontalspanoftheslope.Thevalueinthisfieldisgenerallyfixed.SlopeThiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueofslopeforaroof.Thevalueofslopeisspecifiedindegrees.AnychangeinthevaluespecifiedintheRiseeditboxorRuneditboxisreflectedintheSlopeeditbox.Youcanalsospecifytheplateheight,rise,andslopevaluefortheupperslopeoftheroof.Tospecifythevaluesfortheupperslope,youneedtoselecttheDoubleslopeoptionfromtheShapedrop-downlistintheDimensions rollout. On doing so, theUpper Slope rollout will be displayed. The options in thisrolloutaresimilartotheoptionsdiscussedforLowerSloperollout.SlabThis tool isused tocreateflat roofsor floors.Theroofsor floorscreatedbyusing this toolare in theformofasegment.Thissegmentdoesnothaveadirectconnectionwithotherentities.Tocreateaslab,choosetheSlab toolfromtheRoofSlabdrop-downavailableintheBuildpanelof theHome tab;youwillbepromptedtospecifythestartpointoftheslab.Thecommandpromptforcreatingaslabisgivennext.Specifystartpointor[STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch]:SpecifytheStartpointoftheroofslab.Specifynextpointor[STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch]:Specify thenextpointofthewallsegment.Specify next point or [STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch/Undo/Orthoclose]:Specifythenextpointofthewallsegment.Specify next point or [STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch/Undo/Orthoclose/Close]:Specifythenextpointofthewallsegment.Specify next point or [STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch/Undo/Orthoclose/Close]:CSpecifystartpointor[STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch/Undo]: Afterselectingaslab,thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,asshowninFigure3-18.Theoptionsinthepalettehavealreadybeendiscussed.

Figure3-18ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonselectingaslab

CREATINGSTAIRSANDRAILINGSStairsarethestructuresthatconnectonefloortoanother,thusenablingeasymovement.Railingsarethestructures which act as support or barrier on the stairs. The options to create stairs and railings areavailableintheStairdrop-down.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.StairThis tool isusedtocreaterectangularstairs.Therearevariousshapesofstairssuchasstraight,multi-landing, spiral, L-shaped, and U-shaped. While going on a curved path, the stairs can have curvedlanding.Insuchcases,theedgesofstairscanalsobecurved.Tocreateastair,choosetheStairtoolfromtheStairdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHome tab;youwillbepromptedtospecifythestartpointofthestairs.Specifyapointasthestartpointofthestairs;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheendpointofthestairs.Specifyapointastheendpointtocompletethestairs.Whilespecifyingtheendpoint,youcanspecifythelandingatdesiredpositionbutthispositionmustbewithinthespecifiedlimits.The limitofa stair iscountedby thevaluespecified in theRisercount editbox.ThePROPERTIESpalette after choosing the Stair tool is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-19. Some important optionsavailableintheGeneralrolloutofthepaletteonchoosingthistoolarediscussednext.

ShapeTheoptionsavailable in thisdrop-down listareused tospecify theshapeof thestairs.Thereare four

optionsavailable in thisdrop-downlist;U-shaped,Multi-landing,Spiral,andStraight.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.

Figure3-19ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheStairtool

U-shapedUsingthisoption,youcancreateU-shapedstairs,refertoFigure3-20.Inthistypeofstairs,thetworowsofstairsrunparallelandmeetattheendpointsbyahalf-landing.Multi-landingUsingthisoption,youcancreatestairshavingmultiplelandings,refertoFigure3-20.Youcanprovidequarterlandingorhalflanding.Thislandingcanbeflatorcanhaveaturn.SpiralUsingthisoption,youcancreatestairsintheshapeofspiral,refertoFigure3-20.Inthistypeofstairs,the steps of stair revolve about a common center point from bottom to top. Spiral stairs can be inclockwisedirectionorcounter-clockwisedirection.StraightUsingthisoption,youcancreatestraightstairs,refertoFigure3-20.Inthistypeofstairs,thestepsarecreatedonastraightpaththatisinclinedtothehorizontalplane.TurntypeThisdrop-downlistisdisplayedonlywhenU-shapedorMulti-landingisselectedfromtheShapedrop-downlist.Theoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedtodefinethetypeoflandingorturningfor

theU-shapedormulti-landingstairs.Therearefouroptionsavailable in thisdrop-downlistwhicharediscussednext.

1/2landingUsingthisoption,youcancreatetheU-shapedormulti-landingstairshavingaflatlandingofuser-definedlength,refertoFigure3-21.1/2turnUsing thisoption,youcancreate theU-shapedormulti-landing stairshaving steps at the turn, refer toFigure3-21.Notethat theremustbeat least threesegments inthestairsanddirectionof turnofall thesegmentsmustbethesame.1/4landingThisoptionisavailableonlywhenMulti-landingisselectedfromtheShapedrop-downlist.Whenyouselect this option, thewidth of landing created at turnwill be equal to thewidth of the stair, refer toFigure3-21.Generally,thesetypeofstairshavetwoormorestepsjoinedtothesquarelanding.

Figure3-20VarioustypeofstairsavailableinAutoCADMEP

1/4turnThisoptionisavailableonlywhenMulti-landingisselectedfromtheShapedrop-downlist.Whenyouselectthisoption,theresultingstairswillhavestepsattheturn,refertoFigure3-21.Thesestairscanturninbothdirections.

Figure3-21Stairswithdifferentturningtypesselected

WinderStyleThisdrop-downlist isavailableonlywhen1/2turnor1/4turn isselectedfromtheTurntypedrop-downlist.ThereisasingletypeofwinderstyleavailableinAutoCADMEP:Balanced.TheBalancedwinderstyleisusedtodistributestepsofstairsevenlythroughouttherun.

HorizontalOrientationThisdrop-downlistisdisplayedonlywhenU-shapedorSpiral isselectedfromtheShapedrop-downlist.Theoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedtodefinethedirectionofturnofstairs.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:ClockwiseandCounterclockwise.Usingtheseoptions,youcanselecttheclockwiseorcounterclockwisedirectionofturnofthestairs.VerticalOrientationTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifytheverticaldirectionofthestairs.Therearetwooptions available in this drop-down list:Up andDown.TheUp option is selectedwhen you need tocreatestairsfromlowerfloortohigherfloor.TheDownoptionisselectedwhenyouneedtocreatestairsfromhigherfloortolowerfloor.TheoptionsintheGeneralrolloutarealsousedtocontroltheshapeofstairs.Someimportanttermsusedfor defining the size of stairs are displayed in Figure 3-22. The options available in theDimensionsrolloutofthepaletteareusedtocontrolthesizeofstairs.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.

Figure3-22Someimportanttermsfordefiningthesizeofstairs

WidthThiseditboxisusedtospecifythewidthofastep.Youcanalsospecifythewidthofastepbyusingtwopoints.Todoso,clickonthebuttondisplayedontherightoftheeditbox;youwillbepromptedtoselectstartpointforwidthcalculation.Selectastartpoint;youwillbepromptedtoselectanendpointforwidthcalculation.Selectapoint;thewidthvalueforthespecifiedpointswillbereflectedintheeditbox.HeightThiseditboxisusedtospecifytotalheightofthestairs.Youcanalsospecifythetotalheightofstairsby

usingtwopoints.Themethodofusingthepointsisalreadydiscussed.

JustifyTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtochangethejustificationofstairs.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Left,Right,andCenter.TheseoptionschangetoInside,Outside,andCenteriftheoptionselectedfromtheShapedrop-downlistiseitherU-shapedorSpiral.

TerminatewithTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtochangethejustificationofstairs.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Riser,Tread,andLanding.WhenyouselecttheRiseroption,thestairsendwithariser.WhenyouselecttheTreadoption,thestairsendwithatread.IftheLandingoptionisselected,thestairsendwithalanding.Figure3-23showstheoutputofvariousoptionsselectedfromtheTerminatewithdrop-downlist.

Figure3-23TheoutputofvariousoptionsselectedfromtheTerminatewithdrop-downlist

FlightlengthTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtocontrolthelengthofonesegmentofastaircase.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:DistanceandTreadlength.UsingtheDistanceoption,youcanspecify theflight lengthbyspecifying totaldistancevalue.Using theTreadlength option,youcanspecifytheflightlengthbyspecifyingthelengthofonetread.Thetotalflightlengthiscalculatedonthebasisofnumberoftreadsinthestaircase.

CalculationrulesWhenyouclickon theTread buttondisplayed in this field, theCalculationRules dialog boxwill bedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-24.Bydefault,theD-Treadeditboxisactivated.Onchangingthevalueinthiseditbox,thevalueintheothereditboxesinthisdialogboxwillchangeaccordingly.Tochangevaluesinothereditboxesmanually,youneedto locktheD-Treadeditbox.Todoso,choose the lockbutton; theCalculationRules dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown in Figure 3-25. Now, you canchangethevalueofanyoftheeditboxinthedialogboxbychoosingthebuttonadjacenttotherespectiveeditbox.Inthisdialogbox,youcanmanuallydefinethevalueintwoeditboxessimultaneously.ButifyouchoosetheC-Risereditboxfordefiningthevalueofrisermanually,thentheotherthreeeditboxeswillbelocked.

Figure3-24TheCalculationRulesdialogbox

The value of the edit boxes that are set to change manually can also be changed directly using thePROPERTIESpalette.NotethatinthePROPERTIESpaletteonlythoseeditboxeswillbeactivethataresettochangemanuallyintheCalculationRulesdialogbox.

Figure3-25TheCalculationRulesdialogboxdisplayedafterlockingtheeditboxes

Someof theoptions in thePROPERTIESpalettearedisplayedonlywhenSpiral is selected from theShapedrop-downlistofthepalette.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.

SpecifyonscreenThisoptionwillbeavailableonlywhenSpiralisselectedfromtheShapedrop-downlist.Theoptionsinthisdrop-down listareused tospecifywhether thesecondpoint specifies the radiusalong thestartingdirectionornot.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.WhenyouselectYesfromthisdrop-downlist,thenyoucanspecifytheradiusofstairsonthescreenwhilecreatingthestairs.RadiusThiseditboxisavailableonlywhenyouselecttheNooptionfromtheSpecifyonscreendrop-downlist.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofradiusforthespiralstairs.ArcconstraintTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtoconstrainthearcofthespiralstairs.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Free,Totaldegrees,andDegreespertread.WhentheFreeoptionisselected fromthisdrop-down list, thestair run isunconstrained.WhenTotaldegrees is selected fromthisdrop-downlist,youcanspecifythetotalangleofarcaroundwhichthestairsarecreated.WhenyouselecttheDegreespertreadoption,youcanspecifytheangleofeachtreadwithrespecttotheadjacentinthestairs.ArcangleThiseditboxisactiveonlywhentheTotaldegreesortheDegreespertreadoptionisselectedfromthe

Arcconstraint drop-down list.Using this edit box, you can specify thevalueof arc angle.ThevaluespecifiedinthiseditboxislinkedtotheoptionselectedintheArcconstraintdrop-downlist.IfyouhaveselectedtheTotaldegreesoptionfromtheArcconstraintdrop-downlist,thenthevaluespecifiedintheArcangleeditboxisapplicablefortotaldegreeofthespiralstairs.IftheDegreespertreadisselectedfromtheArcconstraintdrop-downlist,theanglevaluespecifiedintheArcangleeditboxisapplicableforeachtread.Other options in theDimensions rollout have already been discussed. Some of the important optionsavailableintheAdvancedrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalettearediscussednext.TopoffsetThiseditbox is available in theFloorSettings rollout.This edit box is used to specify the value forthicknessoftheflooratthetopofthestairs.BottomoffsetThiseditboxisalsoavailableintheFloorSettingsrolloutandisusedtospecifythevalueofthicknessoftheflooratthebottomofthestairs.MinimumlimittypeThisdrop-downlist isavailable in theFlightHeight rollout.Using theoptionsavailable in thisdrop-downlist,youcanchangetheminimumlimitfortheheightofflight.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:NONE,Risers,andHeight.Bydefault,theNONEoptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.Asaresult,nolimitissetforheightorrisersofthestairs.YoucanspecifytheminimumlimitofrisersbyselectingtheRisersoptionfromthedrop-downlist.YoucanalsospecifytheminimumheightofstairsbyusingtheHeightoptionfromthisdrop-downlist.MinimumRisersThiseditboxisavailableintheFlightHeightrolloutonlywhentheRisersoptionisselectedfromtheMinimumlimittypedrop-downlist.Youcanspecifytheminimumvalueforheightoftheriserbyusingthiseditbox.MinimumHeightThis edit box is available in theFlightHeight rollout onlywhen theHeight option is selected in theMinimumlimittypedrop-downlist.Youcanspecifytheminimumvalueforheightofthestairsbyusingthiseditbox.MaximumlimittypeUsing theoptionsavailable in thisdrop-down list,youcanchange themaximumlimit for theheightofflight.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:NONE,Risers,andHeight.Bydefault,theNONEoptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.Asaresult,nolimitissetforheightorrisersofthestairs.Youcanspecify themaximumlimitof risersbyselecting theRisers option from thedrop-downlist.YoucanalsospecifythemaximumheightofstairsbyusingtheHeightoptionfromthisdrop-downlist.MaximumRisersThiseditboxisavailableintheFlightHeightrolloutonlywhentheRisersoptionisselectedfromthe

Maximumlimittypedrop-downlist.Youcanspecifythemaximumvalueforheightoftheriserbyusingthiseditbox.MaximumHeightThiseditboxisavailableintheFlightHeightrolloutonlywhentheHeightoptionisselectedfromtheMaximumlimittypedrop-downlist.Youcanspecifythemaximumvalueforheightforthestairsbyusingthiseditbox.HeadroomheightThiseditboxisavailableintheInterferencerollout.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifytheheightofceilingaroundthestairsopeningfromthetread.Thisheightisrequiredsothatpeopledonotcollidewiththeroofwhilegoingthroughthestairs.LeftclearanceThis edit box will be available in the Interference rollout only when Straight orMulti-landing isselectedfromtheShapedrop-downlist.Thiseditbox isused tospecify theclearancevalueforstairsfromtheleftedgeoftheopeningintheroof.RightclearanceThis edit box will be available in the Interference rollout only when Straight orMulti-landing isselectedfromtheShapedrop-downlist.Thiseditbox isused tospecify theclearancevalueforstairsfromtherightedgeoftheopeningintheroof.InsideclearanceThiseditboxwillbeavailableintheInterferencerolloutonlywhenSpiralorU-shaped isselectedintheShapedrop-downlist.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifytheclearancevalueforstairsfromtheinneredgeoftheopeningintheroof.OutsideclearanceThiseditboxwillbeavailableintheInterferencerolloutonlywhenSpiralorU-shaped isselectedintheShapedrop-downlist.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifytheclearancevalueforstairsfromtheouteredgeoftheopeningintheroof.ComponentThisoptionisavailableintheWorksheetrollout.Itisusedtoedittheparametersforstairs.Whenyouchoosethisoption, theStairComponentsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-26.Theoptionsavailableinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.

Figure3-26TheStairComponentsdialogboxNotethatyouneedtoselecttheAllowEachStairtoVarycheckboxbychangingtheoptionsinthestylemanagerbyselectingthesuitableoptions.TreadThischeckboxisavailableintheFlightDimensionsarea.Thischeckboxisusedtoenablechangeinthevalueoftreadthickness.RiserThischeckboxisavailableintheFlightDimensionsarea.Thischeckboxisusedtoenablechangeinthevalueofriserthickness.A-TreadThicknessThiseditboxisactivatedonlywhentheTreadcheckboxisselected.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythe value for tread thickness. On specifying a value in this edit box, an annotated preview of all therelatedparameterswillbedisplayedintheleftarea.

B-RiserThicknessThiseditboxisactiveonlywhentheRisercheckboxisselected.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueforriserthickness.Onspecifyingavalueinthiseditbox,anannotatedpreviewofall therelatedparameterswillbedisplayedintheleftarea.C-NosingLengthThiseditboxisusedtospecifythelengthforextendedportionoftreadovertheriser.SlopingRiserSelectthischeckboxifyouwanttocreateriserwithaslope.

D-LandingThicknessThiseditboxisavailableintheLandingDimensionsarea.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueforthicknessofthelanding.E-AdditionalWidthThiseditboxisavailableintheLandingDimensionsarea.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueforadditionalwidthoflanding.ResettoStyleValuesThisoptionisusedtoresetvaluesofalltheparameterstotheiroriginalvalues.Thisbuttonisavailableatthebottomofthedialogbox.LandingextensionsThistoolisavailableintheWorksheetrollout.Thistoolisusedtoedittheparametersforstairsrelatedtolandingextensions.Whenyouchoosethistool,theLandingExtensionsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-27.Theoptionsavailableinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.

Figure3-27TheLandingExtensionsdialogbox

NoteYoucanedittheparametersinthisdialogboxonlywhenyouhaveselectedtheAllowEachStairtoVarycheckboxfromtheLandingExtensionstaboftheStairStylesdialogboxintheStyleManager.TheStyleManagerisdisplayedonchoosingtheStyleManagertoolfromtheStyle&DisplaypanelintheManagetaboftheRibbon.A-DistancetoFirstTreadDOWNThis edit box is used to specify the value of extension of the tread attached to the lower riser. By

specifyingthisvalue,youcanextendthelandinguptodesireddistancetowardslowerriser.AddTreadDepthSelectthischeckboxifyouwanttoaddtreaddepthtothevaluespecifiedintheDistancetoFirstTreadDOWNeditbox.B-DistancetoFirstTreadUPThis edit box is used to specify the value for extension of the tread attached to the higher riser. Byspecifyingthisvalue,youcanextendthelandinguptodesireddistancetowardshigherriser.AddTreadDepthSelectthischeckboxifyouwanttoaddtreaddepthtothevaluespecifiedintheDistancetoFirstTreadUPeditbox.ExtendLandingstoPreventRisersandTreadsSittingunderLandingsThischeckboxisavailablebelowthepreviewarea.Selectthischeckboxifyouwanttocreatelandingatthe level of the adjacent riser and tread. If you clear this checkbox, youwill get flush or rectangularlandings.ExtendLandingstoMergeFlightStringerswithLandingStringersThischeckboxisavailableintheStringerResolutionareaof thedialogbox.Select thischeckboxtoextendthelandingssothatthelandingstringersmergewiththeflightstringer.RailingThis tool isavailable in theStairdrop-downof theBuildpanel in theHome tab.This tool isused tocreateastand-alonerailingaswellasa railingattached tostairsorsomeobjects.Tocreatea railing,choosetheRailingtoolfromtheStairdrop-down;youwillbepromptedtospecifythestartpointoftherailing. Select a point as the start point; youwill be prompted to specify the end point of the railing.Selectapointastheendpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheendpointagain.Youcanspecifyanend point for the next segment or you can press ENTER to exit the command. Figure 3-28 shows anannotatedrailingcreatedwithguardrail,handrail,andbottomrail.Figure3-29showsthePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonselectingarailing.

Figure3-28Anannotatedrailing

Figure3-29ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonselectingarailingSome of the important options available in theDimension rollout of the PROPERTIES palette arediscussednext.RaillocationsWhenyouselectthisoption,theRailLocationsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-30.

Variousoptionsavailableinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.

Figure3-30TheRailLocationsdialogbox

NoteTheoptionsinthisdialogboxcanbeeditedonlywhentheAllowEachRailingtoVarycheckboxisselectedfromtheRailLocationstabofRailingStylesoptionintheStyleManagerdialogbox.

GuardrailWhenyouselectthischeckbox,theeditboxesavailablenexttothecheckboxgetactivated.Usingtheseeditboxes,youcanspecifyhorizontalheight,slopingheight,andoffsetvalueofguardrailfromthepost.YoucanalsospecifythesideofoffsetbyusingtheoptionsavailableintheSideforOffsetdrop-downlist.

HandrailWhenyouselectthischeckbox,theeditboxesavailablenexttothecheckboxgetactivated.Usingtheseeditboxes,youcanspecifyhorizontalheight,slopingheight,andoffsetvalueofhandrailfromthepost.YoucanalsospecifythesideofoffsetbyusingtheoptionsavailableintheSideforOffsetdrop-downlist.BottomrailWhenyouselectthischeckbox,theeditboxesavailablenexttothecheckboxgetactivated.Usingtheseeditboxes,youcanspecifyhorizontalheight,slopingheight,andoffsetvalueforbottomrailfromthepost.YoucanalsospecifythesideofoffsetbyusingtheoptionsavailableintheSideforOffsetdrop-downlist.Whenyou select theBottomrail check box, then theNumberofRails andSpacing ofRails editboxesgetenabled.UsingtheNumberofRailseditbox,youcanspecifythenumberofrailstobecreatedfromthebottom.UsingtheSpacingofRailseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofspacingbetweentwosuccessivebottomrails.

PostlocationsWhenyouchoosethistool,thePostLocationsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-31.Theoptionsavailableinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.

Figure3-31ThePostLocationsdialogbox

NoteTheoptionsinthisdialogboxcanbeeditedonlywhentheAllowEachRailingtoVarycheckboxisselectedfromthePostLocationstabofRailingStylesintheStyleManager.FixedPostsThischeckboxisusedtoenabletheeditboxesthatareusedtomodifythevalueofextensionofthepost.Therearetwoeditboxestochangethevalueofextension:ExtensionofALLPostsfromTopRailingandExtensionofALLPostsfromFloorLevel.TheExtensionofAllPostsfromTopRailingeditboxisusedtospecifythevalueofpostaboveorbelowthetoprailing.TheExtensionofALLPostsfromFloorLevelisusedtospecifytheheightofallpostsfromthefloor.FixedPostsatRailingCornersThischeckboxisusedtoincludethepostspresentattherailingcorners.DynamicPostsWhenyouselectthischeckbox,theMaximumCentertoCenterSpacingeditboxisenabled.Thiseditboxisusedtomodifythedistancebetweentwosuccessivedynamicposts.Specifythevaluefordistancebetween the dynamic posts in the edit box; the valuewill be taken as themaximum limit of distancebetweenthetwosuccessiveposts.Whenyoucreatearailinghavinglengthmorethanthisvalue,anewpostisaddedintherailing.

BalustersWhenyouselectthischeckbox,theExtensionofBalustersfromFloorLevelandMaximumCentertoCenter Spacing edit boxes are enabled. These check boxes are used tomodify the values related tobaluster. TheExtension of Balusters from Floor Level edit box is used to specify the distance forbottompointofbalusterfromthelevelofcorrespondingtread.TheMaximumCentertoCenterSpacingeditboxisusedtospecifythecentertocenterdistancebetweentheconsecutivebalusters.StairTreadLengthOverrideWhenyou select this checkbox, theNumberperTread edit box is enabled.This edit box is used tooverridethevaluefornumberofbalusterspertread.PerpendicularpostsTherearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.WhentheYesoptionisselectedfromthisdrop-downlist,thepostsintherailingwillbeperpendiculartotherailsintherailing.IfyouselecttheNooptionfromthisdrop-downlist,thepostswillbeperpendiculartothetread.RailingExtensionsThistoolintheDimensionrolloutwillbeavailableonlywhenrailingisaddedtothestairsandthereisaneedtoextendtherailingaheadofthestairs.Therailingscanbeextendedattwolevels,eitheratfloorlevelsoratlandings,refertoFigure3-32.

Figure3-32TheRailingExtensionsdialogbox

AtFloorLevelsWhenyouselecttheUseStairLandingExtensioncheckboxintheAtFloorLevelsarea,theeditboxes

givenbelowget activated.You can specify the values forTopofEntireStairandBottomofEntireStairfortheHandrailandGuardrail lengths in therespectiveeditboxes.Select the+Tcheckboxforaddingthetreadlengthtotheextensionvalue.AtLandingsWhenyouselecttheUseStairLandingExtensioncheckboxintheAtFloorLevelsarea,theeditboxesgiven below get activated. You can specify the values for top of flight and bottom of flight for theHandrailandGuardraillengthsintherespectiveeditboxes.Selectthe+Tcheckboxforaddingthetreadlengthtotheextensionvalue.

NoteIftheeditboxesusedforspecifyingthesettingsforrailingextensionsareunavailable,youcansettheoptionsusingtheRailingStyleoptionintheStyleManager.

StairTowerThis tool isavailable in theStairdrop-downof theBuildpanel in theHome tab.This tool isused tocreateastairtowerfromonestair.Youcancreateastairtowerbyusinganystairshapeexceptspiral.Tocreateastairtower,youneedtofulfilltheconditionsgivennext.1.Astairmustalreadybecreatedinthedrawing.2.Youmusthavemorethanonelevelinthecurrentproject.CREATINGGRIDS,BEAMS,COLUMNS,ANDBRACESTocreategrids,beams,columns,orbraces,thetoolsareavailableintheEnhancedCustomGriddrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon.Thetoolsinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.EnhancedCustomGridThistoolisavailableintheEnhancedCustomGriddrop-down.Thistoolisusedtocreatecolumngrids.Whenyou choose this tool, theColumnGrid dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown in Figure 3-33.Usingtheoptionsinthisdialogbox,youcancreatetwotypesofgrids:orthogonalgridsandradialgrids.Themethodstocreatethesegridsarediscussednext.

Figure3-33TheColumnGriddialogbox

CreatingOrthogonalGridsTo create orthogonal grids, select theOrthogonal radio button from the top left corner of theGridLayoutarea;themodifiedGridLayoutareawillbedisplayed.Bydefault,theToptabisselectedinthedialogbox.Asaresult,thegridlineswillbecreatedintheTopplane.Tocreateagridline,selectthedesireddistancevaluefromthelistavailableontheleftintheGridLayoutarea;thepreviewofthegridlinesdistancedaspertheselectedvalue,willbedisplayedinthePreviewarea.Also,theparametersofthegridlineswillbedisplayedinthetableontherightintheGridLayoutarea.Keeponclickingonthedesireddistancevalues in the list tillyouget therequirednumberofgrid lines.Figure3-34showstheColumnGrid dialogboxafter selectingvalues from the listdisplayed.Similarly,youcanadddesirednumberofgridstotheBottom,Left,andRightplanes.Youcanchangethepatternoflabelingbyusingtheoptions available in theX-Labeling andY-Labeling drop-down lists. Similarly, you can change otherparameters for grids by using the options available in the dialogbox.After setting all the parameters,choose theOK button; the gridwill be displayed attached to the cursor and youwill be prompted tospecifytheinsertionpoint.Specifytheinsertionpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangle.Specify the rotation angle; the gridwill be created at the specified location.PressENTER to exit thecommandoryoucanspecifyaninsertionpointtocreateanothergridwiththesamespecifications.

Figure3-34TheColumnGriddialogboxdisplayedafteraddinggridlines

CreatingRadialGridsTocreateradialgrids,selecttheRadialradiobuttononthetopleftcornerintheGridLayoutarea;themodifiedGridLayoutareawillbedisplayed,refertoFigure3-35.Bydefault,theRadialtabisselectedinthedialogbox,asaresultthegridlineswillbecreatedintheradialdirection.Tocreateagridline,select thedesiredanglevalue from the list available in the left of thedialogbox;previewof thegridlines,attheselectedvalue,willbedisplayedinthePreviewarea.Also,theparametersofthegridlineswillbedisplayedinthetableontherightintheGridLayoutarea.Youcanaddthedesirednumberofgridlinesbyselectingthemfromthelist.Figure3-36showstheColumnGriddialogboxafterselectingvaluesfromthelistdisplayedintheleft.Similarly,youcanadddesirednumberofgridsintheformofanarcbyselectingtheArcstab.YoucanchangethepatternoflabelingbyusingtheoptionsavailableintheX-LabelingandY-Labelingdrop-downlists.Similarly,youcanchangeothersettingsforgridsbyusingtheoptionsavailableinthedialogbox.Aftersettingall theparameters,choosetheOKbutton; thegridwillbedisplayedattachedtothecursorandyouwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpoint.Specifytheinsertionpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangle.Specifytherotationangle;thegridwill be created at the specified location. Press ENTER to exit the command or you can specify aninsertionpointtocreateanothergridwiththesamespecifications.

Figure3-35ThemodifiedColumnGriddialogboxafterselectingtheRadialradiobutton

Figure3-36ThemodifiedColumnGriddialogboxafterselectingvaluesfromthelist

CustomGridConvertThistoolisavailableintheEnhancedCustomGriddrop-down.Itisusedtoconvertthenetworkoflinesinto columngrids.Whenyou choose this tool, youwill beprompted to select a networkof lines.Thecommandpromptforcreatingagridfromlinesingivennext.Selectlinework:Selectthenetworkoflinesthatyouwanttoconvertingrid.Selectlinework:Enter label extension or [No labels] <1200>:Specify the length of extension line from the grid endpoint.Eraseselectedlinework?[Yes/No]<No>:Specifywhetheryouwant todelete thenetworkof linesornot.ColumnGridThistoolisavailableintheEnhancedCustomGriddrop-down.Itisusedtocreateacolumngridwithpredefinedparameters.Tocreateacolumngrid,choosetheColumnGridtoolfromthedrop-down;youwill be prompted to specify the insertion point for the grid. Specify the insertion point; you will bepromptedtospecifytherotationangleforthegrid.Specifytherotationangle;thegridwillbecreatedatthespecifiedinsertionpoint.Again,youwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointforthegrid.PressENTERtoexitthecommand.YoucanedittheparametersofagridbyusingtheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette,refertoFigure3-37.Someimportantoptionsinthispalettearediscussednext.

Figure3-37ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheColumnGridtool

ShapeThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheGeneralrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtochangetheshapeofthegridtobecreated.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:RectangularandRadial.When theRectangularoption isselected, thegrid tobecreatedwillberectangularinshape.Therewillbehorizontalandverticalgrid lines in thegrid.WhenyouselecttheRadialoption,thegridswillbeintheformofarcsandintheradialdirection.SpecifyonscreenThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Theoptionsinthis drop-down list are used to specify themethod for dimensioning the column grids. There are twooptions available in this drop-down list:Yes andNo.When you choose theYes option, you will bepromptedtospecifythecornerpointsofthecolumngridsinthescreen.IftheNooptionischosen,thenyouneedtospecifythedimensionsintheeditboxesavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.X-WidthThiseditboxisavailableforbothrectangularshapedaswellastheradialshapedgrids.ThiseditboxintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalettegetsactivatedonlywhentheNooptionisselectedintheSpecifyonscreendrop-downlist.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueforthewidthofthegrid.Y-DepthThiseditboxisavailableforrectangularshapedgridsonly.ThiseditboxintheDimensionsrolloutofthe

PROPERTIESpalettegetsactivatedonlywhentheNooptionisselectedintheSpecifyonscreendrop-downlist.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueforthedepthofthegrid.A-AngleThiseditboxisavailablefortheradialshapedgridsonly.ThiseditboxintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalettegetsactivatedonlywhentheNooptionisselectedintheSpecifyonscreendrop-downlist.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueforangleofthegrid.LayouttypeThisdrop-downlistisavailableinboththeXAxisrolloutaswellastheYAxisrollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:RepeatandSpaceevenly.WhentheRepeatoptionisselected,thedistancebetweenthetwogridsisfixedanddependingonthetotalsizespecified,thenumberofgridlinesare inserted. If theSpaceevenly option is selected in theLayouttype drop-down list, the totalnumberofgridlineswillbefixedanddependingonthetotalsizeofgridboundary,thedistancebetweenthetwogridlineswillbeadjusted.BaysizeThiseditboxisavailableinboththeXAxisandtheYAxisrollouts.ThiseditboxisavailableonlywhentheRepeatoptionisselectedintheLayouttypedrop-downlist.YoucanspecifythedistancebetweentwogridlinesperpendiculartotheXandYaxesbyusingtheeditboxintherespectiverollout.NumberofbaysThis edit box is available in both theXAxis rollout as well as theYAxis rollout. This edit box isavailableonlywhen theSpaceevenly option is selected in theLayouttype drop-down list.You canspecifythenumberofgridlinesalongXaxisbyusingtheeditboxintherespectiverollout.StyleThisdrop-down list in thePROPERTIES palette for thecolumngridwill be available only after thecustomconvertcolumnisappliedtothedrawing.Itisusedtochangethetypeofcolumntobeusedforbuilding the grid. The options available in this drop-down list areNONE,8mmDropRod support,CH421RollFormedChannelProfile,andStandard.ColumnThis tool isavailable in theEnhancedCustomGriddrop-down.This tool isused tocreateacolumnwithpredefinedparameters.To create a column, choose theColumn tool from the drop-down; youwill beprompted tospecify thepositionofcolumnin thedrawingarea.Selectapointon thegridorspecifyapoint in the drawing area; the column will be created at the specified point. You can change theparametersofthecolumnbyusingtheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette,refertoFigure3-38.SomeoftheimportantoptionsinthePROPERTIESpalettearediscussednext.

Figure3-38ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheColumntool

OnobjectThisdrop-down list isavailable in theGeneral rollout.Thereare twooptionsavailable in thisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.WhenyouselecttheYesoption,thecolumnwillbeattachedtothebaseobject.Ifyoumovethebase,thecolumnwillmoveaccordingly.WhenyouchoosetheNooption,thecolumnwillbeplacedasaseparateobjecthavingnolinkwiththeotherobjects.

StartoffsetThiseditboxisavailableintheDimensionsrollout.Inthiseditbox,youcanspecifytheoffsetvalueforthestartpointofthecolumnfromtheinsertionpoint.EndoffsetThiseditboxisavailableintheDimensionsrollout.Inthiseditbox,youcanspecifytheoffsetvaluefortheendpointofcolumnfromtheinsertionpoint.LogicalLengthThiseditboxisavailableintheDimensionsrollout.Inthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueforlengthofthecolumn.

SpecifyrollonscreenThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheDimensionsrollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.WhenyouselecttheYesoption,youwillbepromptedtospecifythevaluefortherotationofthecolumnwhileplacingit.WhenyouselecttheNooption,youneedtospecifythevaluefortherotationofthecolumnintheRolleditboxavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.RollThiseditboxisavailableintheDimensionsrolloutonlywhentheNooptionisselectedintheSpecifyrollonscreendrop-downlist.Inthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueforrotationofthecolumnbeingcreated.JustifyThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheDimensionsrollout.Therearetenoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlisttochangethejustificationofthecolumn.Justifycross-sectionThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheDimensionsrollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:MaximumandAteachnode.WhenyouselecttheMaximumoptionfromthedrop-downlist,thejustificationmethodisappliedonlytothecolumnshavingmaximumcrosssection.WhenyouchoosetheAteachnodeoptionfromthedrop-downlist,thejustificationmethodisappliedtoeverycolumn.JustifycomponentsThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheDimensionsrollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-down list:Highestpriorityonly andAll.When you select theHighest priority only option from thedrop-down list, the justificationmethods will be applied only to the columns having highest priority.WhentheAlloptionisselectedfromthedrop-downlist,thenthejustificationmethodisappliedtoallthecolumns.CustomColumnThis tool is available in theEnhanced CustomGrid drop-down. This tool is used to create a userdefinedcolumn.Tocreateacustomcolumn,choosetheCustomColumn tool;youwillbeprompted toselect a closed polyline, a closed spline, a circle, or an ellipse. Select a closed entity; you will bepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointorcentroid.Selectapointtospecifyasinsertionpointorcentroid;theConverttoColumndialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-39.SpecifythenameofthecolumnintheNewNameeditboxandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;thecustomcolumnwillbecreatedatthespecifiedlocation.

Figure3-39TheConverttoColumndialogbox

YoucanchangethepropertiesofacustomcreatedcolumnbyusingthePROPERTIESpalette, refer toFigure 3-40. Some important options available in thePROPERTIES palette after selecting a customcolumnarediscussednext.

Figure3-40ThePROPERTIESpaletteBoundspacesThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheGeneralrollout.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-down list:Yes,No, andBystyle.When theYes option is selected in the drop-down list, the createdobjectwillactasaspaceboundary.WhentheNooption isselected in thedrop-downlist, thecreatedobjectwillbenotactasaspaceboundary.WhentheBystyleoptionisselectedinthedrop-downlist,theboundaryconditionsoftheobjectarespecifiedbythestyleoftheobject.

TrimautomaticallyThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheGeneralrollout.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-down list:Yes,No, andBystyle.When theYes option is selected in the drop-down list, the created

objectwillgetautomaticallytrimmedtojoinwiththeconnectingobject.WhentheNooptionisselectedin thedrop-downlist, thecreatedobjectwillnotgetautomatically trimmedto joinwith theconnectingobject.WhentheBystyleoptionisselectedinthedrop-downlist,thetrimmingconditionsoftheobjectarespecifiedbythestyleofobject.MembertypeThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheGeneralrollout.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-down list:Beam,Column, andBrace. You can choose theBeam option from this drop-down list tocreateacustombeam.Bydefault, theColumn option is selected in thedrop-downlist. This option isusedtocreateacolumn.YoucancreateabracebychoosingtheBraceoptionfromthedrop-downlist.TheotheroptionsinthePROPERTIESpalettehavealreadybeendiscussed.

BeamThistoolisavailableintheEnhancedCustomGriddrop-down.Thistoolisusedtocreateabeam.Tocreateabeam,choosetheBeamtool;youwillbepromptedtospecifythestartpointofthebeam.Specifythestartpointof thebeam;youwillbepromptedtospecify theendpointof thebeam.Specify theendpointofthebeam;thebeamwillbecreatedwiththespecifiedparameters.YoucanspecifytheparametersofthebeaminthePROPERTIESpalette.TheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteforbeamaresimilartotheoptionsavailableforcustomcolumn.Theoptionsthatareavailableonlyforabeamarediscussednext.ArrayThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheLayoutrollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.TheNooption is selectedbydefault in thedrop-down list.Whenyouselect theYesoption,youcancreatemultiple instancesof thebeam.OnselectingtheYesoption, theLayoutmethodandNumberofbaysoptionsbecomeavailableintheLayoutrollout.Theseoptionsareusedtospecifytheparameterforcreatingmultipleinstancesofthebeam.LayoutmethodThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheLayoutrollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Space evenly andRepeat. When you select the Space evenly option, the instances are spacedequallyoverthetotaldistance.WhenyouselecttheRepeatoption,theinstancesarespacedaccordingtothespecifieddistancevaluespecified.NumberofbaysThiseditboxisavailableintheLayoutrollout.Inthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevaluefornumberofinstancesofthebeam.BraceThistoolisavailableintheEnhancedCustomGriddrop-down.Thistoolisusedtocreateabrace.Tocreate a brace, choose theBrace tool; you will be prompted to specify the start point of the brace.Specifythestartpointofthebrace;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheendpointofthebrace.Specifytheend point of the brace; the brace will be created with the specified parameters. You can specify the

parameters of the brace in the PROPERTIES palette. The options available in the PROPERTIESpaletteforbracearesimilartotheoptionsavailableforthecustomcolumn.Theoptionsthatareavailableonlyforabracearediscussednext.SpecifyriseonscreenThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheRiserollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.TheYesoptionisselectedbydefaultinthedrop-downlist.Soyouneedtospecifythevalueof riseon the screenwhileplacing thebraces.Whenyouchoose theNo option, you can set theparametersrelatedtorisebyusingtheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.MethodThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheRiserollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:AngleandDistance.OnchoosingtheAngleoption,youcansetthevalueofrisebyspecifyinganglevalueintheAnglefromfirstmembereditbox.DistancealongfirstmemberThiseditboxisavailableintheRiserollout.Youcanspecifythevaluefordistanceofstartpointofthebracealongthefirstmember.AnglefromthefirstmemberThiseditboxisavailableonlywhentheAngleoptionisselectedintheMethoddrop-downlist.Youcanspecifythevalueforrotationofthebracewithrespecttothefirstmember.CREATINGPRIMITIVESYoucancreatebasicobjectslikebox,cylinder,torusandsoonbyusingthetoolsavailableinAutoCADMEP.Thesebasicobjectsarecalledprimitives.ThetoolstocreateprimitivesareavailableintheBoxdrop-downoftheBuildpanel.Thetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.TheoptionsforcreatingdifferentPrimitiveshapesalsoShowsupinthecommandline.BoxTheBoxtoolisusedtocreateaboxwiththespecifieddimensions.Tocreateabox,choosetheBoxtoolfromtheBoxdrop-downintheBuildpanel;youwillbepromptedtospecifythefirstcornerofthebox.Specifythefirstcornerofthebox;youwillbepromptedtospecifythesecondcornerofthebox.Specifythesecondcornerofthebox;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheheightofthebox.Specifytheheightofthebox;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangleofthebox.Specifytherotationvalue;theboxwillbecreated.PyramidThePyramidtoolisusedtocreateapyramidwiththespecifieddimensions.Tocreateapyramid,choosethePyramidtoolfromtheBoxdrop-downintheBuildpanel;youwillbepromptedtospecifythefirstcornerpointofthepyramid.Specifythefirstcornerpointofthepyramid;youwillbepromptedtospecifythesecondcornerpoint.Specifythesecondcornerpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheheightoftheapex.Specifytheheightoftheapex;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangleofthepyramid.

Specifythevalueforrotation;apyramidwithspecifiedsettingswillbecreated.CylinderTheCylindertoolisusedtocreateacylinderwithspecifieddimensions.Tocreateacylinder,choosetheCylindertoolfromtheBoxdrop-downintheBuildpanel;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointofthecylinder.Specifythepointinthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheradius.Entertheradiusvalue;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheheightofthecylinder.Specifytheheightofthecylinder;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangle.Specifythevalueforrotation;acylinderofspecifiedsettingswillbecreated.RightTriangleTheRightTriangle tool isused tocreatea right trianglemasswith specifieddimensions.Tocreatearight triangle,choose theRightTriangle tool fromtheBoxdrop-downin theBuildpanel;youwillbepromptedtospecifythefirstcornerpointoftherighttriangle.Specifythepointinthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtospecifythesecondcornerpointoftherighttriangle.Specifythesecondcornerpoint;you will be prompted to specify the height of the apex. Specify the height of the apex; you will bepromptedtospecifytherotationangleoftherighttriangle.Specifythevalueforrotation;arighttrianglewiththespecifiedsettingswillbecreated.IsoscelesTriangleTheIsoscelesTriangletoolisusedtocreateanisoscelestrianglemasswithspecifieddimensions.Theproceduretocreateanisoscelestriangleissimilartotheprocedureofcreatingarighttrianglemass.ConeTheConetoolisusedtocreateaconewiththespecifieddimensions.Tocreateacone,choosetheConetoolfromtheBoxdrop-downintheBuildpanel;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointofthecone.Specifythepointinthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheradius.Entertheradiusvalue; youwill beprompted to specifyheight of the cone.Specify theheight of the cone; youwill beprompted tospecify the rotationangle.Specify thevalueof rotation;aconewith the specified settingswillbecreated.DomeTheDome tool isused to create adomewith the specifieddimensions.Tocreate adome, choose theDome tool from theBox drop-down in theBuild panel; youwill be prompted to specify the insertionpointofthedome.Specifythepointinthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheradius.Entertheradiusvalue;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangle.Specifythevalueofrotation;adomewiththespecifiedsettingswillbecreated.SphereTheSpheretoolisusedtocreateadomewiththespecifieddimensions.Tocreateasphere,choosetheSphere toolfromtheBoxdrop-downintheBuildpanel;youwillbeprompted tospecify the insertionpointof the sphere.Specify thepoint in thedrawingarea;youwillbeprompted to specify the radius.Entertheradiusvalue;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangle.Specifythevalueofrotation;a

spherewiththespecifiedsettingswillbecreated.ArchTheArchtoolisusedtocreateanarchwiththespecifieddimensions.Tocreateanarch,choosetheArchtoolfromtheBoxdrop-downintheBuildpanel;youwillbepromptedtospecifythefirstcornerpointofthebase.Specifythepointinthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtospecifythesecondcornerpointofthebase.Specifythesecondcornerpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheheightofthearch.Specifytheheightofthearch;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangleofthearch.Enterthevalueofrotationangle;anarchwillbecreatedwiththespecifiedparameters.GableTheGable tool isused tocreateanarchwith the specifieddimensions.Tocreateagable, choose theGabletoolfromtheBoxdrop-downintheBuildpanel;youwillbepromptedtospecifythefirstcornerpointofthebase.Specifythepointinthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtospecifythesecondcornerpointofthebase.Specifythesecondcornerpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheheightofthegable.Specifytheheightofthegable;youwillbespecifytherotationangleofthearch.Enterthevalueoftherotationangle;agablewillbecreatedwiththespecifiedparameters.BarrelVaultTheBarrelVaulttoolisusedtocreateabarrelvaultwiththespecifieddimensions.Tocreateabarrelvault,choosetheBarrelVaulttoolfromtheBoxdrop-downintheBuildpanel;youwillbepromptedtospecifythefirstcornerpointofthebase.Specifythepointinthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtospecify the secondcornerpointof thebase.Specify the secondcornerpoint; youwill beprompted tospecifytherotationangleofthebarrelvault.Enterthevalueoftherotationangle;abarrelvaultwillbecreatedwiththespecifiedparameters.DrapeTheDrapetoolisusedtocreateadrapewiththespecifiedparameters.Adrapeisusedtoshowcontourofthesite.Youcancreateadrapewiththehelpofpolylinesorpolygons.Tocreateadrape,choosetheDrape tool from the Box drop-down in the Build panel; you will be prompted to select objectsrepresenting the contour. Select polylines or other objects representing the contour and then pressENTER;youwillpromptedtoeraseorretaintheselectedcontours.EnterYorNatthecommandprompt;youwillbepromptedtogeneratearegularmesh.EnterYorNatthecommandprompt.OnspecifyingNatthecommandprompt,youwillbepromptedwhethertogeneratearectangularmesh.OnenteringYatthecommandprompt;youwillbepromptedtospecifythefirstcorneroftherectangletocreateamesh.Specify a point in the drawing area; you will be prompted to specify the opposite corner of therectangularmesh.Specifytheoppositecornerofthemesh;youwillbepromptedtospecifythenumberofsubdivisionsalongtheXdirection.Enterthedesirednumberofsubdivisionsatthecommandprompt;youwill be prompted to specify the number of subdivisions along the Y direction. Enter the number ofsubdivisions at the commandprompt;youwill beprompted to specify the thicknessvalueof thebase.Enterthevalueofthicknessatthecommandprompt;thedrapewiththeselectedcontourswillbecreated.Doric

Thedoricpillarisusedforcreatingheritagetypeverticalstructures.TheDoric toolwillbeavailableonly afterBox is selected from thePrimitivesdrop-down in theBuildpanel of theHome tab; theShapeoptionpopsupinthecommandprompt.SelectShapeinthecommandprompt;variousoptionsfordifferentshapesgetdisplayedinthecommandbar.SelecttheDORicoption.Specifythecenterpointofthedoricshapeinthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheradius.Entertheradiusvalueinthecommandbar;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheheightofthedoricshapedpillar.Specifytheheightforthepillar;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangle.Specifythevaluefortherotationangle;adoricpillarwiththespecifiedsettingswillbecreated.TUTORIALSTUTORIAL1Inthistutorial,youwillcreateamodelofabuilding,asshowninFigure3-41.TheplanofthebuildingisgiveninFigure3-42.(Expectedtime:30min)

Figure3-41Modelofabuilding

Figure3-42Planviewofabuilding

Examinethemodeltodeterminethenumberoffeaturesinit.Themodelconsistsofthreefeatures,refertoFigure3-41.

Thefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethistutorial:

a.CreateaprojectfilewiththenameOffice.b.CreateanewconstructwiththenameC03_tut01.c.Createwallsbyusingthereferenceoflinediagram,refertoFigures3-42and3-43.d.Createdoorsaccordingtotheplan,refertoFigures3-42and3-44.StartingaNewProjectFile1. Start AutoCADMEP by usingAutoCADMEP 2015 - English (Global) icon from the desktop andchooseNew>ProjectfromtheApplicationmenu;theProjectBrowserisdisplayed.

2.Choose theNewProject button available at the bottom of theProject Browser; theAddProjectdialogboxisdisplayed.

3.EntertheprojectnameasOfficeintheProjectNamefield.Also,entertheProjectNumberas0001andspecify thedescriptionabout theprojectasdesired in their respectivefields.Makesure that theCreatefromtemplateprojectcheckboxisselected.

4. Choose the Browse button and select the fileCommercial Template Project (Metric).apj from theC:\ProgramData\Autodesk\MEP2015\enu\Template\CommercialTemplateProject(Metric)directoryandthenchoosetheOpenbutton;thepathoftheselectedfileisaddedtotheeditboxdisplayedbelowtheCreatefromtemplateprojectcheckbox.

5.ChoosetheOKbutton;thenewlycreatedprojectfilenameisdisplayedintheleftpaneoftheProjectBrowser.

6.ChoosetheClosebuttonfromtheProjectBrowser;theProjectNavigatorpaletteisdisplayedinthedrawingareaandthenewprojectisactivated.Bydefault,theConstructstabisactiveintheProjectNavigator.

AddingaNewConstruct1.ChoosetheConstructtabinthePROJECTNAVIGATOR.2.ChoosetheAddConstructbuttonavailableatthebottomofthePROJECTNAVIGATOR; theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.

3.Click in theName field,specify thenameofconstructasC03_tut01andchoose theOK button; theC03_tut01drawingfileisopened.

CreatingWallsNow,youwillcreatewalls.BeforethatchoosetheArchitectureoptionfromtheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.

1.ChoosetheWalltoolfromtheWalldrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youareprompted to specify the start point of the wall. Also, the corresponding PROPERTIES palette isdisplayed.

2.Specifythevalueforwidth,baseheight,andjustifyas254,4000,andCenter, respectively, in theirrespectivefieldsintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.

3.Click to specify the start point of thewall and then create thewalls, as shown inFigure3-43.Fordimensions,refertoFigure3-42.

Figure3-43Wallscreated

CreatingDoorsNow,youwillcreatedoors.Fordimensions,refertoFigure3-42.1.ChoosetheDoortoolfromtheDoordrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youare

promptedtoselectawalloragridassembly.Also,thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.

2.Specifythevalueforwidthandheightas1500and3500,respectively,intheirrespectivefieldsintheDimensions rollout of the PROPERTIES palette. Also, select theOffset/Center option from thePositionalongwallfieldintheLocationrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.

3.ClickattherequiredlocationstoplacethedoorD1,refertoFigure3-42.4. Now, specify width as 2000 in the Width field available in the Dimensions rollout of thePROPERTIESpaletteandcreatethemaingate.Forpositioningthegates,refertoFigure3-42.

Aftercreatingthedoors,thedrawingisdisplayed,asshowninFigure3-44.

Figure3-44Thedrawingaftercreatinggates

CreatingWindowsNow,youwillcreatewindowswiththespecificationsgiveninFigure3-42.1.ChoosetheWindowtoolfromtheWindowdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHome tab;you are prompted to select a wall or a grid assembly. Also, the PROPERTIES palette withcorrespondingoptionsisdisplayed.

2. Specify the value for width and height of window as 2000 and 1510 respectively, in theircorrespondingfieldsintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.

3.Clickattherequiredlocationstocreatethewindows,refertoFigure3-42.

ThefinalmodelintheSWIsometricviewandtheConceptualdisplaystyleisshowninFigure3-45.

SavingtheDrawingFile1.ChooseSavefromtheApplicationMenutosavethedrawingfilewiththenamec03_tut1.

TUTORIAL2Inthistutorial,youwillcreateamodelofabuilding,asshowninFigure3-46.TheplanofthebuildingisgiveninFigure3-47.(Expectedtime:30min)

Figure3-47Theplanofthebuilding

Thefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethistutorial:a.Createanewprojectfile.b.CreateanewconstructwiththenameC03_tut02.c.Createwallsbyusingthereferenceofthelinediagram,refertoFigure3-48.d.Createdoorsaccordingtheplan,refertoFigure3-47.e.Createtheroofaccordingtotheplan,refertoFigure3-49.f.Createthestairs,refertoFigure3-50.AfterstartingtheAutoCADMEPsession,thefirsttaskistocreateaproject.StartingaNewProjectFile1.StartAutoCADMEPbyusingAutoCADMEP2015-English(Global) iconfromthedesktop, ifnotstartedandthenchooseNew>ProjectfromtheApplicationMenu;theProjectBrowserisdisplayed.

2.Choose theNewProject button available at the bottom of theProject Browser; theAddProjectdialogboxisdisplayed.

3.EntertheprojectnameasMachiningPlantintheProjectNamefield.Also,entertheprojectnumberand description in their respective fields. Select theCommercial Template Project (Metric).apj astemplatefortheprojectusingtheBrowsebutton.

4.ChoosetheOKbutton;thenewcreatedprojectfilenameisdisplayedontheleftpaneoftheProjectBrowser.

5.ChoosetheClosebuttonfromtheProjectBrowser;theProjectNavigatorpaletteisdisplayedinthedrawingareaandthenewprojectisactivated.

AddingaNewConstruct1.ChoosetheConstructstabfromtheProjectNavigator.ChoosetheAddConstructbuttonavailableat

thebottomoftheProjectNavigator;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.2.ClickintheNamefield,specifythenameoftheconstructasC03_tut02andchoosetheOKbutton;theC03_tut02drawingfileisopened.

CreatingWallsNow,youneedtocreatewalls.MakesurethattheArchitectureworkspaceisactive.1.ChoosetheWalltoolfromtheWalldrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youarepromptedtospecifythestartpointofthewall.Also,thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.

2.Specifywidth,baseheight,andjustifyas254,4500,andCenter,respectivelyintheirrespectivefieldsintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteifnotspecified.

3.Click to specify the start point of thewall and then create thewalls, as shown inFigure3-48. Fordimensions,refertoFigure3-47.

CreatingDoorsNow,youneed tocreatedoors.Fordimensions, refer toFigure3-47.Makesure that theArchitectureworkspaceisactive.

1.ChoosetheDoortoolfromtheDoordrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youarepromptedtoselectawalloragridassembly.

NotethatthePROPERTIESpalettewiththecorrespondingoptionsisdisplayed.

Figure3-48Wallscreatedusingreferenceoflinediagram

2.Specifywidthandheightas1500and3500respectively,intheirrespectivefieldsintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.

3.Also,selecttheCenteroptionfromthePositionalongwallfieldintheLocationrolloutandmakesurethattheStandardoptionisselectedintheStyledrop-downlistofthePROPERTIESpalette.

4.Clickattherequiredlocationstocreatethedoors,refertoFigure3-47.5.Now,youneedtocreatethehingeddoubledoors.Asthesedoorsarenotavailablebydefault,soyouneedtoselecttheHingedDoubleDooroptionfromthePROPERTIESpalette.

6.SelecttheDoortoolfromtheDoordrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youarepromptedtoselectawalloragridassembly.Also,thePROPERTIESpalettewiththecorrespondingoptionsisdisplayed.

7. Click on the Style preview area in the PROPERTIES palette; the Select Style dialog box isdisplayed,choosetheHingedDoubleoptionandclickOK.

8.Specifywidthandheightas4000and3500intheirrespectivefieldsintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIES palette. Select theUnconstrained option from thePosition along wall field in theLocationrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.

9.Clickattherequiredlocationtopositionthedoors,asshownintheFigure3-47.Aftercreatingthedoors,thedrawingisdisplayedasshowninFigure3-49.

Figure3-49Thedrawingaftercreatingallthedoors

CreatingSlabNow,youneedtocreatetheslabwiththespecificationsshowninFigure3-50.1.ChoosetheSlabtoolfromtheRoofSlabdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youarepromptedtospecifythestartpointoftheslab.

2.SelectoneofthecornerpointsofthebuildingdisplayedinFigure3-49;youarepromptedtospecifythenextpointfortheslab.

3.SelectrestofthecornerpointsasshowninFigure3-50.

Figure3-50Cornerpointsfortheslab

CreatingStairsNow,youwillcreatestairsattachedtotheslab.1.ChoosetheStairtoolfromtheStairdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youarepromptedtospecifytheflightstartpoint.Also,thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayedwiththeoptionsrelevanttostairs.

2. Specify width, height, justification, and termination as 1000, 4500, Right, and Landing in theirrespectivefieldsinthePROPERTIESpalette.Also,chooseStraightfromtheShapedrop-downlistintheGeneralrollout.

3.Selectastartingpointforstairsandalignitwiththeadjacentwall,refertoFigure3-51.

Figure3-51Startingpointofthestairs

Now,youwillcreateacutontheslabtoallowapassagethroughthestairstothetopoftheroof.

CreatingCutintheSlab1.ChoosetheRectangletoolfromtheRectangledrop-downavailableintheDrawpaneloftheHometab;youarepromptedtospecifythefirstcornerpoint.Specifythecornerpointsfor therectangle,asshowninFigure3-52.

Figure3-52Rectangletobecreatedforcutintheslab

2.Select the slabandchoose theTrim tool from theModify panel in theSlab contextual tab; you arepromptedtoselectatrimmingobjectlikeapolygonorasolidobject.

3.SelecttherectanglecreatedforthecutandpressENTER;youarepromptedtospecifythesidetobedeleted.

4.Click inside the rectangle, theareacoveredby the rectangle is trimmed.PressESC toexit the tool.Now,hidetherectanglegeometrycreatedfortrimming,

IsometricviewofthedrawingaftercreatingthecutisshowninFigure3-53.

Figure3-53Drawingaftercreatingthecutintheslab

CreatingRailingontheStairs1.ChoosetheRailingtoolfromtheStairdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHome tab;youarepromptedtospecifythestartpointfortherailing.

2.ChooseAttachandthentheStairoptionfromthecommandprompt;youarepromptedtoselectastair.3.Selectthestairscreatedearlier;arailingwiththestandardsettingsiscreatedinthedrawingarea.4.Deselectalltheentities,selecttherailing,andinvokethePROPERTIESpalette.5.Enter900intheSideoffsetfieldintheLocationrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Aftercreatingallthecomponents,thefinaldrawing(inconceptualview)isdisplayed,asshowninFigure3-54.

Figure3-54Thefinaldrawing

SavingtheDrawingFile1.ChooseSavefromtheApplicationMenutosavethedrawingfile.

SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:1.YoucannotcreateacurvedwallusingtheWalltool.(T/F)2.Acurtainwallisanon-structuralwall.(T/F)3.UsingtheStairtool,youcancreateonlystraightstairs.(T/F)

4.A__________isanopeninginawallordoortofacilitatethepassageofairandlight.5.The_____________toolisusedtocreateasegmentofroofwhichisnotconnectedwithotherentities.6.A___________windowcanbecreatedonacorneredwall.REVIEWQUESTIONSAnswerthefollowingquestions:1.UsingtheoptionsintheStyleManager,youcancreatecustomdoors.(T/F)2.Spiralstairscanbecreatedonlyintheclockwisedirection.(T/F)3.TheRailingtoolcanbeusedtoattachrailingtoastair.(T/F)4.Onselectingaslab,the___________contextualtabgetsactivatedintheRibbon.5.The__________toolisusedtoconvertthenetworkoflinesintocolumngrids.EXERCISEEXERCISE1Createthemodelofbuilding,asshowninFigure3-55.TheplanviewofthebuildingisshowninFigure3-56.(Expectedtime:45min)

Figure3-55ModelforExercise1

Figure3-56Planofthebuilding

AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest1.F,2.T,3.F,4.window,5.RoofSlab,6.cornered

Chapter4

CreatinganHVACSystem

LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•UseHVACtools•ChangebasicsettingsofanHVACsystem•Configureductworkoptions•Routetheductline•Createducts

INTRODUCTIONIn this chapter, youwill learn about the use ofmechanical equipment that are required for creating anHVACsystem.AnHVACsystemisusedtomaintaindesiredenvironmentalconditionsinaspecificarea.Itconsistsoftheheating,ventilation,andairconditioningsystems.TocreateanHVACsystem,youneedtoknowtheheatingloadofthedesiredareabyusingthermodynamics,fluidmechanics,andheattransferprinciples.TheseloadsettingsareusedtodeterminethecapacityofequipmenttobeaddedforHVAC.TostartworkingintheHVACworkspace,choosetheHVACoptionfromtheWorkspaceSwitchingflyoutintheApplicationStatusBar. The equipment available in theHVACworkspace ofAutoCADMEP arediscussednext.EQUIPMENTForcreatinganHVACsystem,youneedtoaddequipmentrelatedtothesystemtothebuildingstructure.All the equipment that can be added while working in the HVAC workspace are available in theEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon,refertoFigure4-1.The toolsavailableinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.

Figure4-1TheEquipmentdrop-down

AirHandlerAirHandlerisanequipmentoradevicewhichisusedtocirculateairinaspecificarea.ThequalityofairisalsocontrolledbyAirHandler.TherearetwotypesofAirHandlersavailableinAutoCADMEP:

ModularAirHandlerandPackagedAirHandler.AModularAirHandlerconsistsofvariouscomponentsthattogethermakeanAirHandler.SomeoftheimportantcomponentsinaModularAirHandlerareAHUCoils,AHUEconomizer,AHUFans,AHUFilters,AHUInspectionModules,andAHUMixingBoxes.APackagedAirHandler is a closed unit consisting of all the components available in theModularAirHandlerbutinaninterconnectedmanner.ToaddanAirHandlerinthedrawing,choosetheAirHandlertoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewParts dialogboxwill be displayed, as shown inFigure 4-2.Select theAHULargeCoilscomponentfromtheAHUCoilssub-categoryoftheModularAirHandlingUnitComponentscategoryofAirHandlingUnitsequipment.Also,thepreviewoftheselectedcomponentisdisplayedintherightofthedialog box. The blue arrows in the Preview area indicate the flow of fluid through the selectedcomponent.Various components in theModularAirHandlingUnitComponents category arediscussednext.

Figure4-2TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox

AHUCoilsTheAHUCoil is a component ofModularAirHandlerwhich is used to cool or heat the air comingthrough theduct.There are four ports ofAHUCoil component:Duct inlet port,Duct outlet port,HeatExchangingfluidinletport,andHeatExchangingfluidoutletport.ToaddanAHUCoilinthedrawing,clickonthe+signadjacenttoAHUCoilintheModularAirHandlingUnitComponentscategoryofAirHandlingUnitsequipment;threetypesofAHUCoilwillbedisplayedbelowtheAHUCoilsub-category.

Youcanchooseanyofthethreeoptions:AHULargeCoil,AHUMediumCoil,andAHUSmallCoil,aspertherequirement.Afterchoosingthedesiredoption,selecttherequiredsizefromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistavailablebelowthePreviewarea.AfterselectingtherespectivesizeforAHUcoil,clickin the drawing area; the AHU coil will be placed at the selected position and a compass will bedisplayedbelowtheAHUcoil.OrienttheAHUcoilatthedesiredanglebyusingthecompass.Figure4-3

showsanannotatedAHUCoil.

Figure4-3AnAHUCoil

AHUEconomizerTheAHUEconomizerisacomponentoftheAHUsystemwhichisusedtoincreasetheefficiencyofanAHUsystembyusingnaturalair.InanEconomizer,naturalairisusedtoheatorcooltheairinaspecificarea. For example, if the temperature inside a room is higher than the temperature outside, then theeconomizerdrawsairfromoutsideandmixeswiththeinsideairtocreateanambienttemperature.ToaddanAHUEconomizerinthedrawing,clickonthe+signadjacenttoAHUEconomizerintheModularAirHandlingUnitComponents categoryofAirHandlingUnits equipment.Ondoing so, the standardAHUeconomizer will be displayed below the AHU Economizer sub-category. After choosing the requiredoptionfromtheavailableeconomizers,selecttherequiredsizefromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistwhichisavailablebelowthePreviewarea.Afterselectingthesize,clickinthedrawingarea;theAHUEconomizerwill be placed at the selected position and a compasswill be displayed below theAHUEconomizer.OrienttheAHUEconomizeratthedesiredanglebyusingthecompass.Figure4-4showsanannotatedAHUEconomizer.

Figure4-4AnAHUEconomizer

AHUFanTheAHUFanisacomponentoftheAHUsystemwhichforcestheairtoflowthroughtheduct.ToaddanAHUFan in thedrawing,clickon the+ signadjacent toAHUFans in theModularAirHandlingUnitComponentscategoryofAirHandlingUnitsequipment.Ondoingso, three typesofAHUFanswillbedisplayedbelowtheAHUFanssub-category.Youcanchooseanyofthethreeoptions:AHUFanModulesFrontDischargeUp,AHUFanModulesRearDischargeUp,andAHUFanModulesSideDischarge,aspertherequirement.Afterchoosingthedesiredoption,selecttherequiredsizefromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistavailablebelowthePreviewarea.AfterselectingtherequiredsizeforAHUFan,clickinthedrawingarea;theAHUFanwillbeplacedattheselectedpositionandacompasswillbedisplayedbelowtheAHUFan.OrienttheAHUFanatthedesiredanglebyusingthecompass.Figure4-5showsanannotatedAHUFanModulesSideDischarge.

Figure4-5AnAHUFanModulesSideDischarge

AHUFilterTheAHUFilterisacomponentoftheAHUsystemwhichfilterstheaircomingfromtheinputline.Afterfilteringtheair,itispassedtotheAHUInspectionModule.ToaddanAHUFilterinthedrawing,clickonthe + sign adjacent to AHU Filters in the Modular Air Handling Unit Components category of AirHandling Units equipment; four types of AHU Filters will be displayed below the AHU Filters sub-category.Youcanchooseanyofthefollowingfouroptionsasperyourrequirement:AHUAngleFilter,AHUBagFilter,AHUCartridgeFilter,andAHUPanelFilter.Afterchoosingtherequiredoption,selectthesizefromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistavailablebelowthePreviewarea.AfterselectingtherequiredsizefortheAHUFilter,clickinthedrawingarea;theAHUFilterwillbeplacedattheselectedpositionandacompasswillbedisplayedbelow theAHUFilter.Orient theAHUFilterat thedesiredanglebyusingthecompass.Figure4-6showsanannotatedAHUBagFilter.

Figure4-6AnAHUBagFilter

AHUInspectionModulesTheAHUInspectionModuleisacomponentoftheAHUsystemwhichisusedtocheckthequalityofairbeingspreadinthedesiredarea.ToaddanAHUInspectionModuleinthedrawing,clickonthe+ signadjacent to AHU Inspection Module in the Modular Air Handling Unit Components category of AirHandlingUnitsequipment;thefollowingthreetypesofAHUInspectionModuleswillbedisplayed:AHUInspectionModuleLarge,AHUInspectionModuleMedium,andAHUInspectionModuleSmall.Theseinspection module categories vary according to the size required for the system. After choosing therequired option, select the required size from thePart SizeName drop-down list. Next, click in thedrawingarea;theAHUInspectionModulewillbeplacedattheselectedpositionandacompasswillbedisplayedbelowtheAHUInspectionModule.OrienttheAHUInspectionModuleatthedesiredanglebyusingthecompass.AnAHUInspectionModulehastwoports:oneforinletofairandtheotherforoutletofair.

AHUMixingBoxesTheAHUMixingBoxisacomponentoftheAHUsystemthatmixesthereturningairwiththeoutsideairaspertherequirement.ToaddanAHUMixingBoxinthedrawing,clickonthe+signadjacenttoAHUMixingBoxesintheModularAirHandlingUnitComponentscategoryofAirHandlingUnitsequipment.Ondoingso,thestandardtypeofAHUMixingBoxwillbedisplayedbelowtheAHUMixingBoxessub-category.AfterselectingtherequiredAHUmixingbox,select thesizefromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistavailablebelowthePreviewarea.Afterselectingtherequiredsize,clickinthedrawingarea;theAHUMixingBoxwillbeplacedattheselectedpositionandacompasswillbedisplayedbelowtheAHUMixing Box. Orient the AHUMixing Box at the desired angle by using the compass. An AHUMixingBoxhasthreeports:forinletofreturningair,forinletoffreshair,andforoutletofmixedair.AirTerminal

AirTerminal is a vent throughwhich the fresh air is diffused in a specific area.To add a vent in thedrawing,choosetheAirTerminaltoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downintheBuildpanelof theHometab;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayedwiththeoptionsforAirTerminals,asshownin Figure 4-7. There are three categories available forAir Terminal:Diffusers,Grills, andRegisters.Click on the+ sign adjacent to the desired category in the dialog box; the available options will bedisplayedbelowthatcategory.Selecttherequiredoption;differentsizesfortheselectedoptionwillbedisplayedinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.Selecttherequiredsizefromthelistandthenclickinthedrawingareatoplacetheairterminal.Onplacingtheairterminal,youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationanglebyusingthecompassdisplayedbelowit.Specifytherotationangleeitherbyenteringthevalueatthecommandpromptordynamicallyspecifythevaluebyclickingonthescreen.Ondoingso,theair terminalwillbeplacedat thedesiredpointandangle.Close thedialogboxbychoosing theClosebuttonafteraddingtherequirednumberofairterminals.

Figure4-7TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwithoptionsforAirTerminals

NoteYoucanspecifytheflowratefortheselectedairterminalbyusingtheFlow(EachTerminal)editboxavailableintheFlow tabof theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox.Theunit forspecifying thevalueshouldbel/s.

FanFanisanequipmentthatgeneratesacurrentofair.Toaddafaninthedrawing,choosetheFantoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayedwiththeoptionsrelatedtofans,asshowninFigure4-8.Selecttherequiredfanfromthelist;various sizes for the selected fanwill be displayed in thePart SizeName drop-down list availablebelowthePreviewarea.Selecttherequiredsizefromthelistandclickinthedrawingarea;theselectedfanwillbeplacedatthespecifiedlocationandacompasswillbedisplayedbelowthefaninthedrawingarea.Using thiscompass,youcanspecify the rotationvaluedynamically.Ondoing so, the fanwillbe

placedatthedesiredpointandangle.Afteraddingtherequirednumberoffans,closethedialogboxbychoosingtheclosebutton.

Figure4-8TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwithoptionsforfans

DamperDamper is anHVACequipment that is used to regulate the flowof air in anHVAC system.To add adamperinthesystem,choosetheDampertoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHome tab; theAddMulti-viewParts dialog boxwill be displayedwith the options for dampers, asshown in Figure 4-9. There are four categories of dampers: Balancing Dampers, Fire Dampers,RectangularCurtain Fire ShieldDamper, andRectangular Smoke ShieldDamper PTC.TheBalancingDamperisusedtocontroltheamountofairflowingthroughtheduct.TheFireDamperisusedtorestricttheflowoffirethroughtheduct,incasethebuildingcatchesafire.TheRectangularCurtainFireShieldDamperisalsousedasashieldagainstfirebutthistypeoffiredampersareintheformofcurtains.TheRectangularSmokeShieldDamperPTCisusedasashieldagainstsmoke.PTCisatypeofsmokeshielddamper which stands for Proportional Torque Control. Click on the + sign adjacent to the requiredcategory;alistwithrelativedamperswillbedisplayed.Selecttherequireddamperfromthelist;varioussizesfortheselecteddamperwillbedisplayedinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistavailablebelowthePreviewarea.Selecttherequiredsizefromthelistandclickinthedrawingarea;theselecteddamperwill be placed at the specified location and a compass will be displayed below the damper in thedrawingarea.Usingthiscompass,youcanspecifythevalueofrotationdynamically.Afterspecifyingallrequiredparameters,theDamperwillbeplacedatthedesiredpointandangle.ClosethedialogboxbychoosingtheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-ViewPartsdialogbox.

Figure4-9TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwithoptionsfordampers

VAVUnitAVAVunitisanequipmentusedtovarythespeedofairflowingthroughtheduct.ThetemperatureofairtobesuppliedtoVAVunitisconstant;thereforetheairflowisregulatedtomeettheuserrequirements.ToaddaVAVUnit in theHVACsystem,choose theVAVUnit tool fromtheEquipment drop-down in theBuildpaneloftheHometab;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayedwiththeoptionsforVAVunit,asshowninFigure4-10.In thisdialogbox, thereare twooptionsavailableforselectingthetypeofVAVunitfortheHVACsystemDesign:AirTerminalsandVAVunits.TheAirTerminalsoptionhasasuboptionOutletPlenums.TheVAVunitshasthesuboption,VAVBoxeswhichcanbeopenedintheAddMultiViewPartswindow.Clickon the+signadjacent to therequiredcategory;a listof relativeVAVboxeswill bedisplayed. Select the requiredVAVunit from theVAVUnits category; the standardsizes available for the selected VAV unit will be displayed in the Part Size Name drop-down list.Choosetherequiredsizefromthedrop-downlistandclickinthedrawingareatoplacetheVAVunit;acompasswillbedisplayedattachedtotheVAVunitforspecifyingtheangle.SpecifytherotationangleandthenchoosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox.

Figure4-10TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwithoptionsforVAVunitEquipmentUsingtheEquipmenttool,youcanaddanyequipmentavailableinAutoCADMEPtothestructure.WhenyouchoosetheEquipmenttoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpaneloftheHometab,theAddMulti-view Parts dialog box will be displayed, as shown in Figure 4-11. Click on the + signadjacenttotheMechanicalcategoryinthedialogbox;themechanicalequipmentavailableinAutoCADMEPwillbedisplayedinatreestructure,refertoFigure4-12.

Figure4-12TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwithmechanicalequipmentClickonthe+signadjacenttotherequiredcomponent;variousoptionsrelatedtotheselectedcomponentwillbedisplayedinalist.Selecttherequiredoptionfromthelistandthenclickinthedrawingareato

placethecomponent.Acompasswillalsobedisplayedbelowthecomponent.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotatethecomponentattherequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitthedialogbox.DUCTLINEDuct line is the circuit of ducts inserted in a particular area to create desired air and temperatureconditions.Beforecreatingaductline,youmustknowaboutthespecificationssuchassizeofduct,airflowrate in theduct,numberofbranches required,and thesizeofduct in thebranches.Afterenteringthesespecifications,youwillcreatethepathofductline.Themethodsofsizingtheductandcreatingaductlinearediscussednext.SizingtheDuctLineInAutoCADMEP,theductsizeofmainductlineisdependentontwoparameters:thetotalamountofairtobecirculatedwhichiscontrolledbyFlowRatevariableandthevelocityofair in theductwhichiscontrolledbyVelocityvariable.Thesetwovariablesarediscussednext.FlowRateYoucanchangethevalueofthisvariablebyusingtheFlowRateeditboxavailableintheSizingrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalettewhichisdisplayedonchoosingtheDucttool.Flowrateisthetotalvolumeofairthatistobeprovidedinaspecificarea.EntertheflowratevalueintheFlowRateeditboxinthePROPERTIES palette; the value of friction and velocity will be calculated according to the rulesspecifiedinthedesignpropertiesofducttype.VelocityVelocity of air flowing through a duct is a dependent variable. You cannot control the value of thisvariabledirectly.Thisvariableisdependentontheductsize.Ifyouincreasetheductsize,thevalueofvelocitywillautomaticallydecreaseandalsothevalueoffrictionwilldecrease.Ifyoudecreasethesizeofduct,thevalueofvelocityandfrictionwillincrease.Inotherwordswiththeductsize,youcancontrolthevalueof velocity.Note that thevalueof velocity and friction also changes according to theoptionselectedintheSystemdrop-downlistintheBASICrollout.RoutingtheDuctLineRoutingistheprocessofcreatingaductlineinalayout.Routingofductinvolvesmanyfactorssuchaspositionofhandlingunits,positionofdiffusers,andlayoutofbuilding.Therearesomemajorpointsthataretobeconsideredwhileroutingtheductlinethatarediscussednext.1.Duct lineshouldberouted insuchaway that itdoesnotpass throughanarea that ishavinga largetemperaturedifferencefromtheairinsidetheduct.

2.Rise/Slopeofductmustbedeterminedafterconsideringthetemperatureofairinsidetheduct.3.Ductroutesmustbeasstraightaspossible.4.Ductmustbelargerattheopeningpointtotheairfilterentryandatthereturningpointoftheunit.5.Alwaystrytoroutethrougheitherthebasementortheatticsothatyoucansupporttheductsbyusingtheducthangers.

6.Itisalwaysgoodtopositiontheairterminalsandairhandlingunitfirstbeforeroutingtheductline.7.Foraverticalrun,theductmustbefastenedtoawall.DUCTDuctisanobjectwhichisusedtodeliverorremoveairfromanHVACsystem.TherearetwotypesofductsavailableinAutoCADMEP:DuctandFlexDuct.ToolstocreatetheseductsareavailableintheDuctdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.DuctThistoolisusedtocreatearigidductintheHVACsystem.Thisductcanberectangular,oval,round,orcustomshaped.Tocreatearigidduct,choosetheDucttoolfromtheDuctdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure4-13.TheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpalettearediscussednext.

Figure4-13ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheDucttoolDescriptionThisfieldisavailableintheGeneral>BASICrolloutinthePROPERTIESpaletteoftheDesign tab.Whenyouclickinthisfield,theDescriptiondialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure4-14.YoucanenterdescriptionabouttheselectedobjectinthetextboxavailablebelowtheEdit thedescription

forthisobjectoption.ChooseOKtoexitthedialogbox.

Figure4-14TheDescriptiondialogbox

SystemThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBASIC>GeneralrolloutintheDesigntabofthePROPERTIESpalette.Thisdrop-down listcontainsvariousoptions for systemdefinitionsof theduct.Bydefault, theStandard(STD)optionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.

RoutingPreferencesThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBASIC>Dimensionsrollout.Theoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedforspecifyingtheroutingstyleofduct.Bydefault,theStandardoptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.

ShapeThis drop-down list is available in theBASIC >Dimensions rollout. This drop-down list containsoptions to change the shape of duct. There are four options available in this drop-down list:Oval,Rectangular,Round,andUndefined.Generally,roundandrectangularductsareusedinindustries.

WidthThiseditbox isavailable in theDimensions rolloutwhen theRectangularorOval option is selectedfromtheShape drop-down list.You can specify thevalueofwidthof theduct byusing this edit box.Whenyouclickontheinvertedtriangleadjacenttothiseditbox,adrop-downlistisdisplayed.Youcanselect the standard sizes available for width from this edit box. TheCalculate Size toggle button isavailable on the right of this edit box.Whenyou choose thebutton, thewidthof duct is automaticallycalculatedonthebasisoftheflowrate,friction,velocity,andsoon.Theselectedsizeforwidthoftheductcanbelockedbyclickingonthelockbuttonontheextremerightofthiseditbox.HeightThiseditbox isavailable in theDimensions rolloutwhen theRectangularorOval option is selectedfromtheShapedrop-downlist.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifytheheightofduct.DiameterThiseditboxisavailableintheDimensionsrolloutwhentheRoundoptionisselectedfromtheShapedrop-down list. Using this edit box, you can specify the diameter of duct. TheCalculate Size togglebutton is available in the right of this edit box.When you choose this button, the diameter of duct is

automaticallycalculatedonthebasisofparameterssuchasflowrate,friction,andvelocity.FlowRateUsingthiseditbox,youcanspecifytherateofflowoffluidthroughtheduct.Theflowrateisspecifiedinliterspersecond.FrictionThisfieldisavailableintheDimensions>Sizing rollout.Thisfieldshowsthevalueoffrictionactingagainst the flow of fluid through the duct. The value in this field is controlled by theDuct SystemDefinitionssectionintheStyleManager.

VelocityThisfieldisavailableintheDimensions>Sizingrollout.Thisfieldshowsthevalueofvelocityoffluidpassingthroughtheduct.ThevalueinthisfieldisalsocontrolledbyDuctSystemDefinitionssectionintheStyleManager.SpecifyCutLengthThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheDimensions>Sizingrollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.Bydefault,theNooptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.OnselectingtheYesoption,youcanspecifythecutlengthintherespectivefield.

CutLengthThiseditboxisavailableintheDimensions>SizingrolloutonlywhentheYesoptionisselectedfromtheSpecifyCutLength drop-down list.You can specify the value of cut length in this edit box. Cutlengthisthemaximumlengthofapieceofductthatisavailableforcreatingductline.

ElevationThiseditbox isavailable in theBASIC>Placement rollout.Using thiseditbox,youcanspecify thevalueofelevationofductfromtheground.StartElevationThisfieldisavailableintheBASIC>Placementrollout.ThevaluespecifiedinthisfieldisthesameastheonespecifiedintheElevationeditbox.JustifyThisdrop-downlistisavailableinthePlacement>Justificationrollout.Variousoptionsareavailableinthisdrop-downlisttochangethejustificationofduct.HorizontalOffsetThiseditboxisavailableinthePlacement>Justificationrollout.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythehorizontaldistancevaluebywhichtheductisplacedfromtheselectedjustificationpoint.VerticalOffsetThiseditboxisavailableinthePlacement>Justificationrollout.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecify

theverticaldistancevaluebywhichtheductisplacedfromtheselectedjustificationpoint.BendMethodThis drop-down list is available in theRouting rollout and is used to define themethods of bendingappliedonabend in theductsystem.Thereare threeoptionsavailable in thisdrop-down list:Elbow,Offset,andTransition-Offset.TheElbowoptionisselectedbydefault.BendAngleThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheRoutingrolloutandisusedtospecifytheangleofbendthatistobeappliedtoanybendwhilecreatingaduct.ConnectiondetailsThisbuttonisavailableintheADVANCEDrollout.Whenyouchoosethisbutton,theConnectionDetailsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure4-15.Therearetworolloutsavailableinthedialogboxthatcontainthedetailsoftheflowdirectionandtheconnectiontypeofinletandoutletconnections.

Figure4-15TheConnectionDetailsdialogbox

LiningthicknessThiseditboxisavailableintheADVANCEDrollout.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofthicknessoflinerintheduct.

InsulationthicknessThis edit box is also available in the ADVANCED rollout and is used to specify the thickness ofinsulationappliedontheduct.

SlopeformatTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifytheformatinwhichtheslopevaluewillbeentered.There are four options available in this drop-down list: Angle (Decimal Degrees); Percentage,100%=45degree;Percentage,100%=90degree;andRise/Run(Meters/Meters).SlopeThiseditboxisavailableintheADVANCED>RoutingOptionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Youcanspecifythevalueofslopeinthiseditbox.TheformatinwhichthevaluewillbespecifiedinthiseditboxdependsontheoptionselectedintheSlopeformatdrop-downlist.Ifyouchangetheslopevaluewhileaddingmoreducts,thefittingatjointswilladjustautomaticallytoprovidethechangedslope.BranchfittingThisdrop-downlist isavailableintheADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIESpalette.Therearetwooptionsinthisdrop-downlist:TeeandTakeoff.WhentheTeeoptionisselectedinthedrop-downlist,thenthebranchestobecreatedwillbejoinedtothemainductthroughaTeefitting.WhentheTakeoffoptionisselectedinthedrop-downlist,thebrancheswillbejoinedtothemainductthroughtheTakeofffitting.Terminal-ductconnectionThisdrop-downlist isavailableintheADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIESpalette.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Flexible,ElbowwithRigidDuct,andExtendedDuct.FittingSettingsThisoption isavailable in theADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIES palette.Whenyouclickonthisoption,theFittingSettingsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure4-16.The options in this dialog box are used to change the type of fitting to be usedwhile creating thebranchesintheduct.

Figure4-16TheFittingSettingsdialogbox

PreferencesThisoption isavailable in theADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIES palette.Whenyouclickonthisoption,theDuctLayoutPreferencesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure4-17.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxareusedtodefinethelayoutpreferencesforcreatingaduct.Usingtheoptionsinthisdialogbox,youcansetthepreferencesforvariablessuchasSlope,Elevation,Labelstyle,Flowarrowstyle,andElbowlayout.

Figure4-17TheDuctLayoutPreferencesdialogbox

StyleThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheADVANCED>LabelsandFlowArrows>LabelsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtoapplythelabelstylestoduct.LayoutmethodThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheADVANCED>LabelsandFlowArrows>LabelsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteonlywhenNONE isnotselectedfromtheStyledrop-downlist.Thereare twooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:BydistanceandByquantity.Theseoptionsareusedtospecifythelayoutmethodofducts.

NumberofLabelsThis edit box is available in theADVANCED>Labels and Flow Arrows >Labels rollout of thePROPERTIESpaletteonlywhenNONEisnotselectedfromtheStyledrop-downlistandByquantityisselectedfromtheLayoutmethoddrop-downlist.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifytotalnumberoflabelsappliedonasegmentduct.DistancebetweenThis edit box is available in theADVANCED>Labels and Flow Arrows >Labels rollout of thePROPERTIESpaletteonlywhenNONEisnotselectedfromtheStyledrop-downlistandBydistanceis selected from theLayoutmethod drop-down list.Using this edit box, you can specify the distancebetweentwoconsecutivelabelsappliedonaduct.TheStyle,Layoutmethod,NumberofLabels,andDistancebetweenoptionsarealsoavailableintheFlowArrowsrollout.TheseoptionsworkforflowarrowsinthesamewayasforLabels.FlexDuctThistoolisusedtocreateflexibleductsintheHVACsystem.Tocreateaflexibleduct,choosetheFlexDucttoolfromtheDuctdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;thePROPERTIESpalette will be displayed, refer to Figure 4-13. Some of the options available in thePROPERTIESpaletteafterselectingflexducthavealreadybeendiscussedintheDuctsectionofthischapter.Restoftheoptionsarediscussednext.SegmentThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBASIC>RoutingrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Therearethree options available in this drop-down list:Line,Arc, andSpline. Using theLine option, you cancreateaflexductintheformofastraightline.UsingtheArcoption,youcancreateaflexductintheformofanarc.UsingtheSplineoption,youcancreateaflexductintheformofaspline.RadiusfactorThiseditboxisavailableintheBASIC>RoutingrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofradiusonthebend.Thevalueenteredinthiseditboxismultipliedbythediametervalueoftheflexducttogivetheradiusatthebend.ThiseditboxisavailableonlywhentheLineoptionisselectedintheSegmentdrop-downlist.

GraphicsThisdrop-downlist isavailableintheADVANCED>Graphics rollout in thePROPERTIESpalette.Thisdrop-downlistisavailableforboth1-Lineand2-Lineannotationsintherespectiverollouts.Usingthe options available in this drop-down list, you can specify the shape and pattern of the annotativerepresentationoftheductinthe2-Ddrawing.

PitchThiseditboxisavailableintheADVANCED>GraphicsrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Thiseditboxisavailableforboth1-Lineand2-Lineannotationsintherespectiverollouts.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifythelengthofonepieceflexduct.

VertexThiseditboxisavailableintheADVANCED>Geometry rollout in thePROPERTIESpalettewhenyou select an already created flex duct.Using this edit box, you can select an available vertex of theflexibleduct.Youcanalsochangetheselectedvertexbyusingthescrollbuttonsavailableintherightoftheeditbox.Ondoingso,theoptionsrelevanttotheselectedvertexwillbedisplayed.VertexXThiseditboxisavailableintheADVANCED>GeometryrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifyXcoordinateoftheselectedvertex.VertexYThiseditboxisavailableintheADVANCED>GeometryrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifyYcoordinateoftheselectedvertex.VertexZThiseditboxisavailableintheADVANCED>GeometryrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifyZcoordinateoftheselectedvertex.DUCTFITTINGDuct fitting is used to connectmultiple ducts. The tools to add duct fitting are available in theDuctFittingdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon.Therearethreetoolsavailableinthis drop-down: Duct Fitting, Duct Custom Fitting, and Duct Transition Utility. These tools arediscussednext.DuctFittingThis tool is used to add a user specified fitting in theduct.On choosing this tool, thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,refertoFigure4-18.Variousoptionsavailableinthispalettearediscussednext.

Figure4-18ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedafterchoosingtheDuctFittingtool

DescriptionThisfieldisavailableintheBASIC>GeneralrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Whenyouclickinthisfield,theDescriptiondialogboxwillbedisplayed.Youcanwritedescriptionaboutthefittinginthistextbox.SystemThisdrop-downlist isavailable in theBASIC>General rolloutof thePROPERTIESpalette.Therearevariousoptions available in thisdrop-down list.Theseoptions areused to change the standardoffittingtobecreated.Bydefault,theStandard(STD)optionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.PartThisfieldisavailableintheBASIC>GeneralrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Whenyouclickinthisfield,theSelectPartdialogboxwillbedisplayed,refertoFigure4-19.Therearevarioustypesoffittings available for duct in this dialog box. All these fittings are displayed in the SELECT PARTFROMCATALOGrollout.Thefittingsinthisrolloutaredividedintogroupsinatreestructure.YoucanfiltertheavailablepartsdependingonyourrequirementsbyusingtheoptionsintheFILTER rolloutofthisdialogbox.ThefilteredoptionswillbedisplayedintheSELECTPARTSIZEareaofthisdialogbox.YoucanalsoselecttherequiredfittingfromtheHVACToolpalette.ThesefittingsareavailableintheFittingtabofthepalette.

Figure4-19TheSelectPartdialogbox

CurrentSizeThis drop-down list is available in theBASIC>General rollout of thePROPERTIES palette. Theoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedtochangethesizeofthecurrentselectedfitting.ConnectionsRolloutThisrolloutisavailableintheBASIC>DimensionsrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Theoptionsinthisrolloutareusedtochangethedimensionsofaselectedfitting.Theoptionsinthisrolloutmayvarydependingontheselectedfitting.ElevationThiseditbox isavailable in theBASIC>Placement rollout in thePROPERTIESpalette.Using thisedit box, you can specify the value of height of fitting from the ground level. By default,UCS : 0 isdisplayedinthiseditbox.SpecifyrotationonscreenThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBASIC>PlacementrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo. Ifyouselect theYesoption,youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationvalueonscreenwhilecreatingthefitting.IfyouselecttheNooption,thenyouneedtospecifytherotationvalueintheeditboxavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.

RotationThiseditbox isavailable in theBASIC>Placement rollout in thePROPERTIESpalette.Using thiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofrotationofthefittingbeforeplacingitinthedrawing.ThiseditboxisavailableonlywhentheNooptionisselectedintheSpecifyrotationonscreendrop-downlist.VanesThisdrop-down list is available in theADVANCED>PROPERTIES palette.There are twooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.IfyouselecttheYesoption,thevaneswillbeaddedtothefittingandifyouselecttheNooption,thevaneswillnotbeaddedtothefitting.DuctCustomFittingThis tool isusedforcreatingcustomfittings in theduct line.Tocreateacustomfitting,youmusthavelines,arcs,orpolylinescreatedinthedrawingarea.ChoosetheDuctCustomFittingtoolfromtheDuctFitting drop-down; you will be prompted to select lines, arcs, or polylines. Select lines, arcs, orpolylinesfromthedrawingareaandthenpressENTER;theCreateDuctCustomFittingdialogboxwillbedisplayed,refertoFigure4-20.

Figure4-20TheCreateDuctCustomFittingdialogbox

Dependingontheentitiesselected,thesegmentswillbedisplayedinthedialogboxasSegmentnofm,wheren istheserialnumberofthecurrentsegmentandm isthetotalnumberofsegmentsinthefitting.Using theShape drop-down list available in theSegmentn ofm area, you can change the shape ofsegmentsinthefitting.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Rectangular,Round,andOval. After selecting the required option, you can specify the relevant parameters in the edit boxesavailablebelowthisdrop-downlist.Afterspecifyingtheparameters,youcanchoosetheNext>buttontochangetheparametersofnextsegment.YoucanalsoselecttheApplytoAllSegmentscheckbox,ifyouwanttokeepsameparametersfortheothersegments.YoucancreatemiteredendsatthestartpointortheendpointbyselectingthecorrespondingMiteredEndscheckboxes.Afterspecifyingparametersforallthesegments,choosetheFinishbutton;youwillbepromptedwhethertodeletethebasegeometryornot.EnterYesorNoatthecommandprompt;thecustomfittingwillbecreated.DuctTransitionUtility

This tool isused to connect twoparallelducts, duct fittings,or equipment.Various shapes that canbeconnectedbyusingthistoolaregivennext.

RoundtoRoundRoundtoRectangularRoundtoOvalRectangulartoRectangularRectangulartoOvalRectangulartoRoundOvaltoOvalOvaltoRectangularOvaltoRound

Tocreateaducttransition,choosetheDuctTransitionUtilitytoolfromtheDuctFittingdrop-down;youwill be prompted to select the first duct, duct fitting, or MvPart. Select the first entity; you will beprompted to select the second entity. Select the duct, duct fitting, orMvPart to be joined; a transitionfittingwillbecreated,joiningboththeentities.

TUTORIALTUTORIAL1Inthistutorial,youwilladdamechanicalsystem(HVACsystem)inthebuildingcreatedinTutorial2ofChapter 3. You can also download the architectural file from www.cadcim.com. Path of the file is:Textbooks > CAD/CAM > AutoCAD MEP > AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers > Tutorial. ThebuildingafteraddingthemechanicalsystemisshowninFigure4-21.TheplanforthemechanicalsystemisgiveninFigure4-22.Assumethemissingdimensions.

(Expectedtime:30min)

Figure4-21Thedrawingafteraddingmechanicalsystem

Figure4-22Theplanformechanicalsystem

ZoneWiseAirflow:Zone1:144m3/h=40l/sZone2:180m3/h=50l/sZone3:720m3/h=200l/sThefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethistutorial:a.Calculatethezonewiseairflow.b.InstalltheAirTerminalsonthebasisofairflowrequiredinazone.c.AddtheductlinetotheAirTerminalsd.InstalltheAHUonthebasisofrequirement.e.Calculatethesizeofductonthebasisofrequirements.f.Installtheductlinesandductfittingsinthesystem.Now,youneedtoopentheprojectfilecreatedinTutorial2ofChapter3.

OpeningtheDrawingFile1.ChooseOpen>DrawingfromtheApplicationMenu;theSelectFiledialogboxisdisplayed.2.SelectthefilecreatedinTutorial2ofChapter3andchoosetheOpenbutton; thefile isopenedanddisplayed,asshowninFigure4-23.

Figure4-23Thedrawingafterdividingintosections

PlacingAirTerminalsDepending on the air flow required for each zone and the area to be covered, you need to install thediffusers.

1.ChoosetheAirTerminaltoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHome tab intheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayedwiththeoptionsrelatedtodiffusers.

2.Select600x600mmSquareFacedCeilingDiffuserfromthepartlistdisplayedintheParttabofthedialogbox;thepartsfortheselectedcategoryaredisplayedinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.

3.Selectthepartwith150mmneckfromthedrop-downlist,setthevalueofelevationas4500,andinstallthediffusersaccordingtotheairflowrequirementsinthezones,refertoFigure4-24.

4.Selectthediffusers4,5inZone1and1,2inZone2.Changetheflowratebyenteringthevalue20l/sinFloweditboxavailableintheExtendedDatatabofthePROPERTIESpalette.

5.Selectthefivediffusers9,10,11,12,13inZone3andchangetheflowratebyenteringthevalue40l/sinFloweditboxavailableintheExtendedDatatabofthePROPERTIESpalette.

Figure4-24Thedrawingafteraddingdiffusers

6.Selectthetwodiffusers6,3adjacenttothewallofZone1andZone2.Changetheflowratebyenteringthevalue40l/sinFloweditboxintheExtendedDatatabofthePROPERTIESpalette.

7.Selectthefourdiffusers7,8,14,15adjacenttothewallofZone3andchangetheflowratebyenteringthevalue50l/sinFloweditboxintheExtendedDatatabofthePROPERTIESpalette.

AddingtheDuctLinetotheDiffusersNow,youneedtoroutetheductlinebyusingthe1-Linetool.1.Tocreateroutingoftheductline,choosethe1-LinetoolfromtheByShapeareaoftheDucttabintheToolPalette;youwillbepromptedtospecifythestartingpointoftheductline.

2. Select the Fresh Air - Make-up (FAMAKE-UP) option from the System drop-down list in theBASIC>GeneralrolloutoftheDesigntabinthePROPERTIESpaletteandcreatethefreshairductline,asshowninFigure4-25.

Figure4-25Thedrawingaftercreatingfreshairductline

3.Again,choosethe1-LinetoolandselecttheReturn(RA)optionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist intheGeneralrolloutoftheBASICrolloutoftheDesigntabinthePROPERTIESpalette.

4.Createthereturnductline,asshowninFigure4-26.

Figure4-26Thedrawingaftercreatingthereturnductline5.Aftercreatingtheductlines,choosetheAcceptoptionfromtheCommandbar.

AddinganAirHandlerNow,youneedtoaddanAirHandlerinthedrawingtocompletetheductline.1.ChoosetheAirHandler toolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downinBuildpanelof theHome tab in theRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure4-27.

2.SelecttheAirHandlingUnits-FloorMountedFrontDischargeequipmentfromthePartslistintheParttabofthisdialogbox.ThepreviewoftheequipmentisdisplayedontherightofthePartlist.

3.Specifytheelevationvalueas4500intheElevationeditbox.4.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifythelocationofequipment;youarepromptedtospecifytherotationangleforequipment.

5.Entertheanglevalue0;theequipmentisplacedatthespecifiedlocation,refertoFigure4-28.

Figure4-28Thedrawingafteraddingequipment

Now,youneedtoaddductlinetotheequipment.

6.Selecttheequipment;the+signisdisplayedonvariousportsoftheequipment.7.Clickonthe+signavailableondifferentportsonebyoneandthenconnecttheequipment,asshowninFigure4-29.

Figure4-29Thedrawingafterconnectingtheequipmentwiththeductline

CalculatingDuctSizeNow,youneedtocalculatetheductsizeofeachsegment.1.Select theduct lines,asshowninFigure4-30andchoosetheCalculateDuctSizesbuttonfromtheCalculationspaneloftheDuctcontextualtabintheRibbon;theDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure4-31.

Figure4-30Theductlinestobeselectedforcalculatingductsize

2.ChangeallthesettingsinthedialogboxaccordingtoFigure4-31.

Figure4-31TheDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogbox3.Choose theStart button from the4 areaof thedialogbox; theMultiplePartsFound dialog box isdisplayed,refertoFigure4-32.

Figure4-32TheMultiplePartsFounddialogbox

4. Select the desired part from theSelect a detailedpart area of the dialog box and choose theOKbutton;theselectedpartisaddedatthepromptedposition.

5.Similarly,addallthepartsatthepromptedlocationsoneaftertheother.6.After adding all the parts, theDuctSystemSizeCalculator dialog box is displayed, as shown inFigure4-33.

Figure4-33TheDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogboxaftercompletingcalculations7.Ifthesuccessrateisdisplayedas100%,choosetheClosebuttonandexitthedialogbox.8. Ifsuccess rate isnotdisplayedas100%,choose theViewEventLogbuttonfromthe5 areaof thedialogbox;theEventLogdialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure4-34.

Figure4-34TheEventLogdialogbox

9.SelecttheobjectintheObjectcolumnthatshowsanerrorintheErrorcolumn,refertoFigure4-34,andthenchoosetheHighlightandZoomtheselectedobjectbuttonfromthedialogbox;theselectedobjectishighlightedinthedrawingarea,refertoFigure4-35.

Figure4-35Theobjectcausingerrorhighlightedinthedrawingarea10.Rectify the errors according to the descriptiongiven in theDescription column of theEventLogdialogboxandthenchoosetheStartbuttonagainafteralltheerrorsarerectified.

Thedrawingaftercalculatingtheductsizeisdisplayed,asshowninFigure4-36.

Figure4-36Thedrawingaftercalculatingductsize

SavingtheDrawingFile1.ChooseSavefromtheApplicationmenutosavethedrawingfile.

SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:1.TheAirHandleroptionisavailableintheEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpanel.(T/F)

2.TheAHUInspectionModuleisusedtocheckthequantityofairtobespreadinthedesiredarea.(T/F)3.AnAHUMixingBoxhasthreeports,oneforinletof___________,oneforinletoffreshair,andonefor___________ofmixedair.

4.Youcanspecifytheflowrateofanairterminalbyusingthe___________editbox.5.Inwhichofthefollowingdrop-downsistheFantoolavailable?(a)Equipment(b)DuctFitting(c)Duct(d)PipeREVIEWQUESTIONSAnswerthefollowingquestions:1.TheAHUMixingBoxisanequipmentthatisusedtovarythespeedofairflowingthroughtheduct.(T/F)

2.UsingtheElevationeditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofelevationoftheobjectfromground.(T/F)3. There are three options available inAutoCADMEP for specifying bends of a duct: ___________,

________,and___________.4.Forbranchfitting,youcanusetwooptions,_______and__________.5.Whichofthefollowingbuttonsisusedtocalculatetheductsizeofaductsystem?(a)CalculateDuctSizes(b)Duct(c)FlexibleDuct(d)DetailComponentsEXERCISEEXERCISE1Inthisexercise,youwilladdanHVACsysteminanoffice.TheofficeafteraddingtheHVACsystemisshown inFigure4-37.The plan for theHVAC system is given in Figure 4-38.You can download thearchitecturemodeloftheofficefromwww.cadcim.com.

(Expectedtime:30min)

Figure4-37TheHVACsystemintheoffice

Figure4-38TheplanfortheHVACsystem

AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest1.T,2.F,3.Returningair,outlet,4.Flow(EachTerminal),5.Equipment

Chapter5

CreatingPipingSystems

LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•Useequipmentrequiredinapipingsystem•Changebasicsettingsofapipingsystem•Configurepipelineoptions•Routethepipeline•Createpipeandflexpipe•Createacustompart

INTRODUCTIONInthischapter,youwilllearntheuseofvariousequipmentforcreatingapipingsystem.Apipingsystemis used to supply the desired amount ofwater to a specific location.A piping system is composed ofpipingequipmentandpipes.Pipingequipmentandpipestogethercontrolthetemperature,pressure,andflowrateofthefluidpassingthroughthepipes.Tocreateapipingsystem,youneedtoknowtheverticalheads, pressure, temperature, and flow rate of the fluid. These variables are used for deciding thecapacityoftheequipmentthataretobeaddedinthepipingsystem.Tocreateapipingsystem,choosethePiping option from theWorkspace Switching flyout; the Piping workspace will be invoked. TheequipmentavailableinthePipingworkspaceofAutoCADMEParediscussednext.ADDINGEQUIPMENTForcreatingapipingsystem,youneedtoaddrelatedequipmenttothegivenstructure.AlltheequipmentthatcanbeaddedwhileworkinginthePipingworkspaceareavailableintheEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon,refertoFigure5-1.Thetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.

HeatExchangerA heat exchanger is an equipment or a devicewhich is used to transfer heat efficiently between twofluids. This heat transfer can occur through conduction or convection. To add a heat exchanger to the

drawing,choosetheHeatExchangertoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downavailableintheBuildpanelof theHome tab in theRibbon; theAddMulti-viewParts dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown inFigure 5-2. Select the Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers from the Heat Exchanger category of theMechanicalnode;previewoftheselectedcomponentwillbedisplayedontherightinthedialogbox.TheD1,D2,D3,andD4inthePreviewareaindicatethediametersofportsavailableontheheatexchanger.Additionally,youcanselecttherequiredsizefortheheatexchangerfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.YoucanspecifytheelevationvalueofheatexchangerfromthegroundorUCSbyusingtheElevationeditboxavailablebelowthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.Afterspecifyingtherequiredparameters,click in the drawing area to place the heat exchanger; a compass will be displayed below the heatexchanger.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotatetheheatexchangerattherequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitit.Figure5-3showsaShellandTubeHeatExchanger.

Figure5-3TheShellandTubeHeatExchanger

PumpApumpisamechanicaldevicethatisusedtosupplyfluidtothedesiredpointbyusingmechanicalforce.Toaddapumpto thedrawing,choose thePump tool fromtheEquipment drop-downavailable in theBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshown in Figure 5-4. Select the Base Mounted Pumps sub-category from the Pumps category of theMechanical node. Select the required sub-category from the part list in the dialog box; various sizesavailableforthatsub-categoryaredisplayedinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.Selecttherequiredsizefromthedrop-downlist;youwillbeprompted tospecifyapoint in thedrawingarea toplace thepump.Clickinthedrawingareatoplacethepump;acompasswillbedisplayedbelowthepump.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotatethepumpattherequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitit.Figure5-5showsabasemountedpump.

Figure5-4TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxdisplayedafterselectingthePumptool

Figure5-5Abasemountedpump

TankAtankisahollowspacecreatedinastructuretostorethefluidforlateruse.TherearetwotypesoftanksavailableinAutoCADMEP:ExpansionTankandStorageTank.Theexpansiontankactsasasafetytankforfluidheatingsystem.Thistankallowsthefluidtoexpandsothatitcanreleasepressure.Thestoragetankisusedtostorethefluidforlateruse.Toaddatanktothedrawing,choosetheTank toolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-6.SelecttheFreestandingVerticalExpansionTankspartfromtheExpansionTankssub-categoryoftheTankscategoryinMechanicalequipment.Selecttherequiredpartfromthedialogbox;varioussizesavailableforthatsub-categoryaredisplayedinthe

PartSizeNamedrop-downlist.Selecttherequiredsizefromthedrop-downlistanddouble-clickinthedrawingareatoplacethetank;acompasswillbedisplayedbelowthecomponent.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotate thecomponentat therequiredangle.Afterspecifying theangle,choose theClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitthedialogbox.Figure5-7showsthetanksavailableinAutoCADMEP.

Figure5-6TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxdisplayedafterchoosingtheTanktool

Figure5-7ThetanksavailableinAutoCADMEP

ValveAvalveisadevicethatisusedtoregulateordirecttheflowoffluidthroughapassage.Therearevarioustypes of valves available inAutoCADMEP.These valves are available in twomain categories: FireProtectionandValves.Toaddavalvetothedrawing,choosetheValvetoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox

willbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-8.SelecttheGateValvesHoseConnectionpartfromtheHoseConnectionssub-categoryoftheFireProtectioncategoryintheMechanicalnode.Selecttherequiredpartfromthedialogbox;varioussizesavailableforthatsub-categoryaredisplayedinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.Selecttherequiredsizefromthedrop-downlistandclickinthedrawingareatoplacethevalve;acompasswillbedisplayedbelowthevalve.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotatethevalveattherequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitit.

Figure5-8TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxdisplayedafterchoosingtheValvetool

EquipmentWhenyouchoose theEquipment tool fromtheEquipmentdrop-downof theBuildpanelof theHometab,theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-9.Clickonthe+signadjacenttotheMechanicalnodeintheParttab;themechanicalequipmentavailableinAutoCADMEPwillbedisplayedinatreestructure.

Figure5-9TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxClickonthe+signadjacenttotherequiredcomponent;variousoptionsrelatedtotheselectedcomponentwillbedisplayedinalist.Selecttherequiredoptionfromthelistandclickinthedrawingareatoplacethe component.A compasswill also be displayed below the component.Using this compass, you canrotatethecomponentattherequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexit.CREATINGPIPELINESIn apiping system,pipe is amechanical object throughwhich the fluid flows.There are two typesofpipesavailableinAutoCADMEP:PipeandParallelPipe.ThetoolstocreatethesepipesareavailableinthePipedrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.PipeThistoolisusedtocreateapipelineinthepipingsystem.Theshapeofthepipecreatedbyusingthistoolisround.Whenyouchoosethistool,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-10.Also,youwillbeprompted tospecify thestartpointof thepipe line.Click in thedrawingarea tospecify thestartpointof thepipe line;youwillbeprompted tospecify thenextpointof thepipe line.Specify the next point to create the pipe line.The options available in thePROPERTIES palette arediscussednext.

Figure5-10ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingthePipetoolDescriptionThisfieldisavailableintheBASIC>GeneralrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Whenyouclickinthis field, the Description dialog box will be displayed, as shown in Figure 5-11. You can enterdescriptionfor thepipein theEditthedescriptionforthisobject textboxin thisdialogbox.ChooseOKtoexitthedialogbox.

SystemThis drop-down list is available in theBASIC>General rollout of thePROPERTIES palette. Thisdrop-downlistcontainsvarioussystemdefinitionsforthepipe.RoutingPreferencesThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBASIC>Dimensionsrollout.Theoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedforselectingroutingstyleofthepipe.Bydefault,theStandardoptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.NominalsizeThis drop-down list is available in theBASIC > Dimensions rollout. This drop-down list containsoptions tochange thesizeofpipe.Theoptionsavailable in thisdrop-down listwillchangedependingupontheoptionselectedfromtheRoutingpreferencesdrop-downlist.

SpecifyCutLengthThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheGeneral>Dimensionsrollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.Bydefault,theNooptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.OnselectingtheYesoption,youcanspecifythecutlengthintherespectivefield.CutLengthThiseditboxisavailableintheDimensionsrolloutonlywhentheYesoptionisselectedintheSpecifyCutLength drop-down list.You can specify thevalueof cut length in this edit box.Cut length is themaximumavailablelengthofapieceofpipe.

ElevationThiseditbox isavailable in theBASIC>Placement rollout.Using thiseditbox,youcanspecify thevalueofelevationofpipefromtheground.StartelevationThisfieldisavailableintheBASIC>Placementrollout.ThevalueinthisfieldisthesameasspecifiedintheElevationeditbox.JustifyThisdrop-downlistisavailableinthePlacement>Justificationrollout.Theoptionsinthisdrop-down

listareusedtochangethejustificationofpipe.HorizontaloffsetThiseditboxisavailableintheJustificationrolloutofthePlacementrollout.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythehorizontaldistancevaluebywhichthepipeisdistantfromtheselectedjustificationpoint.VerticaloffsetThiseditboxisavailableintheJustificationrolloutofthePlacementrollout.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifytheverticaldistancevaluebywhichthepipeisdistantfromtheselectedjustificationpoint.SlopeformatThis drop-down list is available in theBASIC>Routing rollout of thePROPERTIES palette. Theoptions in thisdrop-down listareused tospecify the format inwhich theslopevaluewillbeentered.There are seven options available in this drop-down list: Angle (Decimal Degrees); Percentage,100%=45 degree; Percentage, 100%=90 degree; Rise/Run (Millimeters/Millimeters); Run(Millimeters),Rise=(1Millimeters);Rise(Millimeters),Run=(10Millimeters);andFractionalRise(Millimeters),Run=(10Millimeters).InAutoCADMEP2015,theslopealsoincludesthegravityfactorinit.SlopeThiseditboxisavailableintheBASIC>RoutingrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Youcanspecifythevalue of slope in this edit box.The format inwhich the valuewill be specifieddependsupon theoptionselectedfromtheSlopeformatdrop-downlist.Ifyouchangetheslopevaluewhileaddingmorepipes,thefittingatjointswilladjustautomaticallytoprovidethechangedslope.BendmethodThis drop-down list is used to specify themethodof bending that is to be appliedon anybendwhilecreating a pipe line. There are twomethods of bending available in this drop-down list:Elbow andOffset.BendangleThisdrop-downlistisusedtospecifytheangleofbendthatistobeappliedonanybendwhilecreatingapipe.Bydefault,theValuefromCatalogoptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.Therefore,thebendanglespecifiedinthecatalogisused.Youcanspecifyadesiredvaluebyclickingonthisdrop-downlist.BranchangleThisdrop-downlist isusedtospecifythelateralangleofTee that is tobeappliedonanybendwhilecreatingapipe.Bydefault,theValuefromCatalogoptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.Therefore,thebendanglespecifiedinthecatalogisused.Youcanspecifyadesiredvaluebyclickingonthisdrop-downlist.ConnectiondetailsThisbuttonisavailableintheADVANCEDrollout.Whenyouchoosethisbutton,theConnectionDetailsdialogboxwillbedisplayed, refer toFigure5-12.Thereare two rollouts available in thedialogbox

whichcontainthedetailsaboutboththeconnections.

InsulationthicknessThis edit box is also available in the ADVANCED rollout and is used to specify the thickness ofinsulationappliedinthepipe.UsefittingtoleranceThisdrop-downlist isavailableintheADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIESpalette.Therearetwooptionsinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.WhentheYesoptionisselectedinthedrop-downlist,thebranchfittingswillbeconnectedtothemainpipe,consideringthefittingtolerances.IftheNo option is selected in the drop-down list, the brancheswill be joined to themain pipewithoutconsideringthefittingtolerances.JointdirectionThisdrop-downlist isavailableintheADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIESpalette.Thereare twooptionsavailable in thisdrop-down list:Male intoFemaleandFemaleout toMale.BranchfittingThisdrop-downlist isavailableintheADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIESpalette.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythetypeoffittingtobeappliedonabranch.Therearefiveoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Takeoffonly,Teeonly,TeeorWye(Lateral),Wye(Lateral)only,andWye(Lateral)orTee.

FittingSettingThisoption isavailable in theADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIES palette.Whenyouclickonthisoption,theFittingSettingsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-13.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxareusedtochangethetypeoffittingtobeappliedwhilecreatingthebranchesinthepipe.

Figure5-13TheFittingSettingsdialogbox

PreferencesThisoption isavailable in theADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIES palette.Whenyouclickonthisoption,thePipeLayoutPreferencesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-14.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxareusedtodefinethelayoutpreferencesforcreatingapipe.Usingtheoptionsinthisdialogbox,youcansetthepreferencesforparameterssuchasSlope,Elevation,Labelstyle,Flowarrowstyle,andElbowlayout.

Figure5-14ThePipeLayoutPreferencesdialogbox

StyleThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheADVANCED>LabelsandFlowArrows>LabelsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtoapplythelabelstylestopipe.

LayoutmethodThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheADVANCED>LabelsandFlowArrows>LabelsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteonlywhenNONEisnotselectedfromtheStyledrop-downlist.Theoptions inthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythetypeoflayoutforpipes.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:BydistanceandByquantity.NumberofLabelsThis edit box is available in theADVANCED > Labels and Flow Arrows > Labels rollout of thePROPERTIESpaletteonlywhenNONEisnotselectedintheStyledrop-downlistandByquantityisselectedintheLayoutmethoddrop-downlist.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythetotalnumberoflabelsonasegmentpipe.Distancebetween

This edit box is available in theADVANCED > Labels and Flow Arrows > Labels rollout of thePROPERTIESpaletteonlywhenNONEisnotselectedintheStyledrop-downlistandBydistanceisselectedintheLayoutmethoddrop-downlist.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythedistancebetweentwoconsecutivelabelsonapipe.TheStyle,Layoutmethod,NumberofLabels,andDistancebetween options are also available forFlowArrows.Theseoptionshavealreadybeendiscussedinthischapter.ParallelPipesThis tool is used to create parallel pipes in the Piping system. To create a parallel pipe, choose theParallelPipestoolfromthePipedrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtoselectabaselineobject.Selectabaselineobject,likeanearliercreatedpipe,fromthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtoselectparallelpipes.SelectparallelpipesfromthedrawingareaandpressENTER;youwillbepromptedtospecifythenextpointforcreatingparallelpipes.TheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteforparallelpipesaresameasdiscussedinthePipesectionofthischapter.ADDINGPIPEFITTINGSApipefittingisusedtojointwoormorepipes.YoucanaddpipefittingsbyusingthetoolsavailableinthePipe Fitting drop-down. This drop-down is available in theBuild panel of theHome tab in theRibbon.Thetoolsinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.PipeFittingThistoolisusedtoaddauserspecifiedfittinginthepipeline.Onchoosingthistool,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,refertoFigure5-15.Theoptionsavailableinthispalettearediscussednext.

Figure5-15ThePROPERTIESpaletteforpipefittings

DescriptionThisfieldisavailableintheBASIC>GeneralrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Whenyouclickinthisfield,theDescriptiondialogboxwillbedisplayed.Youcanwritedescriptionaboutthefittinginthetextboxavailableinthisdialogbox.SystemThis drop-down list is available in theBASIC>General rollout of thePROPERTIES palette. Theoptions in this drop-down list are used to change the standard of fitting to be created.By default, theStandard(STD)optionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.

PartThisfieldisavailableintheBASIC>GeneralrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Whenyouclickinthisfield,theSelectPartdialogboxwillbedisplayed,refertoFigure5-16.Therearevarioustypesoffittings available for pipe in this dialog box. All these fittings are displayed in the SELECT PARTFROMCATALOGrollout.Thefittingsinthisrolloutaredividedintogroupsinatreestructure.Youcanfilter theavailablepartsdependingonyourrequirementsbyusingtheoptionsavailableintheFILTERrolloutofthisdialogbox.ThefilteredoptionswillbedisplayedintheSELECTPARTSIZEareaofthisdialog box. You can also select the required fitting from the Piping Tool palette. These fittings areavailableintheFittingtabofthepalette.

Figure5-16TheSelectPartdialogbox

CurrentsizeThisdrop-downlist isavailable in theBASIC>General rolloutof thePROPERTIESpalette.Therearevariousoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlisttochangethesizeofthecurrentfitting.ConnectionsrolloutThis rollout is available in theBASIC>Dimensions rollout in thePROPERTIES palette.There arevarious options available in this rollout to change the dimensions of a selected fitting.Options in thisrolloutvarydependingontheselectedfitting.

ElevationThiseditbox isavailable in theBASIC>Placement rollout in thePROPERTIESpalette.Using thiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofheightoffittingfromthegroundlevel.SpecifyrotationonscreenThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBASIC>PlacementrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.IfyouselecttheYesoption,thenyouwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationvaluewhilecreatingthefitting.IfyouselecttheNooption,thenyouneedtospecifytherotationvalueintheeditboxavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.

RotationThiseditbox isavailable in theBASIC>Placement rollout in thePROPERTIESpalette.Using thiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofrotationofthefittingbeforeplacingitinthedrawing.ThiseditboxisavailableonlywhentheNooptionisselectedfromtheSpecifyrotationonscreendrop-downlist.ConnectiondetailsThisbuttonisavailableintheADVANCEDrollout.Whenyouchoosethisbutton,theConnectionDetailsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-17.Therearetworolloutsavailableinthedialogboxthatcontainthedetailsaboutboththeconnections.

InsulationthicknessThis edit box is also available in the ADVANCED rollout and is used to specify the thickness ofinsulationappliedtothepipe.

PipeCustomFittingThis tool isusedforcreatingcustomfittings in thepipe line.Tocreateapipecustomfitting,youmusthave lines, arcs, or polylines created in the drawing area.To create a custom fitting, choose thePipeCustomFittingtoolfromthePipeFittingdrop-downlist;youwillbepromptedtoselectlines,arcs,orpolylines. Select lines, arcs, or polylines from the drawing area and press ENTER; theCreate PipeCustomFittingdialog

boxwill be displayed, refer to Figure 5-18.Depending on the selected entities, the segmentswill bedisplayedinthedialogboxasSegmentnofm,wherenistheserialnumberofcurrentsegmentandmisthetotalnumberofsegmentsinthefitting.UsingtheShapedrop-downlistavailableintheSegmentnof

marea,youcanchangetheshapeofsegmentsinthefitting.Therearevarioussystemdefinitionsavailablein theSystemdrop-down.After selecting the desired system, choose theNext> button to change theparametersofnextsegment.YoucanalsoselecttheApplytoAllSegmentscheckboxifyouwanttokeepthe same parameters for other segments. After specifying parameters for all the segments, choose theFinishbutton;youwillbepromptedwhethertodeletethebasegeometryornot.EnterYesorNoat theCommand prompt; the custom fitting will be created. The open end points of entities will be theconnectionportsforfitting.

Figure5-18TheCreatePipeCustomFittingdialogbox

CREATINGACUSTOMMULTI-VIEWPARTWhile creating models in AutoCAD MEP, you may need to create some custom parts that can befrequentlyusedinthedrawing.TheproceduretocreateaCustomMulti-ViewPartisgivennext.

TocreateaCustomMulti-ViewPart,youneed tocreateasolidcomponentandconvert it intoablockusingtheCreateBlockcommandfromtheInserttabintheRibbon.Thesteps tocreateacustommultiviewpartaregivenbelow:

1.Create amodelof the custompart thatyouwant to add to theMulti-viewPart list and save it as ablock.

2.ChoosetheContentBuildertoolfromtheMEPContentpanelintheManagetaboftheRibbon; theGettingStarted-CatalogScreendialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-19.

Figure5-19TheGettingStarted-CatalogScreendialogbox3.Select theMulti-viewPartoptionfromthePartDomain drop-down list available at the topof thedialogbox;theoptionsinthedialogboxwillbemodifiedaccordingtoMulti-viewparts.

4.SelectMechanical fromthepart treedisplayedin thedialogboxtoaddanewequipmentrangeandchoosetheNewChapterbuttonavailableattherightoftheparttree;theNewChapterdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-20.

Figure5-20TheNewChapterdialogbox5.EnterTurbineasnameforthecategoryintheNameeditboxofthedialogboxandchooseOK;anewcategorywillbeaddedintheMechanicalpart list.Figure5-21showsTurbinecategoryaddedintheMechanicalpartlist.

Figure5-21TheGettingStarted-CatalogScreendialogboxwithTurbineaddedasanewchapter

6.ChoosetheNewBlockPartbuttonfromtheGettingStarted-CatalogScreendialogbox;theNewPartdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-22.

Figure5-22TheNewPartdialogbox

7. Enter Steam Turbine and description of the new part in the Name and Description edit boxes,respectivelyandchooseOK; theMvPartBuilder (NewPart) -SteamTurbine dialogboxwill bedisplayed,refertoFigure5-23.

Figure5-23TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)-SteamTurbinedialogboxdisplayed8.SelectanoptionfromtheTypedrop-downlistwhosepropertiesarematchingwiththepartyouwanttocreate.Inthiscase,selecttheCoolingToweroptionfromthisdrop-downlist;theoptionsintheLayerKeyandSubtypefieldswillbeselectedaccordingly.

9.Choose theNext button from the dialogbox; theBlocks&Names page of the dialog boxwill bedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-24.

Figure5-24TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)-SteamTurbinedialogboxwiththeBlocks&Namespagedisplayed

10.ChoosetheAddPartSizebuttonavailablebelowthepartsheet;anewpartwillbeaddedinthelistandyouwillbepromptedtoselectanoptionfromthedrop-downlistdisplayed.

11.Selecttheblockyouhavecreatedforthepartonebyoneintherespectivefields;theblockswillbeassignedtothenewpart.(Inthiscase,theblockiscreatedwiththenameturbine).

12.Choose theGenerateBlocksbutton tocreate thepart; theViewsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-25.

Figure5-25TheViewsdialogbox

13.Using the options available in this dialog box, you can change the display style of the part to becreated.Afterconfiguringthedisplaystyle,choosetheOKbuttontoexit.

14. Choose theNext button from theMvPart Builder (New Part) - Steam Turbine dialog box; theImagepagewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-26.

Figure5-26TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)-SteamTurbinedialogboxwiththeImagepage15.SelecttheGenerateanimagebasedonamodelblockfromSWIsometricViewradiobuttonandthenchoosetheGeneratebuttonfromthispage;theimageofblockwillbegenerated.Aftergeneratingtheimage,choosetheNextbutton;theConnectorspagewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-27.

Figure5-27TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)-SteamTurbinedialogboxwiththeConnectorspage

16.Usingtheoptionsavailableinthispage,youcanspecifytheconnectorstobeaddedtotheMulti-viewpart.Toaddaconnector to thepart (SteamTurbine), right-clickon thepart;ashortcutmenuwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-28.

Figure5-28Shortcutmenutoaddconnectors

17.Choosethedesiredoptionfromtheshortcutmenu;thePartFamilyConnectorPropertiesdialogboxis displayed. Figure 5-29 shows the dialog box displayed after choosing theAdd Pipe Connectoroption.

Figure5-29ThePartFamilyConnectorPropertiesdialogbox

18.ClickonthefieldadjacenttoFlowDirection;adrop-downlistwillbedisplayed.SelecttheInoptionfromthedrop-downlist.

19. Similarly, add onemore pipe connectorwith theOut option and choose theOK button from thedialogbox; theMvPartBuilder (ModifyPartSize) dialogboxafter adding the connectorswill bedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-30.

Figure5-30TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)dialogboxafteraddingconnectors20.Selectandright-clickonConnector1availablebelowTurbine in the list; a shortcutmenuwill bedisplayed.

21. Choose the Edit Placement option from the shortcut menu; the Application window will bedisplayed, as shown inFigure5-31, and youwill be prompted to specify the position or normal ofconnector.Also,theMvPartBuilder-ConnectorEditorpaletteisdisplayed.

Figure5-31TheApplicationwindow

22.ChoosethePositionbuttonfromthecommandbarandspecifythelocationofthefirstconnector.23. Similarly, specify the location of the second connector after selecting Connector2 from theMvPartBuilder-ConnectorEditorpalette.

24.Afterspecifying the locations,choose theOKbuttonfromtheMvPartBuilder -ConnectorEditorpalette;theMvPartBuilderdialogboxwillbedisplayedagain.

25.Choose theNext button from the dialog box; theProperties pagewill be displayed, as shown inFigure5-32.

Figure5-32TheMvPartBuilderdialogboxwiththePropertiespagedisplayed26. Choose theEdit Properties button from the dialog box; thePropertyEditor dialog box will bedisplayed, refer toFigure5-33.Using theoptions available in this dialogbox, you can adddesiredpropertyvariablestothenewpart.

Figure5-33ThePropertyEditordialogbox

27.Afterconfiguringthepropertyvariables,choosetheOKbuttonandthenchoosetheFinishbuttonfromtheMvPartBuilderdialogbox;thepartwillbecreatedandaddedtotheequipmentlist.

TUTORIALTUTORIAL1Inthistutorial,youwillcreatethepipesystemshowninFigure5-34.TheplanviewforcreatingthepipesystemisgiveninFigure5-35.Notethattocompletethispipingsystem,youalsoneedtocreateacustompartnamedsteamturbinecomponent.(Expectedtime:30min)

Figure5-34Thepipingsystem

Figure5-35Planforcreatingthepipingsystem

Thefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethistutorial:Examinethemodeltodetermineequipmenttobeaddedandparametersofpiping.a.CreateacustompartnamedTurbine.b.Addtheequipmentaccordingtothemodel.c.Createpipingbetweenvariousequipment.

CreatingtheDrawingFile1.ChooseNew>DrawingfromtheApplicationMenu;theSelectTemplatedialogboxisdisplayed.2. Select theAecbModel (GlobalCtb).dwt template from the dialog box and then choose theOpenbutton;ablankdrawingfileiscreated.

CreatingaCustomPartTo create a custom part, youmust have amodel of the part created as a block. So, before creating acustompart,youneedtocreateamodelofthepartandsaveitasablock.Beforecreatingamodel,youneedtoaddtheSolidstabtotheRibbon.Todoso,right-clickanywhereontheRibbon;ashortcutmenuisdisplayed.ChooseShowTabs>Solidsfromtheshortcutmenu;theSolidstabisaddedtotheRibbon.1.ChoosetheConetoolfromtheSolidPrimitivesdrop-downintheModelingpaneloftheSolidstabintheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtospecifythecenterofthebase.

2.Enter0,0,0atthecommandbarandcreateaconewiththebaseradius1000,topradius500,andheight1000.Also,createtheinletandoutletpipesonthecone,refertoFigure5-34.

3.SelecttheconeandthenchoosetheCreateBlock toolfromtheBlockpaneloftheInsert tab in theRibbon;theBlockDefinitiondialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-36.

Figure5-36TheBlockDefinitiondialogbox

4.SpecifythenameoftheblockasSteamTurbineintheNameeditboxavailableatthetopleftcornerofthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;themodelisaddedasablock.

CreatingCustomPartbyUsingtheBlock1.ChoosetheContentBuildertoolfromtheMEPContentpanelintheManagetaboftheRibbon; theGettingStarted-CatalogScreendialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-37.SelecttheMulti-viewPartoptionfromthePartDomaindrop-downlist.

Figure5-37TheGettingStarted-CatalogScreendialogbox

2.ClickonMechanicalintheparttreeandchoosetheNewChapterbuttonattherightinthedialogbox;theNewChapterdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-38.

Figure5-38TheNewChapterdialogbox

3.SpecifythenameasTurbineintheNameeditboxofthedialogboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttontoexit;aTurbineisaddedtotheMechanicalpartlist.

4.SelectTurbinefromthelistandchoosetheNewBlockPartbuttonattherightofthedialogbox;theNewPartdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-39.

Figure5-39TheNewPartdialogbox5.SpecifythenameofthepartasSteamTurbineintheNameeditboxandthenclickintheDescriptioneditbox;thetextspecifiedintheNameeditboxiscopiedintheDescriptioneditbox.

6.ChoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;theMvPartBuilder(NewPart)dialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure5-40.

Figure5-40TheMvPartBuilder(ModifyPartSize)dialogbox

7.SelectthePumpoptionfromtheTypedrop-downlistandselecttheInlinePumpoptionfromtheSub-

Typedrop-downlist.8.ChoosetheNextbuttonfromthedialogbox;theBlocks&Namespageofthedialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-41.

Figure5-41TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)dialogboxwiththeBlocks&Namespagedisplayed

9.ChoosetheAddPartSizebuttonavailablebelowthepartsizesheet;adrop-downlistisdisplayed.10. Select theSteamTurbine option from the drop-down list and then choose theGenerate BlocksbuttonfromtheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)dialogbox;theViewsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-42.

Figure5-42TheViewsdialogbox11.Choose theOK button from theViews dialogbox; theMvPartBuilder (NewPart) dialog box isdisplayed.ChoosetheNextbuttonfromit;theImagepageofthedialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-43.

Figure5-43TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)dialogboxwiththeImagepage12.SelecttheGenerateanimagebasedonamodelblockfromtheSWIsometricViewradiobutton,andthenchoosetheGeneratebutton;thepreviewoftheblockisdisplayedinthePreviewareaofthedialogbox.

13.ChoosetheNextbuttonfromthedialogbox;theConnectorspageisdisplayed,refertoFigure5-44.

Figure5-44TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)dialogboxwiththeConnectorspagedisplayed

14.Right-clickontheSteamTurbinesymbol,refertoFigure5-44;ashortcutmenuisdisplayed.15. Choose the Add Pipe Connector option from the shortcut menu; the Part Family ConnectorPropertiesdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-45.

Figure5-45ThePartFamilyConnectorPropertiesdialogbox

16. Select the In option from theFlowDirection drop-down list and theHotWater option from theSystemTypedrop-downlist.

17.ChoosetheOKbuttontoclosethedialogbox;Connector1isaddedtothenewpart.18. Similarly, add another pipe connector to the part and then select theOut option from the FlowDirectiondrop-downlistandtheHotWateroptionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist.

19.Right-clickontheConnector1availablebelowSteamTurbinehavingthesymbol;ashortcutmenuisdisplayed.

20. Choose the Edit Placement option from the shortcut menu; the MvPartBuilder -ConnectorEditor palette is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-46 and you are prompted to specifypositionofconnectorornormaltoconnector.

Figure5-46TheMvPartBuilder-ConnectorEditorpalette

21.ChoosethePositionbuttonfromthecommandbar;youareprompted toselectpositionfor thefirstconnector.ClickontheInConnectoravailableonthemodel,asshowninFigure5-47,andthenselectthe Flange option from theConnection Type drop-down list in theMvPartBuilder - Connector

Editorpalette.ClickinthedrawingareaandchoosetheOKbuttontoaccepttheresults.

Figure5-47ThemodelwithInConnectorandOutConnector22.Similarly,specifythepositionofConnector2andthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromtheMvPartBuilder-ConnectorEditorpalette;theMvPartBuilder(NewPart)dialogboxisdisplayedagain.

23.ChoosetheNextbuttonfromthedialogbox;thePropertiespageofthedialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-48.

Figure5-48TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)dialogboxwiththePropertiespagedisplayed

24.Choose theFinish button; the custompart is createdwith thenameSteamTurbine in theTurbinecategoryofequipmentintheequipmentlist.

AddingtheEquipment1.ChoosetheEquipmenttoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed.

2.ExpandtheMechanicalcategory;thelistofallavailablemechanicalequipmentisdisplayed.3.Clickonthe+signadjacenttoBoilers;varioustypesofboilersaredisplayed.4.SelectFiretubeBoilersfromthelist.Now,selectthe600kWFiretubeBoilersoptionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistandclickanywhere in thedrawingarea toplace theboiler.Place itwithzerorotationanglevalue.

5.Similarly,add80x80mmBaseMountedPump,33.5KWLargeHorizontalAir-CooledCondenser,andtheSteamTurbinecreatedearlier,asshowninFigure5-49.Forposition,refertoFigure5-35.

Figure5-49Thedrawingafteraddingequipmentlist

6.ChoosetheClosebuttontoexitthedialogbox.NoteSteamTurbineisavailableintheTurbinecategoryofequipment.

CreatingPipingbetweenVariousEquipment1.ChoosethePipetoolfromthePipedrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifythestartpointofthepipe.

2.ClickonthePipeEndConnectoravailableonthepump,refertoFigure5-50,movethecursorintheverticaldirection,andenter1000at thedynamicpromptdisplayed;theChooseaPartdialogbox isdisplayed,refertoFigure5-51.

Figure5-50ThePipeEndConnectoronthepump

Figure5-51TheChooseaPartdialogbox

3.ChoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;apipewiththelengthof1000iscreated.SelectthePipeEndConnector,asshowninFigure5-52;youarepromptedtospecifywhetheryouwanttoaccepttheconnectionor youwant to undo the connectionmade.Choose theAccept button from theCommandprompt;thepipelineiscreatedbetweenPumpandBoiler.PressENTERtoexitthecommand.

Figure5-52Thepipeconnectorendtobeselected4.SelectTurbineandclickonthe+sign;arubberbandpipeisattachedtothecursor.Movethecursorintheleftdirectionandenter4000attheCommandprompt;theChooseaPartdialogboxisdisplayed.ChooseOKfromthedialogbox;thepipelineiscreated,refertoFigure5-53.

Figure5-53Thepipelinecreated5.ClickonthePipeEndConnector,asshowninFigure5-54;theoptionsrelatedtopossiblelayoutsaredisplayedat thecommandprompt.ChoosetheNextbuttonfromthecommandprompt tillyouget thedesiredlayout,refertoFigure5-55.

Figure5-54ThePipeEndConnectorinthemodel

Figure5-55Thedrawingaftercreatingpipelinebetweencondenserandpump6.ChoosetheAcceptoptionfromthecommandprompt;thepipelineiscreatedbetweentheboilerandtheturbine.

7.Selectthehorizontalconnectorofthepump,movethecursorinthehorizontaldirection,andspecifythedistanceas1500atthecommandprompt;theChooseaPartdialogboxisdisplayed.ChoosetheOK

button from thedialogbox and clickon thePipeEndConnector availablebelow the condenser; thepipelineiscreated,asshowninFigure5-55.

8.ChoosetheAcceptbuttonfromtheCommandprompttoacceptthepipeline;theCustomSizesdialogboxisdisplayed.ChoosetheYesoptionsfromthedialogbox.PressENTERtoexitthetool.

9.Select theCondenserandclickonthe+signdisplayedbelowthecondenser, refer toFigure5-56;arubber band pipe is attached to the cursor.Now, click on the PipeEndConnector displayed on theturbine.Acceptthedefaultsettings.Thepipelineiscreatedandthefinalmodelisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-57.PressENTERtoexitthetool.

Figure5-56ThePipeEndConnectortobeselected

Figure5-57Thefinalmodel

Savingthedrawingfile1.ChooseSavefromtheApplicationMenutosavethedrawingfile.

SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:1.YouneedtochoosethePlumbingoptionfromtheWorkspaceSwitchingflyouttoactivatethePipingworkspace.(T/F)

2.Theelevationvalueofanequipmentcanbespecifiedonlyfromtheground.(T/F)3.TheEquipmentdrop-downisavailableinthe___________paneloftheHometab.4.Thecutlengthofapipecanbespecifiedinthe___________editbox.5.Whichofthefollowingtoolsisusedtocreateacustompart?(a)Equipment(b)ContentBuilder(c)CatalogEditor(d)StyleManagerREVIEWQUESTIONSAnswerthefollowingquestions:1.ThePipeCustomFittingtoolisavailableinthePipedrop-downoftheBuildpanel.(T/F)2.TheBranchAngleoptionisusedtospecifythelateralangleofaTeeatthebend.(T/F)3.The__________toolisusedtoaddvalve.4.TocreateacustomMulti-viewPart,youmusthavea___________ofthemodel.5.WhichofthefollowingpanelcontainstheConetool?(a)Build(b)Draw(c)Block(d)ModelingEXERCISEEXERCISE1Inthisexercise,youwillcreatemodelofapipingsystem,asshowninFigure5-58.Figure5-59showstheplanofthepipingsystem.(Expectedtime:30min)

Figure5-58Modelofthepipingsystem

Figure5-59Planofthepipingsystem

AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest1.F,2.F,3.Build,4.Cutlength,5.ContentBuilder

Chapter6

CreatingPlumbingSystem

LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•Createaplumbingsystem•Useequipmentrequiredinplumbingsystem•Changebasicsettingsofaplumbingsystem•Configureplumbingoptions•Routetheplumbingline

INTRODUCTIONInthischapter,youwilllearntheusageofvariousmechanicalequipmentrequiredforcreatingaplumbingsystem.Aplumbingsystemisusedtodrainthewaterbornewastefromdifferentlocationsandtosupplywatertodifferentlocations.Itconsistsofplumbingequipmentandplumbinglinewhichtogethercontroltheflowofwateratvariouslocationsinabuilding.Tocreateaplumbingsystem,firstyouneedtofigureoutvariablessuchastheverticalheads,pressurerequiredatvariouslocations,andtheflowrateofwater.Thesevariablesareusedtodeterminethecapacityofequipmenttobeaddedtotheplumbingsystem.

PLUMBINGWORKSPACETocreateaplumbingsystem,youfirstneedtoinvokethePlumbingWorkspace.Toinvokethisworkspace,choose theWorkspaceSwitchingbutton from theApplicationStatusBar;a flyoutwill be displayed.ChoosethePlumbingoptionfromtheflyout;thePlumbingworkspacewillbeactivated.TheequipmentthatcanbeaddedwhileworkinginthePlumbingworkspaceareavailableintheEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon,refertoFigure6-1.Thetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.

FilterAfilter is an equipmentor a devicewhich is used to filter the fluidbeforemaking it flow through anoutlet.Toaddafiltertothedrawing,choosetheFiltertoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downavailablein

theBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,as shown in Figure 6-2. Select the Panel Filters sub-category in the Filter category of Mechanicalequipment in this dialog box; previewof the selected component is displayedon the right pane in thedialogbox.VarioussizesforthefilterareavailableinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistinthisdialogbox.Select therequiredsizefromthisdrop-downlist.Youcanspecify theelevationvalueof thefilterfromthegroundorUCSbyusingtheElevationeditboxavailablebelowthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.Click in the drawing area to place the filter; a compasswill be displayed below the component.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotatethecomponentattherequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexit.

PumpApumpisamechanicaldevicethatisusedtosupplyfluidtoadesiredpointbyusingmechanicalforce.ThemethodtoplaceapumphasalreadybeendiscussedinChapter5.

ShowerAshower isused toconvertastreamofwater intospray.Toaddashower in thedrawing,choose theShowertoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;the Add Multi-view Parts dialog box will be displayed, as shown in Figure 6-3. By default, theRectangularShowerStallpartisselectedintheShowerscategoryofthePlumbingequipment.Selecttherequiredpart from thedialogbox;various sizes available for that part aredisplayed in thePart SizeNamedrop-downlist.

Selecttherequiredsizefromthedrop-downlistandclickinthedrawingareatoplacetheshowerstall;acompasswillbedisplayedbelowthecomponent.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotatethecomponentattherequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitthedialogbox.Figure6-4showstheannotatedshowerstall.YoucanapplyvariousparametersforthefixtureattachedtotheMulti-viewParts.TheoptionstochangetheseparametersareavailableintheFixtureUnits tabof theAddMulti-viewParts dialog box, refer toFigure 6-5.These options arediscussednext.

Figure6-4Theshowerstall

Figure6-5TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwiththeFixtureUnitstabselectedFixtureUnitTableTheFixtureUnitTabledrop-downlistisavailableintheFixtureUnitstaboftheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtochangethefixtureunittablestylewhichinturnchangesoptionsavailableforfixturetypeandoccupancytype.FixtureTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythetypeoffixturetobeappliedtothemulti-viewpart.

OccupancyTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifytheoccupancytypeoftheMulti-viewpart.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:PublicandPrivate.

FixtureUnitsforConnectorsTherearevariousoptionsavailableinthisareatochangethepropertiesofvariousconnectorsavailableforthecomponent.Theoptionsinthisareaaredisplayedbasedonthepartselected.

SinkAsinkisaplumbingequipmentthatisusedtowashutensilsoranysmallobject.Therearevarioustypesof sinks available inAutoCADMEP. These sinks are available in fourmain categories: Oval Basin,RectangularBasin,VanityBasin,andWallMountedBasin.Toaddasinktothedrawing,choosetheSink

toolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure6-6.Bydefault,theOvalBasinpartisselectedintheBasinscategoryofthePlumbingequipment.Selecttherequiredpartfromthedialogbox;varioussizesavailableforthecategoryaredisplayedinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.Selecttherequiredsizefromthedrop-downlistandclickinthedrawingareatoplacethesink;acompasswillbedisplayedbelowthecomponent.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotatethecomponentattherequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexit.

Figure6-6TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxWaterClosetandUrinalYoucanaddwaterclosetandurinaltothedrawingareainthesamewayasotherequipmentdiscussedearlierinthischapter.AfterchoosingtheWaterClosetandUrinaltoolsfromtheEquipmentdrop-down,thecorrespondingAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxeswillbedisplayed,asshowninFigures6-7and6-8.

Figure6-7TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxdisplayedafterchoosingtheWaterClosettool

Figure6-8TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxdisplayedafterchoosingtheUrinaltool

EquipmentWhenyouchoosetheEquipmenttoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpaneloftheHometab

intheribbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure6-9.Clickonthe+signadjacenttothedesiredcategoryintheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox;therelatedequipmentavailableinAutoCADMEPwillbedisplayedinatreestructure.

Selecttherequiredoptionfromthelistandclickinthedrawingareatoplacethecomponent.Acompasswill alsobedisplayedbelow the component.Using this compass, you can rotate the component at therequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexit.PLUMBINGLINEAfter adding all the required equipment to the drawing, you need to add the plumbing line. To add aplumbing line, choose the Plumbing Line tool from the Build panel in theHome tab; you will beprompted to specify the start point of the plumbing line.Click in the drawing area to specify the startpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifythenextpoint.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifythenextpointorenterthedistanceatthecommandprompt;aplumbinglinewillbecreatedandyouwillbepromptedtospecify the next point.Click in the drawing area to specify the next point or pressENTER to exit thecommand. The options related to plumbing line are displayed in thePROPERTIES palette, refer toFigure6-10.

Figure6-10ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingthePlumbingLinetool

PROPERTIESPaletteTheoptionsinthePROPERTIESpaletteareusedtochangetheparametersofplumbingline.TheoptionsdisplayedinthePROPERTIESpaletteafterchoosingthePlumbingLinetoolarediscussednext.DescriptionThis field is available in the General rollout of the BASIC rollout in the Design tab of thePROPERTIESpalette.Whenyouclickonthisfield, theDescriptiondialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure6-11.EnterdescriptionfortheplumbinglineintheEditthedescriptionforthisobjecttextboxinthisdialogboxandchooseOKtoexit.

StyleThis drop-down list is available in theGeneral rollout of theBASIC rollout of thePROPERTIES

palette.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtodefinetheappearanceandpurposeoftheplumbingline.Bydefault,theStandardoptionisselectedinthedrop-downlist.YoucanselectanyoftheoptionssuchasBlackPipeandCopperTube-TableW.SystemThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheSystemrolloutoftheBASICrolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteintheDesigntab.Itcontainsvarioussystemdefinitionsfortheplumbinglinelayout.WhenyouchoosetheSelectA System button available next to this drop-down list, theSelect System dialog boxwill bedisplayed.Youcanselectasystemfortheplumbinglineaccordingtotheequipmenttobeconnectedfromthisdialogbox.NominalsizeThisdrop-downlist isavailableintheDimensions rolloutoftheBASIC rollout. Itcontainsoptions tochange the size of pipe. The options available in this drop-down list change according to the optionselectedintheStyledrop-downlist.OffsetThiseditboxisavailableintheDimensionsrolloutoftheBASIC rollout.Usingthiseditbox,youcancreatetheplumbinglinebyspecifiedoffsetdistance.ElevationThiseditbox isavailable in thePlacement rolloutof theBASIC rollout.Using thiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofelevationofplumbinglinefromtheground.

RiseThiseditboxisavailableintheSlope rolloutoftheBASIC rolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Youcanspecifythevalueoftotalriseinthiseditbox.RunThiseditboxisavailableintheSlope rolloutoftheBASIC rolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Youcanspecifythevalueoftotalruninthiseditbox.Slope(%)ThiseditboxisalsoavailableintheSloperolloutoftheBASIC rolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.ThevalueinthiseditboxiscalculatedautomaticallydependinguponthevaluesspecifiedintheRuneditboxandtheRiseeditbox.IfyouenterthedesiredvalueintheSlope(%)editbox,thevaluesintheRiseandRuneditboxeswillchangeaccordingly.DefaultFittingOverridesTheoptionsinthisrolloutareusedtooverridethetypeoffittingtobechosenwhilecreatingtheplumbingline.TheoptionsavailableinthisrolloutareTee,Teeup,Teedown,andsoon.Tooverrideanyoftheavailableplumbingfittings,clickinthefieldnexttothedesiredplumbingfitting;theSelectStyledialogboxwillbedisplayed,refertoFigure6-12.SelectadrawingfilefromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlist;the related categories will be displayed in the Category drop-down list. On selecting the desired

category from the drop-down list, the relevant components will be displayed in the area below theCategorydrop-downlist.SelectthedesiredcomponentandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;theselectedcomponentwillbeusedasanoverrideforthedesiredfitting.YoucanalsosearchthedefaultoverridefittingbyenteringitsnameintheSearcheditboxatthetopintheSelectStyledialogboxandthenchooseGotogetthedesiredfitting.

Figure6-12TheSelectStyledialogbox

AssignedengineeringIDThis drop-down list is available in theEngineeringData rollout of theADVANCED rollout of thePROPERTIESpalette.IfthecomponenttobeaddedinthedrawingareahasanASHRAEnumber,thentheengineeringIDforthecomponentwillbedisplayedinthedrop-downlist.YoucanassignanyoftheavailableengineeringIDstothecomponentbyselectingitfromthedrop-downlist.

StyleThis drop-down list is available in theLabels rollout of theLabels and FlowArrows rollout in theADVANCEDrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtoapplythelabelstylestoplumbingline.

TheStyledrop-downlistisalsoavailableforFlowArrows.Theseoptionshavealreadybeendiscussed.PLUMBINGFITTINGThePlumbingFittingtoolisusedtoaddfittingtoaplumbingline.Toaddaplumbingfitting,choosethistoolfromtheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpoint.Also,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure6-13.Clickontheplumbinglinetoaddtheplumbingfittingintheline;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationvalue.Specifythedesiredrotationvalueatthecommandpromptorclickinthedrawingareatospecifytherotationvalue;the plumbing fitting will be added. The PROPERTIES palette displayed on choosing the Plumbing

Fittingtoolisdiscussednext.

Figure6-13ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingthePlumbingFittingtool

PROPERTIESPaletteTheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteafterchoosingthePlumbingFittingtoolareusedtochangetheparametersofplumbingfitting.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.DescriptionThisfieldisavailableintheGeneralrolloutoftheBASICrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Whenyouclickonthisfield,theDescriptiondialogboxwillbedisplayed.Youcanwritedescriptionaboutthefittinginthetextboxavailableinthisdialogbox.StyleThisoptionisavailableintheGeneralrolloutoftheBASICrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Usingthisoption,youcanspecifythetypeoffittingtobeappliedtoaplumbingline.Tochangethestyle,clickonthefieldnexttotheStyleoption;theSelectStyledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure6-14.SelectthedesiredfittingfromthefittingsdisplayedinthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton;theselected fittingwill get attached to the cursor.You can also search theplumbing fittingby entering itsname in theSearch edit box at the top in theSelectStyle dialog box and then chooseGo to get thedesiredfitting.

SystemThis drop-down list is available in the System rollout of theBASIC rollout of the PROPERTIESpalette.Therearevariousoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlisttochangetheapplicationareaofthefittingtobecreated.Bydefault,theStandard(STD)optionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.ElevationThiseditboxisavailableinthePlacementrolloutoftheBASICrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofheightofthefittingfromthegroundlevel.

JustificationThisdrop-downlistisalsoavailableintheLocationrolloutandisusedtospecifythejustificationforplumbingline.Theoptions in thisdrop-downlistdependonthenumberofconnectorsavailableontheselectedfitting.Ifthefittinghasthreeconnectors,thenthetotalnumberofoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistwillbefour:Insertionpoint,Connector1,Connector2,andConnector3.SpecifyrotationonscreenThisdrop-downlist isavailable in theLocation rollout.Thereare twooptionsavailable in thisdrop-downlist.IfyouselecttheYesoptionthenyoucanspecifytherotationvaluewhileaddingthefittinginthedrawingarea.IfyouselecttheNooption,thenyouneedtospecifythevalueofrotationintheeditboxavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.RotationThis edit box is available in theLocation rollout onlywhen theNo option is selected in theSpecifyrotationonscreendrop-downlist.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofrotationofthefitting.ID

Thiseditboxisavailable in theADVANCED rolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.YoucanspecifyadesignIDtothefittingusingthiseditbox.TUTORIALTUTORIAL1In this tutorial, you will create a plumbing system, as shown in Figure 6-15. You can download thearchitecturalfilefromwww.cadcim.com.Pathofthefileis:Textbooks>CAD/CAM>AutoCADMEP>AutoCADMEP2015forDesigners>InputFiles.(Expectedtime:30min)

Thefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethistutorial:a.Openthedrawingdownloadedfromthewebsite.b.Addtheequipmentaccordingtothemodel.c.Createplumbinglinebetweenvariousequipment.

DownloadingandOpeningtheDrawingFile1.Downloadthec06_amep_prt.zipfilefromhttp://www.cadcim.com.Thepathofthefileisasfollows:Textbooks>CAD/CAM>AutoCADMEP>AutoCADMEP2015forDesigners>InputFiles.

2.Extractthisfiletodesiredlocation.

Figure6-15Theplumbingsystemtobecreated3.Open thedrawing filec06_amep_prt.dwg from the specified locationbydouble-clickingon it.Thedrawingfileisdisplayed,asshowninFigure6-16.

Figure6-16Thedownloadeddrawingfile

AddingtheEquipment1. Change the workspace to Plumbing and choose the Shower tool from theEquipment drop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox isdisplayed,asshowninFigure6-17.Also,theshowerstallisdisplayed,attachedtothecursor.

Figure6-17TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox2.Specify800x850mmShowerStallinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistand0intheElevationedit

boxinthedialogbox.

3.Placetheshowerstallinthebathroom,alignedtothecorner,refertoFigure6-18.

Figure6-18Thedrawingafteraddingequipment4. Choose the Sink tool from the Equipment drop-down; the Add Multi-view Parts dialog box isdisplayed,asshowninFigure6-19.

Figure6-19TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxdisplayedafterchoosingtheSinktool

5.SelectVanityBasinfromtheleftareaofthedialogbox,andthenselectpartsizeas750mmx750mm.Click in thedrawing area toplace thebasin, refer toFigure6-20.Make sure the elevationvalue is

Figure6-20Thedrawingafteraddingequipment

6. Similarly, addBidet available in theAddMulti-viewParts dialog box displayed on choosing theWaterClosettoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-down,refertoFigure6-20.Makesuretheelevationvalueis0.

7.ChoosetheSinktoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downandthenchooseWallMountedBasinfromtheleftarea;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure6-21.

Figure6-21TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxdisplayedafterselectingWallMountedBasin

8.Placethebasinsinthedrawingareaatelevation1000,refertoFigure6-22.

Figure6-22Thedrawingareaafteraddingthebasins

CreatingPlumbingLineBetweenVariousEquipmentThere are three plumbing lines to be added to the system: Waste (WP), Domestic Cold Water, andDomesticHotWater.

1.Choose theWaste(WP) tool fromtheTOOLPALETTES-PLUMBINGdisplayedat the right inAutoCADMEPwindow,refertoFigure6-23;youarepromptedtoselectthestartingpointforWasteplumbingline.

Figure6-23TheTOOLPALETTES-PLUMBING2.SelecttheWastePipeEndConnectoroftheshowerstall;theotherendofthewasteplumbinglinegetsattachedtothecursorandyouarepromptedtospecifythenextendpoint.

3.Select thePipeEndConnectorof thevanitybasinplaced in theKitchenarea; theSelectConnectordialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure6-24.

Figure6-24TheSelectConnectordialogbox4.ChoosetheConnector3:WasteoptionfromthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton;thePlumbingLine-ElevationMismatchdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure6-25.

Figure6-25ThePlumbingLine-ElevationMismatchdialogbox5.ChoosetheAdjusttheslopeoptionfromthedialogbox;theslopeoftheplumbinglineisautomaticallyadjustedtopermittheflowofwaterandaplumbinglineiscreated.

6. Similarly, create a plumbing line from the waste line of vanity basin to waste line of bidet in theBathroomareaandthentothewastelinesofthewallmountedbasins.Thedrawingafteraddingallthewasteplumbinglinesisdisplayed,asshowninFigure6-26.

Figure6-26Thedrawingafteraddingallthewasteplumbinglines

7.Choose theDomesticHotWater tool from theTOOLPALETTES -PLUMBING and add thehot

waterplumbingline,asshowninFigure6-27(displayedinredcolor).

Figure6-27Thedrawingafteraddingallthehotwaterplumbinglines

8.ChoosetheDomesticColdWatertoolfromtheTOOLPALETTES-PLUMBINGandaddthecoldwaterplumbingline,asshowninFigure6-28(displayedinbluecolor).

Figure6-28ThedrawingafteraddingallthecoldwaterplumbinglinesThedrawingafteraddingalltheplumbinglinesisdisplayed,asshowninFigure6-29.

Figure6-29Thedrawingafteraddingalltheplumbinglines

SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:1.Youcannotchangethetypeoffittingafteraddingitintheplumbingline.(T/F)2.Rotationofafittingcanbespecifiedeitherbyusinganeditboxorbydynamicallyrotatingit.(T/F)3.ThevalueintheSlopeeditboxiscalculatedautomaticallydependinguponthevaluesspecifiedinthe________and________editboxes.

4.The_________drop-downlistinthePROPERTIESpaletteisusedtospecifythetypeofsystemforplumbingline.

5.Whichofthefollowingequipmentdoesnotrequireafixture?(a)Filter(b)Shower(c)Sink(d)PumpREVIEWQUESTIONSAnswerthefollowingquestions:

1.ThePipeCustomFittingtoolisnotavailableinthePlumbingworkspace.(T/F)2.TheEndCapoptionisavailableintheSelectStyledialogbox.(T/F)3.TheDomesticHotWatertoolisavailableintheToolPalettes-___________.4.Tocreateacustommulti-viewpart,youmusthavea___________ofthemodelinthecurrentdrawing.5.Whichofthefollowingisnotatypeofplumbingfitting?(a)Tee(b)Cross(c)Elbow(d)WyeEXERCISEEXERCISE1Inthisexercise,youwillcreatethemodelofaplumbingsystemusingthedrawingshowninFigure6-30.You can download the architectural file from www.cadcim.com. Path of the file is: Textbooks >CAD/CAM>AutoCADMEP>AutoCADMEP2015forDesigners>Inputfiles.(Expectedtime:30min)

Figure6-30Thedrawingofplumbingsystem

AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest1.T,2.T,3.Rise,Run,4.System,5.d

Chapter7

CreatingElectricalSystemLayout

LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•UseequipmentrequiredinElectricalSystem•ChangebasicsettingsofanElectricalSystem•Configureelectricaloptions•Createwires•Createacabletray•Createanelectricalpanel•Createacabletrayfitting•Addconduitfittings•Calculatetotalloadofdevices•Calculateloadsandwiresize

INTRODUCTIONInthischapter,youwilllearntheusageofvariouselectricalequipmentforcreatinganelectricalsystem.An electrical system is used to transmit power from one location to the other. It is composed ofequipment,panels,cabletrays,wires,conduitsandsoon.Forcreatinganelectricalsystem,choosetheElectricaloptionfromtheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout,theElectricalworkspacewillbeactivated.TheequipmentavailableintheElectricalworkspaceofAutoCADMEParediscussednext.ADDINGEQUIPMENTForcreatinganelectricalsystem,youneedtoaddrelatedequipmenttothestructure.All theequipmentthat can be added while working in theElectrical workspace are available in theEquipment drop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon,refertoFigure7-1.Someoftheoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.

GeneratorA generator is an equipment or a device, which is used to convert mechanical energy into electricalenergy.Toaddageneratortothedrawing,choosetheGeneratortoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,

asshowninFigure7-2.Bydefault,200-600kWEmergencyPowerGenerator-DieselisselectedintheParttab.Previewoftheselectedcomponentisdisplayedintherightofthedialogbox.Varioussizesforthegenerator,dependingontheirloadcapacity,areavailableinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistofthisdialogbox.Selecttherequiredsizefromthisdrop-downlist.Clickinthedrawingareatoplacethegenerator; a compasswill be displayed below the component.Using this compass, you can rotate thecomponentataspecificangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitthedialogbox.

Figure7-2TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwiththe200-600kWEmergencyPowerGenerator-Dieselpartselected

YoucanalsospecifytheelevationvalueoftheGeneratorfromthegroundorUCSbyusingtheElevationeditboxavailablebelowthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.JunctionBoxAjunctionboxisametallicorplasticcontainerthatisusedtohidetheelectricalconnections.Toaddajunction box, choose theJunctionBox tool from theEquipment drop-down of theBuild panel in theHometaboftheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-3.SelectthedesiredjunctionboxfromtheJunctionBoxesnodeintheParttabofthedialogbox.Varioussizesof theselected junctionboxaredisplayed in thePartSizeNamedrop-down list.Bydefault,13HoleLargeOutletBoxes is selected in thePart tab.Select the required size from thedrop-down list.Now,clickonthedrawingareatoplacethejunctionbox;acompasswillbedisplayedbelowthejunctionbox.Using this compass, you can rotate the component at a specific angle.After specifying the angle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitthedialogbox.

Figure7-3TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwiththe13HoleLargeOutletBoxespartselected

SwitchboardAswitchboardisanarrangementofelectricalswitchesconnectedtoeachotherinaclosepackedunit.Aswitchboard controls thepowerofvarious areasof a servingunit.Toadda switchboard, choose theSwitchboardtoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-4.Expand theSwitchboardnode and click on the desired switchboard type; the preview of the selected switch board will bedisplayedinthePreviewareaofthedialogbox.YoucanselectthedesiredsizefromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistdisplayedbelowthePreviewareaofthedialogbox.Now,clickinthedrawingareatoplacetheswitchboard;acompasswillbedisplayedbelowthecomponent.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotatethecomponentataspecificangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitthedialogbox.

Figure7-4TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwiththeCircuitBreakerSwitchboardpartselected

There are three types of switchboards available in AutoCAD MEP by default: circuit breakerswitchboard, distribution board, and utility switchboard. The circuit breaker switchboard consists ofswitches that are automatically operated to protect the circuit from the damage caused by overload orshort circuit. The distribution boards are used to distribute the power coming from source to variousoutlets.Theutilityswitchboardsareusedtotransmitpowerforaspecificpurpose.EquipmentIfyouchoosetheEquipmenttoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheribbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-5.Clickonthe+ signadjacent to thedesiredcategory in theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox; therelatedequipmentavailableinAutoCADMEPwillbedisplayedinatreestructure.Selecttherequiredoptionfromthelistand click in the drawing area to place the equipment; a compass will also be displayed below theequipment. Using this compass, you can rotate the equipment at a specific angle. After specifying theangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexit.

Figure7-5TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxPANELPanelsare,thedistributionboxesinwhichvariousswitchesarearrangedforaspecificpurpose.Toaddapaneltothedrawing,choosethePaneltoolfromtheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;previewofapanelwillbedisplayedattachedtothecursor,refertoFigure7-6.

Figure7-6Previewofthepanel

Also,onchoosingthistool,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-7.Now,clickinthedrawingareatoplacethepanel.Youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationvalueforthepanel.SpecifytherotationvalueandpressENTER;thepanelwillbecreatedatthespecifiedlocation.

Figure7-7ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingthePaneltool

TheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteafterchoosingthePaneltoolarediscussednext.NoteThesymbolsintheStylefieldandtheSelectStyledialogboxaredisplayedinblackbackgroundifyouhavesetthebackgroundcolorofdrawingareaasblack.TheoptionsintheBASIC>Generalrolloutarediscussednext.DescriptionThisoptionisusedtospecifythedescriptionabouttheobject.Whenyouclickinthefieldcorrespondingtothisoption,theDescriptiondialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-8.Youcanenter thedescriptionabout thecomponent in theEdit thedescriptionforthiscomponent textboxof thedialogbox.Afterspecifyingthedescription,choosetheOKbuttontoexitthedialogbox.

StyleThisoptionisusedtochangethestyleofthepaneltobecreated.Clickinthefieldcorrespondingtothisoption;theSelectStyledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-9.SelectthedesiredcategoryfromtheCategorydrop-downlistinthedialogbox;thestylesavailableintheselectedcategorywillbedisplayedofthedialogboxoryoucanalsosearchastylebyenteringitsnameintheSearchboxandclickGotofindthestyle.SelectthedesiredstylefromthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton;theselectedstylewillbeassignedtothepanel.

Figure7-9TheSelectstyledialogbox

TheoptionsintheBASIC>Locationrolloutarediscussednext.Aligntoobjects

Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifywhetherthepanelwillbealignedtotheselectedobjectornot.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.TheYesoptionisusedtospecifythatthepanelwillbealignedtotheselectedobject.RotationThisoptionisusedtospecifytherotationanglevalueofthepanel.JustificationThisdrop-downlistisavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteonlywhentheNooptionisselectedintheAligntoObjectsdrop-downlist.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythepositionofthepanelwithrespecttotheinsertionpoint.PresetelevationTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtosettheelevationofthepanel.Bydefault,UCSisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.ElevationThisoptionisusedtospecifythevalueofelevationfromtheselectedpreset.TheoptionsintheADVANCEDrolloutarediscussednext.SystemTheoptions in thisdrop-down list areused to specify the typeof system forwhich thepanel isbeingcreated.CreatecircuitsTheoptions in thisdrop-down list areused to specifywhether tocreateacircuit for thepanelornot.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.IfyouselecttheYesoptionfromthisdrop-downlist,thenthecircuitwillalsobecreatedalongwiththepanel.CircuitSettingsOnclicking in this field, theCircuitSettings dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown inFigure 7-10.Usingtheoptionsinthisdialogbox,youcandefinevarioussettingsforthecircuit.ChoosetheOKbuttonafterdefiningthesettings.

Figure7-10TheCircuitSettingsdialogbox

NameTheNameeditboxisusedtospecifythenameofthepanel.RatingThiseditboxisusedtospecifytheratingofthepanel.Voltagephase-to-neutralTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythevoltagevaluebetweenphaselineandneutralline.

Voltagephase-to-phaseTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythevoltagevaluebetweentwophaselines.PhasesThe options in this drop-down list are used to specifywhether the selected panel is for single phase

supply or three phase supply.There are two options available in this drop-down list:1 and3. If youselect the1 option from this drop-down list, the panelwill be created for single phase supply. If youselectthe3optionfromthisdrop-downlist,thepanelwillbecreatedforthreephasesupply.WiresTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythenumberofcablestobeattachedwiththepanelafter creation. If the1 option is selected from thePhases drop-down list, only the 1 option will beavailableintheWiresdrop-downlist.Ifthe3optionisselectedinthePhasesdrop-downlist,thenthe3and4optionswillbeavailableinthisdrop-downlist.NoteIfthe3optionisselectedinboththePhasesandtheWiresdrop-downlists,thentheVoltagephase-to-neutraleditboxwillnotbeavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.

MaintypeThere are twooptions available in this drop-down list: theMain lugs only (MLO) andMain circuitbreaker(MCB).Theseoptionsareusedtospecifywhetherthepanelisofmainlugonlyormaincircuitbreaker.Mainsize(amps)ThiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueofCurrent(I)runningthroughthemainsupply.IthasthesamevalueasspecifiedintheRatingeditboxofthepanel.Designcapacity(amps)Thiseditboxisusedtospecifythedesignedcapacityofthepanel.PaneltypeTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythetypeofpaneltobeused.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:ANSIandISO.

EnclosuretypeThiseditboxisusedtospecifythetypeofenclosureforthepanel.MountingTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythetypeofmountingrequiredforthepanel.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Surface,Recessed,andFloor.AICratingThisoptionisusedtospecifytheshortcircuitrating.Youcanspecifythemaximumvalueofcurrentthatcanflowwithoutcausingdamagetothebreaker.

FedfromThisoptionisusedtospecifythesourceofpowerforthecurrentpanel.NotesThisoptionisusedtospecifyimportantnotesthataretobetakencareofwhilehandlingthepanel.DEVICEThis tool isused to insert anelectricaldevice in thedrawingarea.This tool is available in theBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon.Toinsertanelectricaldevice,choosetheDevicetool;youwillbepromptedtospecifyaninsertionpointforthedevice.Also,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-11.Clickinthedrawingarea;thedevicewillbeplacedatthespecifiedpoint.TheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteafterchoosingtheDevicetoolarediscussednext.

Figure7-11ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheDevicetoolTheoptionsintheBASIC>Generalrolloutarediscussednext.DescriptionThisoptionisusedtoenterthedescriptionofthedevicetobeadded.StyleThisoptionisusedtoselectthetypeofdevicetobeinsertedinthedrawingarea.Toselectthetypeof

device,clickinthefieldofthisoption;theSelectStyledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-12.ChoosethedesiredoptionsfromtheDrawingfileandCategorydrop-downlistsofthedialogbox;therelevantdevicesymbolswillbedisplayedinthePreviewareaofthedialogbox.Alternatively,youcansearchastylebyenteringitsnameintheSearchboxandchoosingtheGobutton.SelectthedesireddevicefromthePreviewareaofthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton;theselecteddevicewillgetattachedtothecursorandwillbedisplayedintheStylefieldofthePROPERTIESpalette.

Figure7-12TheSelectStyledialogboxLayoutmethodTheoptions in thisdrop-downlistareused tospecify themethodof insertionof thedevice.Therearethree options available in this drop-down list:One by one,Distance around space, andQuantityaroundspace.IfyouselecttheOnebyoneoptionfromthisdrop-downlistthenyouneedtoinsertthedevicesonebyone.

IftheDistancearoundspaceoptionisselectedthenyoucanspecifythedistancearoundtheboundarybyusing theeditboxesdisplayedbelow it.Onselecting theDistancearoundspace option, theDistancebetween and theNumber of devices edit boxes will be displayed below the option. TheDistancebetweenandtheNumberofdeviceseditboxescannotbeactivatedat thesame time.Onselecting theDistance around space option, only theDistance between edit box is activated. If you choose theQuantity around space option from the drop-down list, the Distance between edit box will bedeactivatedwhereastheNumberofdeviceseditboxwillbeactivated.Youcanspecify thenumberofdevices in theNumberofdevices edit box.Note that touseboth theDistancearound space and theQuantityaroundspaceoptions,youmusthaveaspacecreatedinthemodel.TheoptionsintheBASIC>Locationrolloutarediscussednext.AligntoobjectsTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifywhetherthedeviceistobealignedtotheselected

objectornot.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.ChoosetheYesoptionfromthisdrop-downlisttoalignthedevicewiththeselectedobject.Thisdrop-downlistisavailableonlyifOnebyoneisselectedfromtheLayoutMethoddropdownlistintheLayoutrollout.RotationThisoptionisusedtospecifytherotationanglevalueforthedevice.JustificationTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtojustifythedevicewithrespecttoitsinsertionpoint.PresetElevationTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtosetelevationofthedevice.Bydefault,UCSisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.ElevationThisoptionisusedtospecifythevalueofelevationfromtheselectedpreset.TheoptionsintheADVANCEDrolloutarediscussednext.SystemTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythesystemtypeinwhichthedeviceisinserted.IDThisoptionisusedtoassignanIDtothecurrentdevice.InserttagTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythetagtobeaddedtotheselecteddevice.ElectricalPropertyOnclickinginthisfield,theElectricalPropertiesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-13.Whileaddinganewdevice,youcanchangethenumberofconnectorsandotherrelatedpropertiesbyusingtheoptionsavailableinthisdialogbox.

Figure7-13TheElectricalPropertiesdialogboxCABLETRAYThistoolisusedtoaddacabletrayforsupportingthecables.Toaddacabletray,choosetheCableTraytoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtospecifystartpointofthecabletray.Also,theAddCableTraysdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-14.Now,clickinthedrawingareatospecifythestartpointofthecabletray;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheend point of the cable tray. Click to specify the end point of the cable tray; youwill be prompted tospecifytheendpointofthecabletrayagain.YoucanspecifytheendpointofthenextsectionoryoucanpressENTERtoexit.

Figure7-14TheAddCableTraysdialogboxTheoptionsavailableintheAddCableTraysdialogboxarediscussednext.SystemTheoptions in thisdrop-down listareused tospecify thesystemtype inwhich thecable tray isbeingadded.

ElevationYoucanspecifytheelevationofthecabletrayinthisdialogboxbyusingtheElevationdrop-downlistortheElevationeditbox.TheElevationeditboxisusedtospecifythevalueofelevationofthecabletrayfrom the reference.The options in theElevation drop-down list are used to specify reference for theelevation.The elevation value thus specified can be locked or kept unlocked by clicking on the buttonavailablenexttotheElevationeditbox.HorizontalYoucanpositionthecabletrayhorizontallywithrespecttotheinsertionpointbyusingtheJustificationdrop-down list and theOffset edit box. The options in the Justification drop-down list are used tospecifythejustificationmethodforthecabletrayinhorizontaldirection.TheOffseteditboxisusedtospecifythedistanceofthecabletrayfromthecursor.VerticalYoucanverticallyposition thecable traywith respect to the insertionpointbyusing theJustificationdrop-down list and theOffset edit box. The options in the Justification drop-down list are used tospecify the justificationmethod for the cable tray inverticaldirection.TheOffset edit box is used tospecifythedistanceofthecabletrayfromthecursor.

WidthTheWidthoptionintheAddCableTraydialogboxisusedtospecifythewidthofthecabletray.Ifyouspecify thewidthother than thepredefinedvalue, amessageboxwill bedisplayedwith themessage:Thispartisnotavailableinthesizeneeded.Wouldyouliketocreateacustomsizeofthispart?IfyouchoosetheYesbuttonfromthemessagebox,apartofcustomsizeiscreated,butifyouchoosetheNobutton;theChooseaPartdialogboxwillbedisplayed.Selecttherequiredpartfromthedialogbox.

HeightTheHeightoptionintheAddCableTraydialogboxisusedtospecifytheheightofthecabletray.Youcanspecifytheheightusingthesamemethodthatwasusedforspecifyingthewidth.UseRise/RunThisradiobuttonisusedtospecifytherise/runvalueforthecabletray.Onselectingthisradiobutton,aneditboxadjacenttothisradiobuttonwillbeactivated.Youcanspecifythevalueforriseandruninthiseditbox.UseRoutingBydefault, thisradiobuttonisselectedintheLayoutMethodarea.Asaresult, theElbowAngleeditboxwillbeactivated.Youcanspecifytheelbowanglevalueinthiseditbox.ThiselevationvaluecanbelockedorkeptunlockedbyclickingonthebuttonavailablenexttotheElbowAngleeditbox.CABLETRAYFITTINGThistoolisusedtoaddauserdefinedcabletrayfitting.Tocreateacabletrayfitting,choosetheCableTrayFittingtoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;theAddCableTrayFittingdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-15.Bydefault,thelastusedcabletrayfittingisselectedinthisdialogbox.Select thedesiredpart from thePart tabof thedialogbox; apreviewof the selectedcabletrayfittingwillbedisplayedintherightofthedialogboxandtheselectedpartwillgetattachedtothecursor.Select thedesiredsizeof theselectedpart from thePartSizeNamedrop-down list in thedialogboxandclickinthedrawingareatoplacethecabletrayfitting.Youcancreateacabletrayfittingasaseparateentityorcanjoinitwiththecabletray.

Figure7-15TheAddCableTrayFittingsdialogbox

WIREThistoolisusedtoaddawireinthedrawingarea.Todoso,choosetheWiretoolfromtheBuildpanelin theHome tab of theRibbon; you will be prompted to specify the start point of the wire and thecorrespondingPROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-16.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifythefirstpointofthewire;youwillbepromptedtospecifythesecondpointofthewire.Clicktospecifythesecondpointofthewire;thewirewillbecreated.YoucanspecifymorepointsoryoucanpressENTERtoexitthetool.

Figure7-16ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheWiretool

TipYoucanalsoconvertalineintoawire.Todoso,selectalineandright-clickonit;ashortcutmenuwillbedisplayed.HoverthecursorovertheConvertTooptionandchoose theWireoption fromtheflyoutdisplayed;youwillbepromptedtodeleteorretainthelineaftercreatingthewire.EnterYorNaspertherequirement.TheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette,afterchoosingtheWiretool,arediscussednext.DescriptionThisoptionisusedtospecifydescriptionaboutthewire.

StyleTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythewiretype.SegmentTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythesegmenttypetobeusedwhilecreatingthewiresystem.Therearesixoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Line,Arc,Snake,Polyline,Chamfer,andSpline.Onchoosinganoptionfromthisdrop-downlist,thepreviewofthecorrespondingsegmenttypeisdisplayed.

HeightThisoptionisavailablebelowtheSegmentdrop-downlistonlywhentheArc,Snake,Chamfer,ortheSplineoptionisselectedintheSegmentdrop-downlist.Itisusedtospecifytheheightofthesegment.OffsetThisdrop-downlistisavailablebelowtheHeighteditboxonlywhentheArc,Snake,Chamfer,ortheSplineoptionisselectedintheSegmentdrop-downlist.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecify thealignmentof thesegment.Thereare twooptionsavailable in thisdrop-downlist:Left andRight.TheLeft option is used to align the segment to the left. TheRight option is used to align thesegmenttotheright.RadiusThisoptionisavailableonlywhenthePolylineoptionisselectedintheSegmentdrop-downlist.Thisoptionisusedtospecifytheradiusatcornersofthepolylinesegment.PresetElevationTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtosetthevalueforelevation.Bydefault,UCSisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.ElevationThisoptionisusedtospecifythevalueofelevationfromtheselectedpreset.SystemTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythesystemtypeinwhichthewirewillbeadded.ShowcircuitsfromthepanelsTheoptionsin thisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifywhetheryouwant todisplaythecircuitfromthepanelsornot.CircuitTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythecircuitforwhichthewireisbeingcreated.

ConnectedcircuitsThisoptionisusedtospecifythecircuitsthatareconnectedtowire.ConnectedloadThisoptionisusedtospecifythetotalloadinthecircuitconnectedtothewire.HotsizeThisoptionisusedtospecifythesizeofthehotwireinthewiringsystem.NeutralsizeThisoptionisusedtospecifythesizeoftheneutralwireinthewiringsystem.GroundsizeThisoptionisusedtospecifythesizeofthegroundwireinthewiringsystem.NewRunThis tool is used to start a new run of wire system. This tool is available at the bottom of thePROPERTIESpalette.Itwillbeactiveaftermakingonerunofwire.Onchoosingthistool,youcanstartcreatinganewwiringsystembyspecifyingthestartpoint.CONDUITTheConduittoolisusedtoaddconduitstothedrawingarea.Todoso,choosethistoolfromtheConduitdrop-down of the Build panel in the Home tab of the Ribbon; the PROPERTIES palette will bedisplayed,as shown inFigure7-17andyouwillbeprompted to specify thestartpointof theconduit.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifythestartpointoftheconduit;youwillbeagainpromptedtospecifythenextpointoftheconduit.Clicktospecifytheendpointoftheconduit;youwillbeagainpromptedtospecifythenextpointoftheconduit.YoucanspecifythenextpointoryoucanpressENTERtoexitthetool.Mostof theoptions in thispalettehavealreadybeendiscussed.Remainingoptionsarediscussednext.

Figure7-17ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheConduittoolRoutingpreferenceThe options in this drop-down list are used to specify the preferred routing system for the conduitcreation.NominalsizeThisoptionisusedtospecifythediameteroftheconduitpipe.SpecifycutlengthTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifywhethertheconduithasacutlengthornot.CutlengthThisoptionisavailableonlywhentheYesoptionisselectedintheSpecifycutlengthdrop-downlist.Itisusedtospecifythemaximumlengthofonesegmentoftheconduit.

JustifyTheoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythejustificationmethodfortheconduit.HorizontaloffsetUsing this edit box, you can specify the value of horizontal distance from the conduit to the selectedjustificationpoint.

VerticaloffsetUsing this edit box, you can specify the value of vertical distance from the conduit to the selectedjustificationpoint.SlopeformatTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifytheformatinwhichtheslopevaluewillbeentered.There are four options available in this drop-down list: Angle (Decimal Degrees), Percentage(100%=45Degrees),Percentage(100%=90Degrees),andRisevalue/Runvalue(Meters/Meters).SlopeThiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueofslope.Theformatoftheslopevaluespecifiedinthiseditboxwill dependon theoption selected in theSlopeformatdrop-down list. If you change the slope valuewhileaddingmoreducts,thenthefittingatjointswilladjustaccordingly.BendAngleThisdrop-downlist isusedtospecify theangleofbendthat is tobeappliedonabendwhilecreatingconduit.BendRadiusThiseditboxisusedtospecifytheradiusofbendthatistobeappliedonabendwhilecreatingconduit.ConnectionDetailsWhenyouclickinthisfield,theConnectionDetailsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-18.Therearetworolloutsavailableinthedialogboxcontainingdetailsaboutboththeconnections.

PreferencesWhenyouclickinthisfield,theConduitLayoutPreferencesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure 7-19. The options in this dialog box are used to define the layout preferences for creating aconduit.Usingtheoptionsinthisdialogbox,youcansetthepreferencesforSlope,Elevation,Labelstyle,Flowarrowstyle,andotherparameters.

Figure7-19TheConduitLayoutPreferencesdialogbox

StyleTherearetwodrop-downlistswiththenameStyle:oneintheADVANCED>LabelandFlowArrows>LabelsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteandtheotherintheADVANCED>LabelandFlowArrows>FlowArrows rolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Theoptions in thesedrop-downlistsareused toapplystylestothelabelsandflowarrowsoftheconduit.

PARALLELCONDUITSTheParallelConduits tool isused toaddparallelconduits to thedrawingarea.Todoso,choose thistoolfromtheConduitdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtoselectbaselineobjects.Selectthebaselineobjects,refertoFigure7-20;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheparallelconduits.SelecttheconduitsparalleltotheselectedbaselineandpressENTER;youwillbepromptedtospecifythenextpointfortheconduit.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifythenextpointoftheconduit;aparallelconduitconsistingoftheselectedconduitlinesisdisplayed,asshowninFigure7-21.

Figure7-20Thebaselineobjectstobeselected

Figure7-21TheparallelconduitscreatedCONDUITFITTINGTheConduitFittingtoolisusedtoaddfittingstotheconduit.Toaddaconduitfitting,choosethistoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtospecifyaninsertionpoint.Also,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-22.Clickinthedrawingareaoronaconduitlinetoaddtheconduitfitting.TheoptionsinthePROPERTIESpaletteafterchoosingtheConduitFittingtoolarediscussednext.

Figure7-22ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedafterchoosingtheConduitFittingtoolDescriptionThisoptionisusedtospecifydescriptionabouttheconduitfitting.SystemTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythesystemforwhichtheconduitisbeingadded.

PartThisoptionisusedtoselecttherequiredfittingtypetobeused.ClickinthefieldnexttothePartoptionin thePROPERTIES palette; theSelectpart dialogboxwill bedisplayed, as shown inFigure7-23.Select thedesiredpart from thedialogboxandchoose theOK button; the selectedconduit fittinggetsattachedtothecursor.Theoptionsavailableinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.

Figure7-23TheSelectPartdialogboxTypeTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifytheparttypetobeusedasconduitfitting.Therearefiveoptionsavailable in thisdrop-downlist:All,ConduitBody,Elbow,Tee,andTransition.Chooseanyoftheoptionsfromthedrop-downlist:therelatedoptionsaredisplayedinthedialogbox.SubtypeTheoptions in thisdrop-down list areused tochoose the subtypesavailable for the selected type.Onchoosing a subtype from the drop-down list, the related options are displayed in theSELECTPARTFROMCATALOGareaofthedialogbox.SELECTPARTFROMCATALOGTheparts available for selected type and subtype are displayed in this area.Choose the requiredpartfromthisareaandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;theselectedpartgetsattachedtothecursor.

FILTERTheoptionsinthisareaareusedtofilterthepartsavailableforselectedtypeandsubtypedependingontheirsizeandparameters.

SELECTPARTSIZETheoptionsinthisareaareusedtoselectrequiredsizeoftheselectedpart.Theoptionsdisplayedinthisarea are confined by the values selected in theFilter area of the dialog box. Select the part havingrequiredsizefromthisareaandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthisdialogbox;thepartwillgetattachedtothecursor.CurrentSizeTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythesizefortheselectedpart.Theseoptionsarealsoavailable in theSELECTPARTSIZE area of theSelect part dialog boxwhich has been discussedearlier.NominalDiameterThiseditboxisavailableforeachconnectoraddedtothepart.Usingthiseditbox,youcanchangethenominaldiameteroftheconnector.OtherDimensionsRolloutTheoptionsinthisrolloutareusedtospecifyvariousdimensionsforthepart.Theoptionsinthisrolloutchangedependingupontheselectedpart.ElevationThiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueofelevationfortheselectedpart.SpecifyrotationonscreenTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifywhethertherotationofthepartwillbespecifiedonthescreenorintheeditboxavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.IfyouchoosetheNooptionfromthedrop-downlist,theRotationeditboxwillbedisplayed.RotationYoucanspecifythevalueofrotationinthiseditbox.ConnectiondetailsThisbuttonisavailableintheADVANCEDrollout.Whenyouchoosethisbutton,theConnectionDetailsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-24.Therearetworolloutsavailableinthedialogboxcontainingthedetailsaboutboththeendsoftheconduit.

CIRCUITMANAGERInanelectricallayout,alltheappliancesareconnectedtothepowersourceswiththehelpofacircuit.InAutoCADMEP,circuitsareusedforcalculatingcircuitloads,checkingcircuitoverloads,orcalculatingwiresizes.Therecanbemorethanonecircuitinasingleelectricallayout.Tocreateandmanagecircuitsin AutoCAD MEP, the Circuit Manager is used. To invoke the CIRCUIT MANAGER, choose theCIRCUITMANAGERtoolfromtheElectricalpanelintheAnalyzetaboftheRibbon;theCIRCUITMANAGERpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-25.TheoptionsavailableintheCIRCUITMANAGERpalettearediscussednext.

Figure7-25TheCIRCUITMANAGERpalette

CreateNewCircuitThisdrop-downisavailableatthebottomoftheCIRCUITMANAGERpalette.Thetoolsinthisdrop-

downareusedtocreatenewcircuitstosupplypowertoappliancesdependingontherequiredload,refertoFigure7-26.Thetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.

Figure7-26TheCreateNewCircuitsdrop-down

NewPower&LightingCircuitThis tool isused tocreateacircuit forpowerand lighting.Tocreate such typeofcircuits,choose theNewPower&LightingCircuittoolfromtheCreateNewCircuitsdrop-down;theAutoCADMEP-ElectricalProjectDatabase dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown inFigure7-27 and youwill bepromptedtocreateanewelectricalprojectdatabase(EPD)oropenanexistingdatabase.

Figure7-27TheAutoCADMEP-ElectricalProjectDatabasedialogboxChoose the Create a new EPD file option from the dialog box; the Save As dialog box will bedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-28.SpecifythedesiredfilenameandchoosetheSavebuttonfromthedialog box. A circuit will be created and then displayed under thePower and Lighting node in theCIRCUITMANAGERpalette.Also, therelatedparameterswillbedisplayedon therightsideof thedialogbox.Youcanchangetheparametersasperyourrequirement.

Figure7-28TheSaveAsdialogbox

NewGeneralCircuitThistoolisusedtocreategeneralcircuits.Generalcircuitsareusedforgeneralapplication.Figure7-29showsacircuitcreatedbyusing theNewGeneralCircuit tool in theCIRCUITMANAGER palette.TherearefourparametersavailableintherightsideoftheCIRCUITMANAGERpaletteforageneralcircuit.Youcanchangetheseparametersasperyourrequirement.

Figure7-29TheCIRCUITMANAGERpalettewiththeGeneralcircuit

NewOtherCircuitThis tool is used to create new circuits for special purposes like a circuit to run air conditioner.TheworkingofthistoolissimilartotheNewGeneralCircuittool.CreateMultipleCircuitsThistoolisusedtocreatemultiplecircuitsatatime.Todoso,choosetheCreateMultipleCircuitstool

availableatthebottomoftheCIRCUITMANAGERpalette;theCreateMultipleCircuitsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-30.SelectthedesiredoptionsandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogboxtocreatemultiplecircuits.Theoptionsavailableinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.

Figure7-30TheCreateMultipleCircuitsdialogboxPanelTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtoselectthepaneltobecreated.Allthepanelscreatedinthecurrentdrawingaredisplayedinthisdrop-downlist.SystemTypeTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtoselectthesystemtypeforthecircuitstobecreated.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:PowerandLighting,General,andOther.SystemTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythesystemforwhichthecircuitistobecreated.The options in this drop-down list change according to the option selected in theSystemType drop-downlist.

TotalnumberofslotsThisoptionisusedtospecifythenumberofslotsrequiredforcurrentelectricallayout.Youcannotchangethe value of this spinner directly.The value in this spinner is changed automatically depending on thevaluesselectedintheNumberofcircuitsspinneriftheOtheroptionortheGeneraloptionisselectedintheSystemTypedrop-downlist.IfthePowerandLightingoptionisselectedintheSystemTypedrop-downlist, thenthevaluein theTotalnumberofslotschangesaccording to thevaluesspecified in theNumberof3-polecircuits,Numberof2-polecircuits,andNumberof1-polecircuitsspinners.

Numberof3-polecircuitsThisoptionisavailableonlywhenthePowerandLightingoptionisselectedintheSystemTypedrop-downlist,refertoFigure7-30.Usingthisoption,youcanspecifythetotalnumberofcircuitsthatwillusethreepoleelectricsupply.Numberof2-polecircuitsThis option is also available only for the Power andLighting system type.Using this option, you canspecifythetotalnumberofcircuitsthatwillusethetwopoleelectricsupply.Numberof1-polecircuitsThis option is also available only for the Power andLighting system type.Using this option, you canspecifythetotalnumberofcircuitsthatwillusetheonepoleelectricsupply.VoltageTheseoptions are also activatedonlywhen thePowerandLighting option is selected in theSystemTypedrop-downlist.TheVoltageoptionsareavailablefor1-polecircuits,2-polecircuits,and3-polecircuits.Youcanchangethevalueofvoltageforaspecificcircuitbyusingthisspinner,refertoFigure7-31.

Figure7-31TheCreateMultipleCircuitsdialogboxwithcircuitsselectedDescriptionforcircuitswithbreakersThiseditboxisusedtospecifythedefaultdescriptionaboutthecircuithavingcircuitbreakers.DescriptionforcircuitswithoutbreakersThiseditboxisusedtospecifythedefaultdescriptionaboutthecircuitshavingnocircuitbreaker.DeleteCircuitThistoolisusedtodeletethecircuitsthatarecreatedearlier.Todeleteacircuit,selectthecircuittobedeleted from the left area and then choose theDeleteCircuit tool from the bottom of theCIRCUITMANAGERpalette;theselectedcircuitwillbedeleted.ShowCircuitedDevicesThistoolisusedtodisplaythedevicesthatareattachedtothecurrentcircuit.Onchoosingthistool;thedevicesattachedtothecurrentcircuitarehighlightedinthedrawingarea.CircuitReport

This tool is used to display a report for the current circuit containing the data related to its variousparameters.Todisplayacircuit report,choose this tool fromthebottomof theCIRCUITMANAGERpalette;theCircuitReportdialogboxwillbedisplayed,refertoFigure7-32.Thisreportconsistsofalltheinformationforacircuitsuchasload,voltage,andlength.

Figure7-32TheCircuitReportdialogbox

CutCircuitThistoolisusedtoremoveacircuitfromapanelsystemandplaceitinanotherpanelsystem.Todoso,select the circuit from one panel and choose this tool from the bottom of theCIRCUITMANAGERpalette,refertoFigure7-33.

Figure7-33TheCircuitManagerpalettewiththecircuittobeshiftedCopyCircuitThistoolisusedtocopytheselectedcircuit.Thecircuitselectediscopiedtotheclipboardandthenitcanbepastedinanyofthepanels.Tocopyacircuit,selectthecircuitfromtheleftareaoftheCIRCUITMANAGERpaletteandthenchoosetheCopyCircuittoolfromthetoolbaravailableatthebottom;thecircuitwillbecopiedtotheclipboard.PasteCircuitThis tool isused topasteanalreadycopiedcircuit.This tool isalsoused topasteacircuitcopiedbyusingtheCutCircuittoolortheCopyCircuittool.Topasteacircuit,selectthepanelinwhichyouwant

tocopythecircuitandthenchoosethePasteCircuittoolfromthetoolbaravailableatthebottomoftheCIRCUITMANAGERpalette;thecircuitintheclipboardwillbepastedintheselectedpanel.CalculateWiresThistoolisusedtocalculatethesizeofthewiretobeusedintheselectedcircuit.TUTORIALTUTORIAL1Inthistutorial,youwillcreatetheelectricallayoutofanoffice,refertoFigure7-34.Youcandownloadthearchitecturalfileoftheofficefromwww.cadcim.com.Thepathofthefileis:Textbooks>CAD/CAM>AutoCADMEP>AutoCADMEP2015forDesigners>InputFiles.(Expectedtime:30min)

Figure7-34Anelectricallayoutoftheoffice

TheparametersoftheelectricaldevicesofthegivenofficearegivenintheTable7-1.

Table7-1ParametersofthedevicesThefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethistutorial:

a.Openthedrawingdownloadedfromthewebsite.b.Addthedevicesaccordingtothelayout.c.Configurethedevicestoapplyspecificload.d.Createawiringlinebetweendevices.e.CalculateloadandwiresizeofthecircuitsDownloadingandOpeningtheDrawingFile1. Download the c07_amep_prt.zip file from the http://www.cadcim.com. The path of the file is asfollows:Textbooks>CAD/CAM>AutoCADMEP>AutoCADMEP2015forDesigners>Input

Files.2.Extractthisfiletothedesiredlocation.3.Open thedrawing filec07_amep_prt.dwg from the specified locationbydouble-clickingon it.Thedrawingfileisdisplayed,asshowninFigure7-35.

Figure7-35Architecturallayoutoftheoffice

AddingtheDevices1.OpentheElectricalworkspaceandchoosetheDevicetoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,asshowninFigure7-36.

Figure7-36ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedafterchoosingtheDevicetool2.ClickintheStylefieldintheBASICrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette;theSelectStyledialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure7-37.

3.SelecttheLightingFluorescent(Global)optionfromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlist in thedialogbox and select the 1200 Long Linear Fluorescent device from the area displaying devices in thedialogbox.Now,choosetheOKbutton;thedevicegetsattachedtothecursor.

4.Placethelights,asshowninFigure7-38.

Figure7-38Thedrawingafterplacinglights5.Similarly,selecttheSingleSwitchedSocketOutletandFandevicesfromthedisplayareawiththeSockets(global)andPower(global)optionsrespectivelyselectedfromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlist,andplaceitinthedrawingarea,refertoFigure7-39.

Figure7-39ThedrawingafterplacingfansandsocketsNoteThedisplayofsymbolsoftheinsertedequipmentscanbedifferentifAutoCADMEPisstartedbyselectingtheicondifferentfromtheAutoCADMEP2015-English(Global)icon.Alltheinserteddevices,includingfansandlights,willbedisplayedinmustardgreencolor.Now,youneedtoplacejunctionboxesinthedrawing.6. Choose theDevice tool from theBuild panel in theHome tab of theRibbon; thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.

7.ClickintheStylefieldofthePROPERTIESpalette;theSelectStyledialogboxwillbedisplayed.SelecttheJunctionBoxes(Global)optionfromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlist; the junctionboxesavailableinthecurrentdrawingaredisplayed.

8.SelecttheHexagon3JunctionBoxdevicefromthedevicesdisplayedandthenchoosetheOKbutton;thedevicegetsattachedtothecursor.

9.Placethejunctionboxes,asshowninFigure7-40.

Figure7-40ThedrawingafteraddingthejunctionboxesConfiguringDevices1.SelectasocketfromthedrawingareaandthenselecttheSelectSimilaroptionfromtheSelectSimilardrop-downlistoftheDevicecontextual tabdisplayed in theRibbon;all thesocketsavailable in thedrawingareaareselected;thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.

2.Rightclickontheselecteditems;shortcutmenuisdisplayed.ChoosethePropertiesoptionfromtheshortcutmenu.ClickintheElectricalpropertiesfieldintheCircuitrolloutofADVANCEDrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette;theElectricalPropertiesdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure7-41.

Figure7-41TheElectricalPropertiesdialogboxNow,youneedtospecifytheparametersasperthetable.3.Selectthe230VPoweroptionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist.4.Specify300intheLoadPhase1editbox,refertoTable7-1.5.Selectthe230optionfromtheVoltagedrop-downlist.6.Similarly,selectthe1optionfromtheNumberofPolesdrop-downlistinthedialogbox.7.Specify10intheMaximumOvercurrentRating(amps)editboxinthedialogbox.8.Specify0.8inthePowerFactoreditbox.ChoosetheOKbuttontoexitthedialogbox.9.Similarly,specifytheparametersforotherdevicesaccordingtothetableintheElectricalPropertiesdialogboxbyfollowingthestepsdiscussedabove.Notethatthepowerfactorwillbesameforallthe

devices.Select230VPowerforfansand230VLightingDevices(ceiling)forlightsfromtheSystempropertylistintheElectricalPropertiesdialogbox.

CreatingPanelAll thedevicesareconnected tocircuits.Thesecircuitsare joined toapanel for supply.So,youwillcreateapanelwithcircuitsinthissection.

1.ChoosethePaneltoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifyan insertion point for the panel and the PROPERTIES palette after choosing the Panel tool isdisplayed,asshowninFigure7-42.

Figure7-42ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedafterchoosingthePaneltool2. Choose theSurfaceDoor 3 option from the display area of theSelect Style dialog box with thePanels(global)optionselectedfromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlist tochange thePanel type in theStyleoptionundertheBasic>GeneralrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.SpecifythenameasMainPanelintheNameeditboxintheADVANCED>DesignDatarolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.

3.Specify800intheRatingeditbox.

4.Selectthe230optionfromtheVoltagephase-to-neutraldrop-downlist.

5.Selectthe240optionfromtheVoltagephase-to-phasedrop-downlist.6.Specifymaintypeasmaincircuitbreaker,mainsize(amps)as15,designcapacity(amps)as20,andAICratingas800inthePROPERTIESpalette.

Now,youneedtocreatecircuitsforthepanel.

7.Click in theCircuitSettings fieldof thePROPERTIESpalette; theCircuitSettings dialog box isdisplayed,asshowninFigure7-43.

8.MakesurethatPowerandLightingisselectedintheSystemTypedrop-downlistand230VPoweris selected in the System drop-down list. Set the value 3 in both theTotal number of slots andNumber of 1-pole circuits spinners and select the 230 option from the Voltage drop-down listsadjacenttothespinners.

9.ChoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogboxtoexit.10.Clickinthedrawingareatoplacethepanel,refertoFigure7-44.

Figure7-44Thedrawingafteraddingthepanel

AddingWires1.ChoosetheWiretoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifythe start point of thewireon an electrical device.Also, thePROPERTIES palette is displayed, asshowninFigure7-45.

Figure7-45ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheWiretool2.Click in theSystemdrop-downlist.Select the230VPower(230VPOWER)optionfromthedrop-downlist.

3.Connectallthesocketstothejunctionboxusingwires,refertoFigure7-46.MakesurethattheLineoptionisselectedintheSegmentdrop-downlist.

Figure7-46Thedrawingafteraddingwirestothesockets

4.Similarly,connectall the fansand lights to the junctionboxesusing thewires, refer toFigure 7-47.Make sure that system selected for fans is 230VPower and for lights is 230V Lighting Devices(Ceiling).

Figure7-47Thedrawingafteraddingwirestolightsandfans

NoteAdeviceorwirerelatedto230VPowersystemisdisplayedincyancolorandadeviceorwirerelatedto230VLightingDevices(Ceiling) isdisplayedinbrowncolorinthedrawingarea.Makesurethatallthedevicesconnectedtoacircuitareinthesamesystem.

5.Connectallthejunctionboxestothepanel,refertoFigure7-48.

Figure7-48Thedrawingafterconnectingjunctionboxestothepanel

CalculatingLoadsandWiresizes1.Tocalculatethetotalloadofallthedevicesinthedrawingarea,choosethePowerTotals tool fromtheElectricalpanelintheAnalyzetaboftheRibbon;youarepromptedtoselectthedevices.

2.SelectallthedevicesavailableinthedrawingareaandpressENTER;thePowerTotalsdialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure7-49.

Figure7-49ThePowerTotalsdialogbox

ThetotalloadisdisplayedintheTotalLoadfieldofthedialogbox.Now,youneedtocalculatethewiresizeofthecircuit.

3.Selectallthewiresinthedrawingarea;thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.4.ChoosetheCalculatesizesforthewirebuttonavailableattherightoftheDimensionsrolloutintheADVANCED rollout of the PROPERTIES palette; the wire sizes are displayed in theHot size,Neutralsize,andGroundsizeeditboxesintheDimensionsrollout.

SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:1.Alinecanbeconvertedintoawire.(T/F)2.Thecabletrayisusedtosupportthecablesinthesystem.(T/F)3. TheCreateCircuits option is available in thePROPERTIES palette displayed while creating a__________.

4.The_________isusedtocreateandmanagecircuitsinAutoCADMEP.5.InwhichofthefollowingtabsistheCircuitManagertoolavailable?(a)Home(b)Analyze(c)View(d)ManageREVIEWQUESTIONSAnswerthefollowingquestions:1.TheSpacetoolisnotavailableintheElectricalworkspace.(T/F)2.TheHairDrieroptionisnotavailableintheSelectastyledialogbox.(T/F)3.Youcanselectawiretypefromthe__________taboftheToolPalette-Electrical.4.TheCircuitReportisusedtodisplaydatarelatedtovariousparametersofa________.5.InwhichofthefollowingtoolsistheCutLengthoptionavailable?(a)Conduit(b)CableTray

(c)Wire(d)PanelEXERCISEEXERCISE1Inthisexercise,youwillcreateamodelofanelectricalsystem,refertoFigure7-50.Thearchitecturaldrawingforcreatingthisexerciseisavailableatwww.cadcim.com.Downloadthec06_amep_prt.zipfilefromthehttp://www.cadcim.com.Thepathofthefileisasfollows:Textbooks>CAD/CAM>AutoCADMEP> AutoCADMEP 2015 forDesigners > Input Files. Table 7-2 contains the parameters of thedevicestobeaddedtothelayout.(Expectedtime:30min)

Figure7-50Thefinalmodel

Table7-2Parametersforthedevices

AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest1.T,2.T,3.panel,4.CircuitManager,5.Analyze

Chapter8

RepresentationandSchedules

LearningObjectivesRNINGOBJECTIVESAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•Createverticalsectionofthemodel•Createhorizontalsectionofthemodel•Createsectionlineforcreatingsectionviews•Createelevationline•Createhiddenlineprojections•Slicea3Dobjectforextractingaprofile•Createschedules•Createtables

INTRODUCTIONIn thischapter,youwill learn tocreatedifferentviewsof thebuildingmodel for representation.Theseviewsrepresenteveryminutedetailofthebuildingmodel.Youwillalsolearntocreatevariousschedulesandtablestodocumenttheequipmentrequiredforthebuilding.CREATINGVERTICALSECTIONSVertical Section of an object is created by passing a vertical plane through the objects. To create asection, choose theVerticalSection tool from theSection&Elevation panel of theHome tab in theRibbon;youwillbepromptedtospecifythestartpointofthesectionline.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifythestartpointof thesection;youwillbepromptedtospecify thenextpointof thesectionline.Click in the drawing area to specify the end point of the section line; youwill be prompted again tospecifythenextpointforthesectionline.PressENTER;youwillbepromptedtospecifythelengthoftheboundingbox.Enter thelengthof thesectionareaat thecommandbar; thesectionlinewillbecreated.Figure 8-1 shows a drawing with the section line created. The vertical extent of the object isautomaticallysetastheheightofthesection.Youcanassignauserdefinedvalueastheheight.Todoso,selectthelineandclickintheUsemodelextentsforheightfieldinthePROPERTIESpalette.SelecttheNooptionfromthedrop-downlist;theHeightandLowerextensionfieldswillbeactivatedbelowtheUsemodelextents forheight field.Click in theHeight fieldand specify thevalueof the sectionheight.YoucanalsospecifythevalueoflowerextensionintheLowerextensionfield.

Figure8-1Thedrawingaftercreatingthesectionline

After specifying the section line, youwill create a sectionviewbyusing the section line.To create averticalsectionview,selectthesectionline;theBuildingSectionLinecontextualtabwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-2.Theoptionsavailableinthecontextualtabarediscussednext.

Figure8-2TheBuildingSectionLinecontextualtab

EnableLiveSectionThistoolisusedtocreatelivesectionsbyusingthecurrentsectionline.Thistypeofsectionisadynamicsectionofthebuildingandgetsmodifiedasyoumodifythesectionline.Tocreatealivesection,selectthesectionlineandthenchoosetheEnableLiveSectiontoolfromtheLiveSectionpaneloftheBuildingSectionLinecontextual tabintheRibbon; the livesectionwillbecreated.Todisplay the livesectionyoumustswitchtoanyoftheisometricviewsuchasSWIsometricandNEIsometric.Figure8-3showsadrawingwiththelivesectioncreated.

Figure8-3Thedrawingwithlivesectioncreated

DisableLiveSectionThis tool will get enabled only when a live section is created. This tool is used to remove the livesectionscreatedearlier.Toremovea livesection,select thesectionline thatwasusedtocreate it; theBuildingSectionLinecontextualtabwillbedisplayed.ChoosetheDisableLiveSection toolfromtheLiveSectionpanelof theBuildingSectionLinecontextual tab in theRibbon; the livesectionwillberemoved.ToggleBodyDisplayThistoolisusedtotogglethedisplayofobjectthatisnotdisplayedinthesection.

ReverseThistoolisusedtoreversethesideoftheboundingboxwithrespecttothesectionline.Toreversethesideoftheboundingbox,choosetheReversetoolfromtheModifypanelintheBuildingSectionLinecontextualtaboftheRibbon;theboundingboxwillbecreatedonthereversesideofthesectionline.GenerateSectionThis tool is used to generate section view of a buildingwith respect to the section line selected. Togenerate a section, choose theGenerateSection tool from theModify panel of theBuilding SectionLine contextual tab in theRibbon; theGenerate Section/Elevation dialog boxwill be displayed, asshowninFigure8-4.ChoosetheSelectObjectsbuttonintheSelectionSetareaofthedialogbox;youwill be prompted to select the objects that are to be included in the section view.After selecting theobject tobesectioned,pressENTER.Now,youneed todefine the typeofsection result. InAutoCADMEP, you can display two type of section results by selecting their respective radio buttons from theResultTypeareaofthedialogbox.Boththeseoptionsofgeneratingsectionviewsarediscussednext.

Figure8-4TheGenerateSection/Elevationdialogbox

3DSection/ElevationObjectThisradiobuttonisusedforcreating3Dsectionviewofthebuilding.Ifyouselectthisradiobuttonwhilecreatingthesectionview,thesectionwillbecreatedthreedimensionally,asshowninFigure8-5.

Figure8-5The3Dsectionviewofthebuilding

2DSection/ElevationObjectwithHiddenLineRemovalThis radiobutton isused forcreating2Dsectionviewof thebuilding.Figure8-6showsa2Dsectioncreated.

Figure8-6Thedrawingaftercreating2Dsection

CREATINGHORIZONTALSECTIONTheHorizontalSectiontoolisusedtocreateasectionofthebuildingboundedbytwohorizontalplanes.Tocreateahorizontalsection,choosetheHorizontalSectiontoolfromtheSection&ElevationpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtoselectacornerforhorizontalsection.Clickinthedrawingarea tospecify thefirstcornerof thesectionplane;youwillbeprompted tospecify theotherdiagonal cornerpointof the sectionplane.Click to specify thepoint;youwillbeprompted to specify

elevationofthecurrentsectionplane.Entertheelevationvalueatthecommandbar;youwillbepromptedtospecifythedepthofthesection.Enterthedesiredvalueatthecommandbar;thesectionlineswillbecreated.Tocreateasection,selectthecreatedsectionlinesfromthedrawingarea;theBuildingSectionLinecontextualtabwillbedisplayedintheRibbon.ChoosetheGenerateSectiontoolfromtheModifypanel in the contextual tab; theGenerateSection/Elevation dialog boxwill be displayed.Create thesectionasdiscussedearlier.TheoptionsintheBuildingSectionLinecontextualtabhavealreadybeendiscussed.CREATINGASECTIONLINETheSectionLinetoolisusedtocreateasectionlinepassingthroughanyuserdefinedpoints.Tocreateasectionline,choosetheSectionLine toolfromtheSection&Elevationpanelof theHome tab in theRibbon; youwill be prompted to specify start point of the section line. Click in the drawing area tospecifythestartpointof thesection;youwillbepromptedtospecify thenextpointof thesectionline.Endthesectionlinebyspecifyingtheendpointofsectionline;youwillbepromptedagaintospecifythenextpointforthesectionline.PressENTERtoexitcreatingsectionline;youwillbepromptedtospecifylengthoftheboundingbox.Enterthelengthoftheboundingboxatthecommandbar;thesectionlinewillbecreated.Bydefault,modelextentisusedastheboundingboxheight.Youcanspecifytheheightoftheboundingboxasdiscussedearlier.Tocreatesectionview,select thesectionline; theBuildingSectionLinecontextualtabwillbedisplayedintheRibbon.Restoftheproceduretocreatesectionviewissameasdiscussedearlier.CREATINGELEVATIONLINETheElevationLinetoolisusedtocreateanelevationlinepassingthroughuserdefinedpoints.Tocreateanelevationline,choosetheElevationLinetoolfromtheSection&ElevationpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtospecifythestartpointoftheelevationline.Clickinthedrawingareato specify the start point of the elevation line; you will be prompted to specify the end point of theelevation.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifytheendpointoftheelevationline;theelevationlineandtheelevationplanewillbecreated.Theplanecreatedissquareinshape.YoucanchangethelengthofSide1andSide2byusingthecorrespondingoptionsinthePROPERTIESpalette,asshowninFigure8-7.YoucanalsochangetheanglevaluesoftheplanebyusingtheAngle1andAngle2editboxes.

Figure8-7ThePROPERTIESpalette

Now,selecttheelevationline;theBuildingSectionLinecontextualtabwillbedisplayedintheRibbon.Usingtheoptionsavailableinthecontextualtab,youcancreatethesectionasdiscussedearlier.CREATINGHIDDENLINEPROJECTIONTheHiddenLineProjection tool isused to create2Dprojectionswithhiddenprojection linesof themodel.Tocreatetheprojection,choosetheHiddenLineProjectiontoolfromtheexpandedSection&Elevationpanelof theHome tab in theRibbon; youwillbeprompted to selectobjects for creatingaprojection.Selectallobjectsofthemodeltogeneratethe2DprojectionswithhiddenlinesandthenpressENTER;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointfortheprojection.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifytheinsertionpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifywhethertheprojectionistobeinsertedinplanviewornot.EnterYatthecommandpromptifyouwanttoinsertitintheplanview.Otherwiseanisometricviewwillbeinsertedinthedrawing.Figure8-8showsamodelwithitshiddenlineprojection.

Figure8-8Themodelwithitshiddenlineprojection

SLICINGTHEMODELTheQuickSlicetoolisusedtoextractapolylineoutlineoftheslicecreatedusingthemodel.Toextracttheoutline,choosetheQuickSlicetoolfromtheexpandedSection&ElevationpanelintheHome taboftheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjectstobesliced.SelecttheobjectstobeslicedandpressENTER;youwillbepromptedtoselectfirstpointforslicing.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifythefirstpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifythenextpointforslicing.Clicktospecifythenextpoint;theslicewillbecreatedthroughthespecifiedpoints.Figure8-9showsamodelslicedusingtheQuickSlicetool.

Figure8-9ThemodelslicedusingtheQuickSlicetool

REFRESHINGSECTIONSANDELEVATIONSINABATCHTheBatchRefreshtoolisusedtorefreshall2Dsectionsandelevationscreatedinthecurrentprojectorinthespecifiedfolder.Torefreshthe2Dsectionsandelevations,choosetheBatchRefreshtoolfromtheexpanded Section & Elevation panel of the Home tab in the Ribbon; the Batch Refresh 2DSection/Elevationsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-10.

Figure8-10TheBatchRefresh2DSection/Elevationsdialogbox

There are two radio buttons available in this dialog box: Current Project and Folder. Select theCurrentProject radio button if youwant to refresh all the 2D sections and elevations created in thecurrentproject. Ifyouwant to refreshall the2Dsectionsandelevations in thedrawingsof a specificfolder then select theFolder radio button. After selecting the desired radio button, choose theBeginbutton; all the section and elevation views available in the selected drawingswill be updated and itsstatuswillbedisplayedintheStatusareaofthedialogbox.INSERTINGDETAILCOMPONENTSThedetail components areused to representAutoCADMEPcomponentswithdetailedparameters.Toinsertdetailcomponents,choosetheDetailComponentstoolfromtheDetailspaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theDetailComponentManagerdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-11.Intheleftareaof thisdialogbox,variouscategoriesof thedetailcomponentsaredisplayed.Clickontheplussignadjacenttothedesiredcategory;thesub-categoriesavailableinitwillbedisplayed.Clickonthe plus sign adjacent to the desired sub-category; various components in that sub-category will bedisplayed, as shown in Figure 8-12. Select a component from the list; various sizes for the selected

componentwillbedisplayedinthetableavailableatthebottomofthedialogbox.Selectthedesiredsizefrom the table; the InsertComponent buttonwill be activated. Choose the InsertComponent buttonfromthedialogbox;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointforthecomponent.Clickonthedesiredlocationinthedrawingareatospecifytheinsertionpoint;youwillbepromptedagaintospecifytheinsertionpoint.ClicktospecifytheinsertionpointforanothercomponentifrequiredorpressENTERtoexitthetool.YoucanchangetheviewofthecomponenttobeinsertedbyusingtheoptionsintheViewdrop-downlistinthePROPERTIESpalette.

Figure8-11TheDetailComponentManagerdialogbox

Figure8-12TheDetailComponentManagerdialogboxwiththecomponentselectedSomeoftheoptionsavailableintheDetailComponentManagerarediscussednext.EditDatabaseThis button is available at the right of theCurrent detail component database drop-down list. Onchoosingthisbutton,youcaneditthedatabaseavailablefordetailcomponents.Afterchoosingthisbuttonthebuttonsavailablebelowitwillbeactivated.

AddGroupThisbuttonisavailablebelowtheEditDatabasebuttonandisused toaddgroups to thedatabase.Toaddgroups,choose theAddGroup button; theAddGroup dialogboxwill bedisplayed, as shown inFigure8-13.Theoptionsavailableinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.

Figure8-13TheAddGroupdialogboxGroupNameThiseditboxisusedtospecifythenameofthedetailcomponentsgroup.PathKeyTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtoidentifythelocationofimagesanddrawingsforthisgroup.Bydefault,theSameasParentGroupoptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist,sothepathkeyissameasfortheparentgroup.

FilterKeywordsThiseditboxisusedtospecifythekeywordsforsearchingcomponentsinthecurrentgroup.AddComponentThis button is available below theAddGroup button and is used to add components to the selectedgroup.Toaddacomponent,choosetheAddComponentbutton;theNewComponentdialogboxwillbedisplayed, as shown in Figure 8-14. The options available in theGeneral tab of this dialog box arediscussednext.

Figure8-14TheNewComponentdialogboxDisplayNameThis edit box is used to specify the name of the component that will be displayed in the DetailComponentManagerdialogbox.TableNameThiseditboxisusedtospecifythenameofthesizetableofthecurrentcomponent.RecipeThis edit box is used to specify the name of the file that contains themethod for creating the currentcomponent.Fileshavingthexmlextensioncanbeinsertedinthiseditbox.UnitsTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifywhetherthecurrentunitsystemisinmmorinches.Description

Thiseditboxisusedtospecifythedescriptionaboutthecomponentbeingcreated.

KeynoteThiseditboxisusedtoassignkeynotesaboutthecomponentbeingcreated.Youcanalsoassignthekeynotesby selecting them from theSelectKeynotedialogbox.TheSelectKeynote dialog boxwill bedisplayedonchoosing theSelectKeynotebuttonfromtheNewComponents dialogbox, as shown inFigure 8-15. Click on the plus sign adjacent to the desired category and then the sub-category; thekeynotesforvariouscomponents in thatsub-categorywillbedisplayed.Select thedesiredkeynoteandthenchoosetheOKbuttontoaddtheselectedkeynote.Onaddingthekeynote,thedescriptionabouttheselectedkeynotewillbedisplayedinthedisplayboxjustbelowtheKeynoteeditbox.

Figure8-15TheSelectKeynotedialogbox

FilterKeywordsThis edit box is used to specify keywords for the created component whichwill be displayed in thesearchlist.

Author/ManufacturerThiseditboxisusedtospecifythenameoftheauthor/manufacturerofthecurrentcomponent.WebAddressThiseditboxisusedtospecifythewebsiteurlofthecomponenttobecreated.DateCreatedThisdisplayboxisusedtodisplaythedateonwhichthecomponentwascreated.

DateModifiedThisdisplayboxisusedtodisplaythedateonwhichthecomponentwasmodified.Ifyouhavecreatedanewcomponent,thenthecurrentdateisdisplayedinthiseditbox.IDThiseditboxisusedtoassignauniqueidentitynumbertothecurrentcomponent.Bydefault,thesystemprovidesauniquenumberinthiseditbox.AfterspecifyingthedesiredvaluesintheGeneraltab,clickontheParameterstabtodisplaytheoptionsrelated toparametersof the current component, as shown inFigure8-16.Theoptions available in theParameterstabofthedialogboxarediscussednext.

Figure8-16TheNewComponentdialogboxwiththeParameterstabselected

ViewThisfieldisusedtospecifythenameoftheviewforwhichthecurrentcomponentwillbeavailable.JigtypeTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythepatterninwhichthecurrentcomponentwillbeinsertedinthedrawing.Therearesixoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Stamp,Bookends,LinearArray,Surface,SurfaceLinetype,andSurfaceTop.LayerKeyThisfieldisusedtospecifyalayerkeyforthecurrentcomponent.Clickonthisfield;theSelectLayerKey dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown in Figure 8-17. Select a layer key from theLayerKeycolumnofthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbuttontoexitthedialogbox.TheLayerKeyoptionisalsoavailable in theHatching andLinetype rollouts of the dialog box and has the same function. TheserolloutsaredisplayeddependingontheselectionfromtheJigtypedrop-downlist.

Figure8-17TheSelectLayerKeydialogboxBlockdrawinglocationTheoptions in thisdrop-down listareused to select the locationofblockdrawing for thecomponent.Select theBrowse option from the drop-down list to select a block drawing file from a user definedlocation; theSelectBlockLibrary dialogboxwill bedisplayed, as shown inFigure8-18.Select theblockdrawingandthenchoosetheOpenbuttonfromthedialogbox;theselecteddrawingwillbeusedasablockforthecurrentcomponent.

Figure8-18TheSelectBlockLibrarydialogboxBlocktypeTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtoselectthetypeofblocktobeusedforcurrentcomponentwhileinsertinginthedrawing.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:FixedvalueandDatabase. TheFixed value option is selected if the current block is fixed. TheDatabase option isselectedifyouwanttocreatetheblockofsizesdependentontheoptionselectedinthedatabase.Block/BlockFieldThiseditboxisusedtospecifyanameforthecurrentdrawingblock.ScalingtypeTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythetypeofscalingtobeusedforscalingthecurrentcomponent. By default, theFixed value option is selected in this drop-down list. You can select theDatabaseoptionifyouwanttochangethescalevaluedependingontheoptionselectedinthedatabase.

Scale/ScaleFieldThese edit boxes are used to specify the value of scale. If theFixed value option is selected in theScalingtypedrop-downlistthentheScaleeditboxwillbedisplayed.Youcanspecifyanintegralvaluein theScale edit box. If theDatabase option is selected in theScalingType drop-down list, then theScaleFieldeditboxwillbedisplayed.Bydefault,theS_SCALEvalueisdisplayedinthiseditbox.

AllowscalingTherearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.IfyouselecttheYesoptioninthisdrop-downlist,youwillbepromptedtoscalethecomponentwhileinsertingitinthedrawing.

AllowrotationTherearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.IfyouselecttheYesoptioninthisdrop-downlist,youwillbepromptedtorotatethecomponentwhileinsertingitinthedrawing.AllowXflipTherearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.IfyouselecttheYesoptioninthisdrop-downlist,youwillbepromptedtoflipthecomponentaboutXaxiswhileinsertingitinthedrawing.AllowYflipTherearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.IfyouselecttheYesoptioninthisdrop-downlist,youwillbepromptedtoflipthecomponentaboutYaxiswhileinsertingitinthedrawing.AllowBasepointTherearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.IfyouselecttheYesoption,youwillbepromptedtospecifythebasepointforthecomponentwhileinsertingitinthedrawing.CreatenewviewThistoolisavailableatthetoprightcorneroftheNewComponentdialogboxintheParameters tab.Thistoolisusedtocreatemoreviewsofthecomponent.Tocreatemoreviews,choosetheCreatenewviewbuttonfromthedialogbox;theNewComponentViewdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-19.

Figure8-19TheNewComponentViewdialogbox

SpecifythenameoftheviewintheeditboxavailableinthisdialogboxandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;anewcomponentviewwiththespecifiednamewillbeaddedtotheViewdrop-downlist.RenameviewThistoolisavailablebelowtheCreatenewviewtool.Thistoolisusedtorenamethecurrentselectedviewofthecomponent.Torenametheview,choosetheRenameviewbutton;theRenameViewdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-20.SpecifythenameoftheviewandthenchoosetheOKbutton;thecurrentviewwillberenamed.

Figure8-20TheRenameViewdialogbox

DeleteviewThistoolisavailablebelowtheRenameviewtool.Thistoolisusedtodeletethecurrentselectedviewof the component.To delete the current view, choose theDeleteview button; theDeleteComponentViewdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-21.ChoosetheYesbuttonifyouwanttodeletethecurrentview.ThistoolcannotbeusedtodeletethedefaultSectionview.

Figure8-21TheDeleteComponentViewdialogbox

After specifying thedesiredoptions, choose theOK button from theNewComponent dialog box; thecomponentwill be added to the selected category of components in theDetailComponentManagerdialogbox.EditThistoolisavailablebelowtheAddComponent tool.Itisusedtoeditcurrentcomponent.Toedittheselectedcomponent,choosetheEditbutton;theComponentPropertiesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshown inFigure8-22.Alternatively, this tool canbe accessedby right clickingon the component andselectingtheEditoptionorbyclickingthecomponentinthedatabasewhentheEditDatabaseoptionisactive.TheoptionsinthisdialogboxaresimilartothosediscussedfortheNewComponentdialogbox.This tool shows theGroupProperties when theEdit tool is selected with the group selected in theDetailComponentManager.

Figure8-22TheComponentPropertiesdialogboxDeleteThisbuttonisusedtodeletetheselectedcomponentfromtheDetailComponentManagerdialogbox.Todeleteacomponent,choose theDeletebutton; theConfirmComponentDeletedialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-23.ChoosetheYesbuttonfromthedialogbox;theselectedcomponentwillbedeleted.

Figure8-23TheConfirmComponentDeletedialogbox

CREATINGSCHEDULESTheschedulesarethetablesthatareusedtorepresenttheinformationregardingtheselectedcomponents.Some of the schedules available in AutoCAD MEP are: Plumbing Fixture Schedule, Air TerminalDevicesSchedules,andFanSchedules.Thetoolstocreatetheseschedulesarediscussednext.

AirTerminalDevicesScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down in theAnnotation panel of theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheHVACoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateanairterminaldeviceschedule,choose theAirTerminalDevicesSchedule tool from theSchedulesdrop-down; youwillbepromptedtoselectobjectsorpressENTERtoscheduleexternaldrawings.SelecttheobjectsthatyouwantinthescheduleandthenpressENTER;theschedulewillgetattachedtothecursorandyouwillbepromptedtospecifytheupperleftcornerofthetable.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifytheupperleftcorneroftheschedule;youwillbepromptedtospecifythelowerrightcorneroftheschedule.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifythelowerrightcorneroftheschedule;thetablewillbecreated,asshownin8-24.Bydefault, the?mark is displayed in all the fieldsof the table.Toupdate the entries in thisschedule,selecttheschedule;theScheduleTablecontextualtabwillbeaddedintheRibbon,asshowninFigure 8-25. Choose theAdd All Property Sets tool from theModify panel of the Schedule Tablecontextual tab in theRibbon; the fields in the tablewill display theparameters related to the selecteddevices.Theoptionsavailableinthecontextualtabarediscussednext.

Figure8-24TheAirTerminalDevicesSchedule

Figure8-25TheScheduleTablecontextualtab

GeneralPanel

Thetoolsinthispanelareusedtomodifythegeneralparametersofaschedule.Theoptionsinthispanelarediscussednext.SelectSimilarThistoolisusedtoselectalltheitemsinthecurrentdrawingsimilartotheselectedone.

IsolateObjectsThe tools in this drop-downare used to display/hideobjects in thedrawing area and are discussednext.IsolateObjectsThistoolisusedtodisplayonlytheobjectsthatareselectedinthedrawing.ThistoolisavailableintheIsolateObjectsdrop-downlist.

HideObjectsThis tool is used to hide the selected object in the drawing. This tool is available in the IsolateObjectsdrop-downlist.

EndIsolationThis tool isused toend the isolation in thedrawing.This tool isavailable in theIsolateObjectsdrop-downlist.

EditStyleThetoolsinthisdrop-downareusedtoeditstylesanddefinitionsofthescheduletables.Youcanalsochangethetextstylesandpropertydataformatsusedinthescheduletables.Thetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.EditStyleThis tool is used to change the style of the selected table. To change the style of the selectedschedule, choose theEdit Style tool from theEdit Style drop-down; the Schedule Table StylePropertiesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-26.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.

Figure8-26TheScheduleTableStylePropertiesdialogbox

TheoptionsintheGeneraltabareusedtospecifythenameanddescriptionofthecurrenttablestyle.TheoptionsintheDefaultFormattabareusedtospecifytheformatsuchastextstyle,textheight,textalignment,andcellsizeofthetable.

TheoptionsintheAppliesTotabareusedtoselectthecategoriesforwhichthecurrentselectedstylewillbeapplied.

TheoptionsintheColumnstabareusedtoaddordeletecolumnsinthetable.

TheoptionsintheSorting/Groupingtabareusedtosortorgroupthevaluesspecifiedinthetable.

Theoptions in theLayout tabareused tochange layoutof the table.Using theseoptions,youcanchangetheformatofthetitle,columnheader,rowsheader,andsoon.

TheoptionsintheClassificationstabareusedtoclassifythevaluesinthetable.

TheoptionsintheDisplayPropertiestabareusedtoeditthedisplaystyleofthetable.Usingtheseoptions,youcanchangepropertiessuchascolorsandlayers.

TheoptionsintheVersionHistorytabareusedtodisplayoredittheversionhistoryof thecurrenttable.

ScheduleTableStyleThistoolisusedtochangethestyleoftheselectedscheduletable.Tochangethestyleoftheselectedschedule table, choose theScheduleTableStyles tool from theEdit Style drop-down; theStyleManagerdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-27.

Figure8-27TheStyleManagerdisplayedonchoosingtheScheduleTableStylestool

The options in the Style Manager have already been discussed in the Schedule Table StylePropertiesdialogbox.ClassificationDefinitionThis tool is used to change the classification style used in the current table. To change theclassificationstyle,choose theClassificationDefinitions tool fromtheEditStyledrop-down; theStyleManagerwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-28.SelectatypefromtheleftpaneoftheStyleManagerandtherelatedoptionswillbedisplayedintherightpaneofthedialogbox.Usingtheseoptions,youcanchangethestyleofclassificationofthecomponentsinthetable.

Figure8-28TheStyleManagerdisplayedonchoosingtheClassificationDefinitionstool

PropertySetDefinitionsThis tool isused tochange thedefinitionsofproperty set for the selectedproperty.Tochange thedefinitionofpropertysets,choosethePropertySetDefinitionstoolfromtheEditStyledrop-down;theStyleManagerwill be displayed, as shown inFigure8-29.On selecting a part from the leftpane,theoptionsrelatedtotheselectedpartaredisplayedintherightareaofdialogbox.Usingtheseoptions,youcanchangethedefinitionofthepropertysetsusedinthescheduletable.

Figure8-29TheStyleManagerdisplayedonchoosingthePropertySetDefinitionstoolPropertyDataFormats

Thistoolisusedtochangetheformatdataspecifiedinthescheduletable.Tochangethedataformat,choosethePropertyDataFormatstoolfromtheEditStyledrop-down;theStyleManagerdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-30.Usingtheoptionsavailableinthisdialogbox,youcanchangetheformatoftheproperties.

Figure8-30TheStyleManagerdisplayedonchoosingthePropertyDataFormatstool

TextStylesThis tool isusedtochangethetextstyle in theschedule table.Tochangethetextstyle,choosetheTextStyles tool fromtheEditStyledrop-down; theTextStyle dialogboxwill be displayed, asshown inFigure8-31.Using theoptions in thisdialogbox,youcanchange the styleof text in thetable.

Figure8-31TheTextStyledialogboxCopyStyleThistoolisusedtocopythestyleofanexistingobjectandthencreateanewstylebasedonthatstyle.Tocopyastyle,choosetheCopyStyletoolfromtheGeneralpaneloftheScheduletable tab; theScheduleTableStylePropertiesdialogbox,as shown inFigure8-32.Theoptions in thisdialogboxhavealreadybeendiscussed.

Figure8-32TheScheduleTableStylePropertiesdialogbox

ModifyPanelThe tools in this panel are used to modify the properties of a schedule. The tools in this panel arediscussednext.UpdateThistoolisusedtoupdatethefieldsinthetablethatarenotuptodate.

EditTableCellThistoolisusedtoeditatablecellintheschedule.Todoso,choosetheEditTableCelltool;youwillbepromptedtoselectascheduletablecell.Selectacellfromthetable;theEditReferencedPropertySetDatadialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-33.Ifthedatacomesfromareferencedstyleordefinition, itwillpromptyou toedit the referenceddataas it canaffect theotherdataalso.Usingthefieldsavailableinthisdialogbox,youcanchangethepropertiesofatablecell.

Figure8-33TheEditReferencedPropertySetDatadialogbox

AddAllPropertySetsThistoolisusedtoaddallpropertysetsinthetableforwhich?markwillbedisplayedinthetable.Toaddthepropertysets,choosetheAddAllPropertySetstoolfromthecontextualtab;thepropertysetsinthetablewillbedisplayedautomatically.

ExportThistoolisusedtoexporttheselectedtableinexternalformats.Toexportatable,selectthetableandthenchoose theExport tool fromtheModifypanel in theScheduleTable tab; theExportScheduleTabledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-34.ChoosethedesiredfileformatfromtheSave As Type drop-down list in theExport Schedule Table dialog box and then choose theOKbutton;thetablewillbeexportedtotheformatselectedintheSaveAsTypedrop-downlist.Tochangethelocationofthefiletobeexported,choosetheBrowsebuttonandspecifythedesiredlocation.

Figure8-34TheExportScheduleTabledialogboxConverttoTableThistoolisusedtoconvertascheduleintoatablewhichcanbeediteddirectly.Toconvertascheduleintoatable,selectthescheduleandthenchoosetheConverttoTabletoolfromtheModifypanelintheScheduleTablecontextualtab;youwillbepromptedtospecifyaninsertionpointforthetable.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifytheinsertionpoint;thetablewillbeplacedatthespecifiedpoint.Toeditanyofthecellinthetable,selectthecell;theTableCellcontextualtabwillbeaddedintheRibbon.Usingtheoptionsavailableinthistab,youcaneditthetablecells.

ScheduledObjectsPanelThetoolsinthispanelareusedtomodifytheobjectsintheschedule.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.

AddThistoolisusedtoaddanobjectintotheselectedscheduletable.Todoso,choosetheAddtool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjectstobeaddedinthetable.SelecttheobjectsthatyouwanttoaddinthescheduletableandthenpressENTER;theselectedobjectswillbeaddedinthescheduletable.

RemoveThistoolisusedtoremoveanobjectfromtheselectedscheduletable.Todoso,choosetheRemovetool;youwillbepromptedtoselect theobjects toberemovedfromthetable.Select theobjects thatyou want to remove from the schedule table and then press ENTER; the selected objects will beremovedfromthescheduletable.

ReselectThistoolisusedtoclearallentriesintheselectedscheduletable.Todoso,choosetheReselecttool;youwillbepromptedtoselectthenewobjectsthatyouwanttoaddinthetable.SelecttheobjectsandthenpressENTER;theselectedobjectswillbeaddedtothescheduletableandallthepreviousentrieswillberemoved.

ShowThis tool isused to show the selectedentity from the schedule table in thedrawingarea.Todo so,choose the Show tool; you will be prompted to select schedule table entity. Select the entity; theselectedentitywillbehighlightedinthedrawingarea.

FanScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheHVACoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateafanschedule,choosetheFanScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingafanscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.VAVFanPoweredBox(ElectricHeat)ScheduleThis tool is available is the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbon when theHVAC option is selected in theWorkspace Switching flyout. To create a VAV fanpoweredbox(electricheat)schedule,choosetheVAVFanPoweredBox(ElectricHeat)Scheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingthistypeofscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.SpaceEngineeringScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbon when theHVAC option is selected in theWorkspace Switching flyout. To create a spaceengineeringschedule,choosetheSpaceEngineeringSchedule tool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingaspaceengineeringscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.DuctQuantityScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheHVACoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateaductquantityschedule, choose theDuct Quantity Schedule tool; you will be prompted to select the objects. Theprocedure for creatingaductquantity schedule is similar to theprocedure for creatinganair terminaldevicesschedule.DuctFabricationContractScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbon when the HVAC option is selected in theWorkspace Switching flyout. To create a ductfabrication contract schedule, choose the Duct Fabrication Contract Schedule tool; you will bepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingaductfabricationcontractscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.YoucancreateauserdefinedscheduleusingtheTabletool.Thistoolisdiscussednext.Table

TheTabletoolisavailableinalltheworkspaces.Tocreateatable,choosethistoolfromtheScheduledrop-downintheAnnotationpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theInsertTabledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-35.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.

Figure8-35TheInsertTabledialogboxTablestyleTheoptionsintheTablestyledrop-downlistareusedtoselectatablestyleforthecurrenttable.YoucanedittheselectedtablestylebyusingtheoptionsavailableintheTableStyledialogbox.ToinvoketheTableStyle dialogbox, choose theLaunch theTableStyledialog button adjacent to theTable styledrop-downlist;theTableStyledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-36.

Figure8-36TheTableStyledialogbox

InsertoptionsTheradiobuttonsinthisareaareusedtospecifytheinsertionmethodofthetable.Therearethreeradiobuttonsavailableinthisarea:Startfromemptytable,Fromadatalink,andFromobjectdatainthedrawing(DataExtraction).IftheStartfromemptytableradiobuttonisselectedthenthetableinsertedwillbeempty.IfyouselecttheFromadatalinkradiobuttonthenthetableinsertedwillhavethedatalinkedtoanexcelsheetcreatedearlier.IftheFromobjectdatainthedrawing(DataExtraction)radiobuttonisselectedthenthetableinsertedconsistsofdataextractedbyusingtheDataExtractiondialogbox.

InsertionbehaviorTherearetworadiobuttonsavailableinthisarea:Specify insertionpointandSpecifywindow. If theSpecifyinsertionpointradiobuttonisselectedthenyouwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointfor the table. Ifyouselect theSpecifywindow radiobuttonfromtheInsertionbehavior area thenyouwillbepromptedtocreateawindowforinsertingthetable.

Column&rowsettingsTheoptionsinthisareaareusedtospecifythenumberofcolumnsandrowsforthetable.Youcanalsospecify thewidth of the column, the number of rows, and the height of the rows by using the relatedspinners.SetcellstylesTheoptionsinthisareaareusedtospecifythestylesforthecells.Bydefault,thestyleoffirstrowcellissetforTitle,cellstyleofsecondrowissetforHeaderandthecellstyleofalltheotherrowsissetforData.Pipe&FittingSchedule

This tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhen thePiping option is selected in theWorkspace Switching flyout. To create a pipe andfitting schedule, choose thePipe&FittingSchedule tool;youwillbeprompted to select theobjects.Select the pipes and fittings. The procedure for creating a pipe and fitting schedule is similar to theprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.PipeQuantityThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhenthePipingoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateapipequantityschedule,choosethePipeQuantitytool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Selectthepipesinthe drawing area. The procedure for creating a pipe quantity schedule is similar to the procedure forcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.MechanicalPumpScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhenthePipingoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreateamechanicalpumpschedule,choosetheMechanicalPumpScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Select the pumps from the drawing area. The procedure for creating a mechanical pump schedule issimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.MechanicalTankScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhenthePipingoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreateamechanicaltankschedule,choosetheMechanicalTankSchedule tool;youwillbepromptedtoselect theobjects.Selectthetanksinthedrawingarea.Theprocedureforcreatingamechanicaltankscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.DeviceScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab in theRibbonwhen theElectricaloption is selected in theWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreate adeviceschedule,choosetheDeviceScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingadevicescheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.LightingDeviceScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheElectricaloptionisselectedin theWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreatea lightingdeviceschedule,choosetheLightingDeviceScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.The procedure for creating a lighting device schedule is similar to the procedure for creating an airterminaldevicesschedule.Conduit&FittingScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheElectricaloptionisselectedin theWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreateaconduit

and fitting schedule, choose theConduit&FittingSchedule tool; youwill be prompted to select theobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingaconduitandfittingscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.Electrical&MechanicalEquipmentScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheElectricaloptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateanelectricalandmechanicalequipmentschedule,choosetheElectrical&MechanicalEquipmentScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatinganelectricalandmechanicalequipmentscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.3-PhaseBranchPanelScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheElectricaloptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreatea3-phasebranchpanelschedule,choosethe3-PhaseBranchPanelScheduletool;thePanelScheduledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-37.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.

Figure8-37ThePanelScheduledialogboxPanelThe options in this drop-down list are used to select the panel forwhich the panel schedule is beingcreated.

PanelscheduletablestyleTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythestyleofpanelschedule.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:DistributionBoardandPanel.SelecttheDistributionBoardoptionifyouwanttousethedistributionboardasthepanelscheduletablestyle.IfyouwanttousepanelaspanelscheduletablestylethenselectthePaneloptionfromthedrop-downlist.PanelschedulestylelocationTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythelocationofpanelschedulestyle.Tospecifyauserdefined location,choose theBrowseoption from thedrop-down list; theSelect a file dialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-38.Select thefileandthenchoosetheOpenbutton; thepanelschedulestyleswillbefetchedfromtheselectedfile.

Figure8-38TheSelectaFiledialogboxShowpanelsfromTherearetworadiobuttonsinthisarea:CurrentdrawingandElectricalprojectdatabase.Select theCurrentdrawingradiobuttonifyouwanttousethepanelsavailableinthecurrentdrawing.Youcanalsousetheelectricalprojectdatabasefordisplayingpanel.Todoso,selecttheElectricalprojectdatabaseradiobutton;thesystemwillautomaticallydisplaythepanelsavailableintheelectricalprojectdatabase.If anelectricalprojectdatabase file ismissingorunavailable then itwillpromptyou tocreateanewEPDfileoropenanexistingEPDfile.Afterspecifyingthedesiredparametersinthedialogbox,choosetheOKbutton;thepanelschedulewillgetattachedtothecursor.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifytheinsertionpoint; the schedulewill beplacedat the specifiedpoint.Youcanedit anyof the cells in theschedulebydoubleclickingonit.1-PhaseBranchPanelScheduleThistoolisalsoavailableintheSchedulesdrop-downoftheAnnotationpanelintheHome taboftheRibbonwhentheElectricaloptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreatea1-phasebranchpanelschedule,choosethe1-PhaseBranchPanelScheduletool;thePanelScheduledialogboxwillbedisplayed.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxhavealreadybeendiscussedin3-phaseBranchPanelSchedule.

DistributionBoardSchedule

ThistoolisalsoavailableintheSchedulesdrop-downoftheAnnotationpanelintheHome taboftheRibbon when the Electrical option is selected in the Workspace Switching flyout. To create adistributionboard schedule, choose theDistributionBoardSchedule tool; thePanel Schedule dialogboxwillbedisplayed.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxhavealreadybeendiscussed.SwitchboardScheduleThistoolisalsoavailableintheSchedulesdrop-downoftheAnnotationpanelintheHome taboftheRibbon when the Electrical option is selected in the Workspace Switching flyout. To create aswitchboard schedule, choose theSwitchboardSchedule tool; thePanelSchedule dialogboxwill bedisplayed.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxhavealreadybeendiscussed.PanelScheduleThistoolisalsoavailableintheSchedulesdrop-downoftheAnnotationpanelintheHome taboftheRibbonwhentheElectricaloptionisselectedin theWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Select this tool; thePanelScheduledialogboxwillbedisplayedwiththePaneloptionselectedinthePanelscheduletablestyledrop-downlistbydefault.PlumbingFixtureScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhenthePlumbingoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateaplumbingfixtureschedule,choosethePlumbingFixtureScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.The procedure for creating a plumbing fixture schedule is similar to the procedure for creating an airterminaldevicesschedule.PlumbingFixture&PipeConnectionScheduleThis tool is available in theSchedules drop-down iof theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhenthePlumbingoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateaplumbingfixtureandpipeconnectionschedule,choosethePlumbingFixture&PipeConnectionSchedule tool;you will be prompted to select the objects. The procedure for creating a plumbing fixture and pipeconnectionscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.WaterHeater(Gas)ScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbon when thePlumbing option is selected in theWorkspace Switching flyout. To create awaterheater schedule, choose theWaterHeater (Gas) Schedule tool; you will be prompted to select theobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingawaterheater(gas)scheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.DoorScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheArchitectureoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreateadoorschedule,choosetheDoorScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingadoorscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.

DoorSchedule-ProjectBasedThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheArchitectureoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateaprojectbaseddoorschedule,choosetheDoorSchedule-ProjectBasedtool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingaprojectbaseddoorscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.WindowScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbon when the Architecture option is selected in theWorkspace Switching flyout. To create awindowschedule, choose theWindowSchedule tool;youwillbeprompted to select theobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingawindowscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.

RoomScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheArchitectureoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreatearoomschedule,choosetheWindowScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingaroomscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.SpaceSchedule-BOMAThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheArchitectureoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateaspaceschedule, choose theSpaceSchedule -BOMA tool; youwill be prompted to select the objects. Theprocedureforcreatingaspacescheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.SpaceInventoryScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheArchitectureoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateaspaceinventory schedule, choose the Space Inventory Schedule tool; you will be prompted to select theobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingaspaceinventoryscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.WallScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheArchitectureoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreateawallschedule,choosetheWallScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingawallscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.ScheduleStyles

This tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheArchitectureoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Thistoolisusedtoopen the Style Manager with the options related to schedule styles only. The options in the StyleManagerhavealreadybeendiscussed.TableEditingTableeditingcanbedoneafterselectingthetableschedulecreatedbytheuser.Youcaneditascheduletable in the same way as done in an Excel sheet. On selecting a cell from the table, theTable Cellcontextual tabwill be displayed in theRibbon, as shown in Figure 8-39. The options in this tab arediscussednext.

Figure8-39PartialviewoftheTableCellcontextualtab

RowsThetoolsinthispanelareusedtoaddordeleterowsfromthetable.Thetoolsavailableinthispanelarediscussednext.InsertAboveThistoolisusedtoinsertarowabovetheselectedcell.

InsertBelowThistoolisusedtoinsertarowbelowtheselectedcell.

DeleteRow(s)Thistoolisusedtodeletetherowoftheselectedcell.

ColumnsThetoolsinthispanelareusedtoaddordeletecolumnsfromthetable.Thetoolsavailableinthispanelarediscussednext.InsertLeftThistoolisusedtoinsertacolumnontheleftoftheselectedcell.

InsertRightThistoolisusedtoinsertacolumnontherightoftheselectedcell.

DeleteColumn(s)Thistoolisusedtodeletethecolumnoftheselectedcell.

The tools in thispanelareused tomergeor separate thecells in the table.The toolsavailable in thispanelarediscussednext.MergeCellsThetoolsinthisdrop-downareusedtomergethecellsinthedesiredpattern.Thetoolsinthedrop-downarediscussednext.

MergeAllThistoolisusedtomergealltheselectedcellsofthetable.

MergeByRowThistoolisusedtomergealltheselectedcellsrowwise.

MergeByColumnThistoolisusedtomergealltheselectedcellscolumnwise.

UnmergeCellsThistoolisusedtoseparatethemergedcellinthetable.

CellStylesThetoolsinthispanelareusedtomanagecellstyles.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.MatchCellThistoolisusedtomatchthepropertiesofothercellstotheselectedcell.Tousethisoption,selectacellandthenchoosetheMatchCelltool;youwillbepromptedtoselectthedestinationcell.Clickinthedestinationcell;thepropertiesoftheselectedcellwillbeappliedtothedestinationcell.CellAlignmentThetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downareusedtojustifythetextinthetablecells.Thetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.

TopLeftItisusedtoalignthetextinthetopleftofthecell.

TopCenterItisusedtoalignthetextinthetopcenterofthecell.

TopRightItisusedtoalignthetextinthetoprightofthecell.

MiddleLeftItisusedtoalignthetextinthemiddleleftofthecell.

MiddleCenterItisusedtoalignthetextinthemiddlecenterofthecell.

MiddleRightItisusedtoalignthetextinthemiddlerightofthecell.

BottomLeftItisusedtoalignthetextinthebottomleftofthecell.

BottomCenterItisusedtoalignthetextinthebottomcenterofthecell.

BottomRightItisusedtoalignthetextinthebottomrightofthecell.

TableCellStylesTheoptions in thisdrop-down listareused toapplyacell style to theselectedcell.Thecell stylesdisplayedinthisdrop-downlistarethecellstylesavailableinthecurrenttablestyle.

CreateNewCellStyleThisoptionisusedtocreatenewcellstyles.Todoso,selecttheCreateNewCellStyleoptionfromthedrop-downlist;theCreateNewCellStyledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-40.AdefaultnameisdisplayedintheNewStyleNameeditboxofthisdialogbox.Youcanspecifythedesired name in this edit box. The options in the StartWith drop-down list are used to select atemplateforthecellstyletobecreated.

Figure8-40TheCreateNewCellStyledialogbox

After specifying the desired options, choose theContinue button; a new style will be created anddisplayedintheTableCellStylesdrop-downlist.

TableCellBackgroundColorTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtochangethebackgroundcoloroftheselectedcell.

EditBordersThisbuttonisusedtomodifybordersoftheselectedcell.Todoso,choosetheEditBorderbutton;theCellBorderPropertiesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-41.TheoptionsusedforeditingthebordersareshownintheBorderpropertiesarea.UsingtheoptionsavailableintheBorderpropertiesarea,youcanchangethepropertiesofborderslikelineweight,linetype,colorandsoon.To change the border type, choose the corresponding button available around the Preview area.PreviewofthechangesmadeintheselectedborderaredisplayedinthePreviewarea.Afterspecifying

the desired options, choose theOK button from the dialog box; the changeswill be applied to theselectedcell.

Figure8-41TheCellBorderPropertiesdialogbox

CellFormatThe tools in this panel are used to modify the format of data to be entered in a cell. Also, you canlock/unlocktheselectedcellsbyusingthetoolsinthispanel.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.CellLockingThetoolsinthisdrop-downareusedtolock/unlocktheformat,content,orbothofacell.Thetoolsinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.UnlockedThistoolisusedtounlocktheselectedcellsothatitcanbeeditedformatwiseaswellascontentwise.

ContentLockedThistoolisusedtolockthecontentoftheselectedcellsothatitcannotbeedited.

FormatLockedThistoolisusedtolocktheformatoftheselectedcellsothatitcannotbeedited.

ContentandFormatLockedThis tool isused to lock thecontentaswellas the formatof the selectedcell so that it cannotbeedited.

DataFormatTheoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifytheformatoftheselectedcell.

InsertThetoolsavailableinthispanelareusedtoinsertvarioustypesofobjectsinthetable.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.BlockThis tool isused to insert ablock in thecurrentcell.Todoso, choose theBlock tool; the Insert aBlock in a Table Cell dialog box will be displayed, as shown in Figure 8-42. Using the optionsavailable in this dialog box, you can specify the values for the parameters such asScale,RotationAngle,andOverallcellalignmentfortheselectedblockinthecell.Also,apreviewoftheblocktobeinsertedwillbedisplayedon the right in thedialogbox.After specifying thedesiredoptions in thisdialogbox,choosetheOKbutton;theblockwillbeinsertedintheselectedcell.

Figure8-42TheInsertaBlockinaTableCelldialogbox

FieldThistoolisusedtoinsertatextfieldinthecurrentcell.Toinsertatextfield,choosetheFieldoption;theField dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown in Figure 8-43. Select a category from theFieldcategorydrop-downlistinthedialogbox;theoptionsrelatedtotheselectedcategoryaredisplayedintheFieldnameslistbox.Selectanoptionfromthislistbox;therelatedoptionswillbedisplayedintherightofthedialogbox.SpecifythedesiredoptionfromtherightareaandthenchoosetheOKbutton;thespecifiedfieldwillbeinsertedinthecurrentcell.

Figure8-43TheFielddialogbox

FormulaTheoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downareusedtoapplyaformulatotheselectedcell.

ManageCellContentsThistoolisusedtomanagethedirectionandorderofthecontentintheselectedcellofthetable.Thistoolisactiveonlywhenyouinsertablockinthecell.

DataThetoolsinthispanelareusedtomanagedatalinksoftheselectedcell.Thetoolsavailableinthispanelarediscussednext.LinkCellThistoolisusedtolinktheselectedcellinthetabletoafieldintheexcelsheet.Todoso,choosetheLinkCelltoolfromthecontextualtab;theSelectaDataLinkdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-44.ClickontheCreateanewExcelDataLinknodeintheLinksareaofthedialogbox;theEnterDataLinkNamedialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-45.Specifythenameof thedata link in theName edit box and then choose theOK button from the dialogbox; theNewExcelDataLinkdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-46.ClickontheBrowsebuttonnext to theBrowse for a file drop-down list in the dialog box; the Save As dialog box will be

displayedandyouwillbepromptedtoopenanalreadyexistingexcelfile.SelectanalreadyexistingexcelfileandthenchoosetheOpenbuttonfromthedialogbox;theexpandedNewExcelDataLinkdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-47.

Figure8-44TheSelectaDataLinkdialogbox

Figure8-45TheEnterDataLinkNamedialogbox

Figure8-46TheNewExcelDataLinkdialogbox

Figure8-47TheexpandedNewExcelDataLinkdialogboxThisdialogboxisdividedintothreeareas:File,Linkoptions,andPreview.TheoptionsintheFilearea

areusedtospecifythelocationofexcelfileanditspathtype.TheoptionsintheLinkOptionsareaareused to specify thedata that is tobe linked from theexcel sheet.ThePreview area isused todisplaypreviewoftheselecteddatathatistobelinked.Afterspecifyingthedesiredsettingsinthedialogbox,choosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogboxtoapplythesettings;theSelectaDataLinkdialogboxwillbedisplayedagainwiththenewlycreateddatalinkselected.ChoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;theselectedlinkwillbeappliedtotheselectedcell.

DownloadfromSourceThistoolisavailableintheDatapaneloftheTableCellcontextualtab.Thistoolisusedtoupdatethelinkfromthesourcefile.Thistoolisactiveonlywhenyouselectalinkfromthetable.

TUTORIALTUTORIAL1In this tutorial, youwill create an air terminal devices schedule for themechanical system created inExercise1ofChapter4,asshowninFigure8-48.(Expectedtime:30min)

Figure8-48ThemechanicalsystemcreatedinChapter4

Thefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethistutorial:a.OpenthedrawingcreatedinExcercise1ofchapter4.b.AddtheAirterminalDeviceSchedule.c.UpdatingthePropertyDataandScheduleDetails.

OpeningtheDrawingFileinHVACWorkspace1.StartAutoCADMEPandchoosetheOpentoolfromtheQuickAccessToolbar;theSelectFiledialogboxisdisplayed.

2.Select thedrawingfilecreatedinExercise1ofChapter4andthenchoosetheOpenbutton; thefilewillopenintheapplicationwindow.

3.ChoosetheWorkspaceSwitchingbuttonintheApplicationStatusBar;aflyoutisdisplayed.4.ChoosetheHVACoptionfromtheflyout;theHVACworkspaceisactivated.

AddingAirTerminalDevicesSchedule1. Choose theAirTerminalDevicesSchedule tool from theSchedule drop-down in theAnnotationpaneloftheHometabinRibbon;youarepromptedtoselecttheobjectstobeincludedintheschedule.

2.SelectalltheDiffusersandReturnAirGrillesavailableinthedrawingareaandthenpressENTER;theschedulegetsattachedtothecursor.

3. Click to specify the upper left corner of the schedule; you are prompted to specify the lower rightcorner.

4.Clicktospecifythelowerrightcorneroftheschedule;thescheduleisplacedatthespecifiedposition.Bydefault,“?”marksaredisplayedineachof thefields.Youneedtoupdatethepropertysets inthesefields.

UpdatingtheSchedule1. Select the schedule from the drawing area; the ScheduleTable contextual tab is displayed in theRibbon.

2.ChoosetheAddAllPropertySetstoolfromtheModifypanelinthecontextualtab;thepropertiesintheschedulechangeaccordingly,asshowninFigure8-49.

Figure8-49Themechanicalairterminaldevicesschedule

Youcanalsoeditthescheduletoincludemoreinformationintheblankfields.

SavingtheDrawing1.ChooseSavefromtheApplicationMenutosavethedrawingfileatanappropriatelocation.

SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:1.Verticalsectionisasectioncreatedbyaplaneperpendiculartotheobjecttobesectioned.(T/F)2.TheGenerateSectiontoolisusedtocreatelivesectionsbyusingthecurrentsectionline.(T/F)3.Tocreateahorizontalsection,choosethe___________toolfromtheSection&ElevationpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon.

4.The__________toolisusedtoextractapolylineoutlineoftheslicecreatedthroughthemodel.5.InwhichofthefollowingpanelsistheDetailComponentstoolavailable?(a)Build(b)Details(c)Modify(d)DrawREVIEWQUESTIONSAnswerthefollowingquestions:1.TheDetailComponentstoolisnotavailableintheSchematicworkspace.(T/F)2.TheSpaceEngineeringSchedule tool is available in theSchedules drop-down in theAnnotationpaneloftheHometabintheRibbonwhentheHVACoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.(T/F)

3.TheSpace InventorySchedule option is available in theSchedules drop-down in theAnnotationpanel of theHome tab in theRibbon when the __________ option is selected in theWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.

4.The__________toolisusedtorefreshallthe2Dsectionsandelevationscreatedinthecurrentprojectorinthespecifiedfolder.

5.Inwhichofthefollowingdialogboxes,theRecipeoptionisavailable?(a)GenerateSection/Elevation(b)BatchRefreshSection/Elevations(c)ComponentProperties(d)ScheduleTableStyleProperties

EXERCISEEXERCISE1Inthisexercise,youwillcreatethe1-PhaseBranchPanelscheduleofthepanelinthedrawing,asshowninFigure8-50.ThedrawingfileiscreatedinTutorial1ofChapter7.ThescheduleisgiveninFigure8-51foryourreference.(Expectedtime:30min)

Figure8-50Themechanicalairterminaldevicesschedule

Figure8-51The1-PhaseBranchPanelscheduleforthedrawing

AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest

1.T,2.F,3.HorizontalSection,4.QuickSlice,5.Details

Chapter9

WorkingwithSchematics

LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•Understandtheuseofschematics•Addschematicsymbolstothedrawings•Createschematiclinesinthedrawing•Displayschematicrepresentationofexistingdrawing

INTRODUCTIONIn thischapter,youwill learnaboutvarious tools thatareused forcreatinga schematicdrawing forabuildingsystem.Youwillalso learn theuseofequipmentandschematic lines ina schematicdrawing.Thetools tocreateaschematicdrawingareavailable in theSchematicworkspace.Thisworkspace isdiscussednext.SCHEMATICWORKSPACETo invoke this workspace, choose the Schematic option from theWorkspace Switching flyout; theSchematicworkspacewillbeactivated.Figure9-1showspartialviewoftheRibbonintheSchematicworkspace.ThetoolstocreateaschematicdrawingareavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon.Theusageofthesetoolsarediscussednext.

Figure9-1PartialviewoftheRibbonintheSchematicworkspace

EquipmentThis tool is available in theBuild panel of theHome tab in theRibbon. This tool is used to addequipment to thedrawing.Toaddanequipment,choose theEquipment tool fromtheRibbon; theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed.TheoptionsinthisdialogboxarethesameasdiscussedinChapter6.

SchematicSymbolSchematicsymbolsarethesymbolicrepresentationsofphysicalobjectsrequiredinabuildingsystem.InAutoCADMEP,therearetwotypesofschematicsymbols:In-linesymbolsandEnd-of-linesymbols.TheIn-linesymbolsarethosethatcanbeaddedinbetweentheschematic line.Note thatwhenyoudeleteaschematiclineinwhichtheIn-linesymbolsareattached,thesymbolsalsogetdeletedwiththeline.TheEnd-of-linesymbolsarethosethatcanbeaddedeitheratthestartpointorattheendpointofaschematicline.Toaddaschematicsymbol,choosetheSchematicSymboltoolfromtheBuildpaneloftheHome

tab in theRibbon; the symbolwill get attached to the cursor andyouwill be prompted to specify theinsertionpointforthesymbol.Also,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-2.Clickinthedrawingareatoplacethesymbol.TheoptionsinthePROPERTIESpalettearediscussednext.

Figure9-2ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheSchematicSymboltoolPROPERTIESPaletteTheoptions in thePROPERTIESpaletteareused tochange theparametersof theschematicsymbols.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.DescriptionThisfieldisavailableintheBASIC>GeneralrolloutoftheDesigntabinthePROPERTIESpalette.Whenyouclickon this field, theDescriptiondialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-3.EnterdescriptionforthesymbolintheEditthedescriptionforthisobjecttextboxinthisdialogbox.ChooseOKtoexitthedialogbox.

StyleThisoptionisavailableintheBASIC>GeneralrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Thisoptionisused to selecta schematic symbol from the listof symbolsavailable inAutoCADMEP.To select asymbol,choosetheStyleoptionfromthePROPERTIESpalette;theSelectStyledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-4.Inthisdialogbox,theoptionsintheDrawingFiledrop-downlistareusedtospecifythetemplatefileforschematicsymbols.IfyouselectanyoptionfromtheDrawingFile drop-down list, the categories available in the respective template filewillbedisplayed in theCategory drop-down list. Select the desired category from the Category drop-down list; therespectivesymbolswillbedisplayedinthedialogbox.SelectasymbolfromthedialogboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttontoexit.

SystemThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBASIC>Systemrollout.Thisdrop-downlistcontainsvarioussystemdefinitionsforbuildingsystems.Theoptionselectedinthisdrop-downlistspecifiesthesystemtowhichthesymbolbelongs.

OrientationThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBASIC>DrawingModerollout.Theoptionsinthisrolloutareused to specify the orientation in which the symbol will be placed in the drawing. There are twooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:OrthoandIsometric.TheOrthooptionisusedtoplacethesymbols in orthographicmode,while the Isometric option is used to place the symbol in isometricorientation.TheIsometricoptionisactiveonlywhenanisometricschematicsymbolisselectedintheSelectstyledialogbox.

Isoplane

This drop-down list is available in the PROPERTIES palette only when the Isometric option isselectedintheOrientationdrop-downlist.Therearethreeoptionsinthisdrop-downlist:Left,Right,andTop. Select an option from this drop-down list; the symbol will be oriented along the planecorrespondingtotheselectedoption.

JustificationThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheLocationrollout.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtopositionthesymbolwithrespecttotheinsertionpoint.

RotationThiseditboxisavailableintheLocationrolloutfortheEnd-of-linesymbolsinorthographicmode.Torotatethesymbol,enterthedesiredvalueofrotationinthiseditbox.

RotationinisoplaneThisfieldisavailableintheLocationrolloutforthesymbolsinisometricmode.Toactivatethisfield,youneed to specify the insertionpoint for the symbol in the isometricviewmode.Thevalue in thisfieldchangesaccordingtothepositionofthecursor.

NoteIn thePROPERTIES palette, the Isometric option in theOrientationdrop-down list, the Isoplanedrop-downlist,andtheRotationeditboxwillbeavailableonlywhenyouselectasuitableschematicsymboloforthoisometrictypefromtheDrawingFiledrop-downlistoftheSelectStyledialogbox.IDThis edit box is also available in theADVANCED >Design Data rollout in the PROPERTIESpalette.YoucanassignauniqueIDtothesymbolbeinginsertedinthedrawingarea.

Afterplacingasymbolinthedrawingarea,youcanchangetheorientationofthesymboldynamically.Figure9-5showsthe2PortPneumaticValvesymbolplacedintheisometricmodewithitsorientationhandles.Thehandlesdisplayedonthesymbolsarediscussednext.

Figure9-5The2PortPneumaticValvesymbolwithitsorientationhandles

RotationhandlesThesehandlesareusedtorotate thesymbol.Whenyouclickonahandle, thesymbol isrotatedwithrespecttotheinsertionpoint.

LocationhandleThishandleisusedtomodifythelocationofthesymbol.Whenyouclickonthishandleandmovethecursor,thesymbolmovesalongthecursorintheselectedisoplane.

MoveIsoplanehandleThishandleisusedtochangethelocationofthesymbolperpendiculartotheisoplaneselected.

IsometricPlanehandleThis handle is used to change the current isometric plane of the symbol. Click on this symbol toswitchbetweenLeft,Right,andTopplanes.

SchematicLineSchematic lines are used to represent various types of connections in a building system. To create aschematicline,choosetheSchematicLinetoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtospecifythestartpointfortheschematicline.Also,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-6.Click tospecify thestartpointof the line;youwillbeprompted tospecifythenextpointoftheschematicline.

Figure9-6ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheSchematicLinetool

Clicktospecifythesecondpointoftheline;youwillbeagainpromptedtospecifythenextpointoftheline.Click to specify the thirdpointorpressENTER toexit the tool.Except theLength editbox, theoptionsdisplayedinthePROPERTIESpaletteonchoosingtheSchematicLinetoolhavealreadybeendiscussed.

TheLengtheditboxisusedtospecifythelengthoftheschematicline.Youcannotmodifythevalueoflengthonceyouhavecreatedtheschematicline.Also,youcannotspecifythevalueoflengthdirectlyinthiseditbox.Tospecifyavalue in thiseditbox,youneed tospecify thedesiredvalue in thedynamicpromptdisplayedalongthecursorwhilecreatingtheschematicline.SchematicLineStylesWhilecreatingaschematicdiagram,youmightrequiretochangethestyleoftheschematiclines.Thestyleof schematic lines can be changed by using the Style Manager. To invoke the Style Manager formodifyingtheschematiclinestyle,choosetheSchematicLineStylestoolfromtheStyleManagerdrop-down in the Style & Display panel of theManage tab in theRibbon; the Style Manager will bedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-7.Selectalinestylefromthelistavailableontheleftinthedialogbox;theoptionsrelatedtothatlinestylewillbedisplayedontherightinthedialogbox,refertoFigure9-8.TheoptionsintheStyleManagerafterselectingalinestylearediscussednext.

Figure9-7TheStyleManagerwithschematiclinestyles

Figure9-8TheStyleManagerwithoptionsrelatedtoalinestyle

GeneralTabThistabisselectedbydefaultintheStyleManager,refertoFigure9-8.Theoptionsinthistabareusedtochangethegeneralsettingsforthelinestyle.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.NameThiseditboxisusedtochangethenameoftheschematiclinestyleselected.

DescriptionThiseditboxisusedtospecifythedescriptionabouttheselectedlinestyle.

KeynoteThiseditbox isused tospecifykeynotesfor theschematic linestyle.Youcanenter thedesiredkeynotes in the edit box or you can choose theSelectKeynote button next to the edit box to select akeynotefromthelistofpredefinedkeynotes.Onchoosingthisbutton,theSelectKeynotedialogboxwillbedisplayed,refertoFigure9-9.Tospecifyanypredefinedkeynote,openthedesiredcategorybyclickingontheplussignadjacenttothecategoryanddouble-clickonthedesiredkeynote;thenameoftheselectedkeynotewillbedisplayedintheKeynoteeditbox.

Figure9-9TheSelectKeynotedialogbox

ThedescriptionofthekeynoteisalsodisplayedintheeditboxavailablebelowtheKeynoteeditbox.NotesThisbuttonisusedtospecifynotesfortheselectedlinestyle.Tospecifythenotes,choosetheNotesbuttonfromthebottomoftheGeneraltab;theNotesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-10.Therearetwotabsavailableinthisdialogbox:NotesandReferenceDocs. In theNotes tab,youcanspecifynotesregardingthe linestyle in theeditboxdisplayedbelowit.Youcanalsoaddareferencedocumenttotheselectedlinestyle.Todoso,choosetheReferenceDocstab;refertoFigure9-11.ChoosetheAddbuttonfromthedialogbox;theSelectReferenceDocumentdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-12.

Figure9-10TheNotesdialogbox

Figure9-11TheNotesdialogboxwiththeReferenceDocstabchosen

Figure9-12TheSelectReferenceDocumentdialogbox

Browsetothedesiredlocation,selectthedocumenttobeattached,andchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;theReferenceDocumentdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-13.EnterthedescriptionaboutthedocumenttobeaddedintheDescriptioneditboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;theselectedfilewillbedisplayedinthelistofdocumentsintheNotesdialogbox.ChoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;theselectedfilewillbeaddedasnotefortheselectedlinestyle.YoucanaddmoredocumentsbychoosingtheAddbuttonfromtheNotesdialogbox.YoucaneditbychoosingtheEditbutton.Todeleteadocument,choosetheDeletebutton.

Figure9-13TheReferenceDocumentdialogbox

PropertySetsThisoptionisusedtospecifypropertysetdatafortheselectedstyle.Propertysetsaretheparametersthatcanbechangedforeachinstanceoftheobjectcreatedusingthespecificstyle.

DesignationsTabThe options in this tab are used to specify designations for the schematic lines, refer to Figure 9-14.Designationsareused tocreateuniqueIDsfor theschematic lines.Tospecifydesignations,choose theNewDesignation(ID)toolfromthetab;1willbedisplayedundertheIndexcolumnofthelist.Clickinthefieldcorresponding to1 in theDesignation(ID) columnandspecify thedesireddesignation in thefield. You can also create more than one designation for a schematic line by choosing the NewDesignation(ID)tool.

Figure9-14TheStyleManagerwiththeDesignationstabchosen

AnnotationTabTheoptionsinthistabareusedtomodifyannotationstyleforaschematicline,refertoFigure9-15.Theoptionsavailableinthistabarediscussednext.

Figure9-15TheStyleManagerwiththeAnnotationtabchosenCrossingsAreaThereare threebuttonsavailable in thisarea:DoNothing,OverlapGraphics, andBreakExistingLine.TheDoNothingbutton isused tocreate thecrossingat the intersectionpointof theschematiclines.TheOverlapGraphicsbuttonisusedtocreateanoverlappinggraphicattheintersectionpointoftheschematiclines.TheBreakExistingLinebuttonisusedtobreaktheexistinglineattheintersectionpoint.TheA-Break/OverlapPaperWidtheditbox,availableadjacenttotheBreakExistingLinebutton, is used to change the width of overlap or break. TheBreak/Overlap Priority edit box isavailablebelowtheA-Break/OverlapPaperWidtheditbox.Thiseditboxisusedtosetoverlaporbreakpriority.

ConnectionsAreaTheConnectionNodedrop-downlist inthisareaisusedtospecifythestyleofnodescreatedat theconnections.YoucanspecifythesizeofconnectionnodeinthePaperSizeeditbox.

Start&EndSettingsAreaTherearetwodrop-downlistsinthisarea:StartandEnd.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistsareusedtospecifytheshapenodescreatedatthestartandendoftheschematiclines.YoucanspecifythesizesofthenodesinthecorrespondingPaperSizeeditboxes.

DisplayPropertiesTab

Theoptionsinthistabareusedtomodifythedisplayrepresentationsofschematiclines,refertoFigure9-16.Therearevarioustemplatesfordisplayrepresentationsavailableinthistab.Youcanoverrideanyoftherepresentationsbyusingtheoptionsavailableinthistab.

Figure9-16TheStyleManagerwiththeDisplayPropertiestabchosenVersionHistoryTabTheoptionsinthistabareusedtorecordthehistoryoftheselectedlinestyle,refertoFigure9-17.Youcanchecktheversionsoftheselectedlinestylewiththedateofmodificationlistedatthebottomofthedialogbox.YoucanalsoremoveanyoftheversionsbyusingtheRemovebutton.

Figure9-17TheStyleManagerwiththeVersionHistorytabchosen

TherearesomecommontoolsavailableintheStyleManager tocreateoredit linestyles.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.NewDrawingThis tool isused toaddanewdrawing in theStyleManager.Youcanaddvarious line styles in thisdrawingbycopyingthem.OpenDrawingThis tool is used to add an existing drawing in the Style Manager. Various styles available in thedrawingareautomaticallyimportedintheStyleManager.CopyThistoolisusedtocopytheselectedlinestyle.Todoso,selectalinestylefromthelistattheleftintheStyleManagerandthenchoosetheCopytoolfromtheStyleManager;thestylewillbecopiedintheclipboard.PasteThistoolisusedtopastethelinestylecopiedfromthelistbyusingtheCopytool.Topastealinestyle,choosethePastetoolfromtheStyleManager;thelinestylewillbepastedintheselecteddrawing.

EditStyleThistoolisusedtoswitchtotheeditingmode.NewStyleThis tool is used to create a new line style. To do so, choose theNewStyle tool from the toolbar

displayedintheStyleManager;anewlinestylewillbecreatedandaddedinthelistwiththenameNewStyle.Also,youwillbepromptedtochangethenameofthestyle.TheoptionscorrespondingtothestylewillbedisplayedattherightintheStyleManager.SetFromThistoolisusedtosettheshapeofthestylebyusinganexistingdrawingfile.

PurgeStylesThistoolisusedtoremovetheunusedstylesfromthelistdisplayedintheStyleManager.Toremovestyles, select the styles to be removed and then choose the Purge Styles tool from the toolbar; theselectedstyleswillberemovedfromthelist.ToggleViewThis tool is used to togglebetween thedisplay styles available in theStyleManager. There are twodisplay styles available in theStyleManager:Display per category andDisplay per drawing. TheDisplayperdrawingdisplaystyleisselectedbydefaultintheStyleManager.Ifthisstyleisselected,thelinestylesaredisplayedasperthedrawings.IftheDisplaypercategorystyleisselected,thestyleswillbedisplayedaccordingtotheircategories.FilterStyleTypeThis tool is used to toggle between the display styles available in theStyleManager. If this tool ischosenthenthestylescorrespondingonlytotheselectedtypewillbedisplayed.InlineEditToggleThistoolisusedtotogglebetweenthesymbolicview/listandpropertiesofalinestyle.Onchoosingthistogglebutton,theoptionsintheStyleManagerwillgetmodified,asshowninFigure9-18.

Figure9-18TheViewertabdisplayedonchoosingtheInlineEditTogglebuttonfromtheStyleManager

Therearetwotabsintherightareaofthedialogbox,theViewertabandtheListtab.TheoptionsintheViewertabareusedtoviewthecurrentlinestyleinvariousorientations.OnchoosingtheList tab, theoptionsintheStyleManagerwillgetmodified,refertoFigure9-19.Also,theinformationregardingtheselectedlinestylewillbedisplayedinthistab.

Figure9-19TheListtabdisplayedonchoosingtheInlineEditTogglebuttonfromtheStyleManager

SchematicRepresentationofanExistingSystemYoucandisplaytheschematicrepresentationofanysystemcreatedinotherworkspaces.Todisplaytheschematic representation, open the desired file and then click on theLevel of Details button in theDrawingStatusBar;aflyoutwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-20.

Figure9-20TheflyoutdisplayedonchoosingtheLevelofDetailsbutton

ChoosetheMEPSchematicoptionfromtheflyout;thecurrentdrawingwillbedisplayedwithschematicrepresentations,refertoFigure9-21.

Figure9-21TheschematicrepresentationofanHVACsystem

TUTORIALTUTORIAL1Inthistutorial,youwillcreateaschematicdiagramofacomputerlab,refertoFigure9-22. (Expectedtime:30min)

Figure9-22Theschematicrepresentationofacomputerlab

Examinethemodeltodeterminetheschematicsymbolstobeadded.Thefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethistutorial:a.StartanewdrawinginSchematicworkspace.b.Addtheschematicsymbols.c.Changethesystemofthesymbols.d.Connectthesymbolswithschematiclines.

StartingaNewDrawingFileinSchematicWorkspace1.StartAutoCADMEP,anewdrawingfilewiththedefaultnameDrawing1isopened.2.ClickontheWorkspaceSwitchingbuttonintheApplicationStatusBar;aflyoutisdisplayed.3.ChoosetheSchematicoptionfromtheflyout;theSchematicworkspaceisactivated.

AddingSchematicSymbols1. Choose the Schematic Symbol tool from the Build panel of the Home tab in the Ribbon; thePROPERTIESpalette isdisplayed,asshowninFigure9-23.Also,youareprompted tospecify thelocationofthesymbol.

Figure9-23ThePROPERTIESpaletteafterchoosingtheSchematicSymboltool

2.Click in theStyle field of thePROPERTIES palette; theSelectStyle dialog box is displayed, as

showninFigure9-24.

3.SelecttheElectricalCommunications(Global)optionfromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlistandtheTelephone and Data option from the Category drop-down list; the Select Style dialog box ismodified,asshowninFigure9-25.

Figure9-25ThemodifiedSelectStyledialogbox

4.SelecttheTelephonePointsymbolfromthelistdisplayedinthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton;thesymbolgetsattachedtothecursor.

5.Clickinthedrawingareatoplacethesymbol;youarepromptedtospecifytherotationvalue.

6. Specify the value of rotation as 0 at the command prompt; the symbol is placed at the specifiedlocation.PressESCtoexitthetool.

7. Select the symbol from the drawing area and right-click; a shortcutmenu is displayed. Choose theArraytoolfromtheBasicModifyToolsflyout.

8.ChoosetheRectangularoptionfromthecommandbar;thepreviewofthearrayoftelephonepointsisdisplayed, refer to Figure 9-26.Also, theArrayCreation contextual tab is displayed, as shown inFigure9-27.

Figure9-26Thepreviewofthearrayoftelephonepoints

Figure9-27TheArrayCreationcontextualtab

9.Specifythevalue4intheColumnseditboxand3000intheBetweeneditboxintheColumnspanelofthecontextualtab;thepreviewofthearrayisdisplayed.

10.Specifythevalue2intheRowseditboxand3000 intheBetweeneditboxintheRowspanel; thepreviewofthearrayisdisplayed,asshowninFigure9-28.

11.ChoosetheCloseArraytoolfromtheClosepanelofthecontextualtab;thearrayoftelephonepointsiscreated.

12.Similarly, addother symbols according toFigure9-22.Thedrawingafter addingother symbols isdisplayed,refertoFigure9-29.

Figure9-28Thepreviewofarray

Figure9-29Thedrawingafteraddingothersymbols

Note1. Symbol for PC is available in the Equipment category of the Electrical Power (Global)drawingfileintheSelectStyledialogbox.

2. Symbol for 240v-110v Switched Socket Outlet is available in the Sockets category of theElectricalPower(Global)drawingfileintheSelectStyledialogbox.

3. Symbol for Inline Fuse Electrical is available in the Switches category of the ElectricalSchematic(Global)drawingintheSelectStyledialogbox.

ChangingtheSystemofSymbols

Now,youneedtochangethesystemofsymbolsavailableinthedrawingareaaspertheirapplication.1.SelectallthesymbolsofPC,240v-110vSwitchedSocketOutlet,andInlineFuseElectricalfromthedrawing; invoke the PROPERTIES palette, the PROPERTIES palette is displayed, as shown inFigure9-30.

2.SelecttheE-230VPower(230-PWR)optionfromtheSystemdrop-downlistintheSystemrolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteandselectZ-Schematics-GfromtheLayerdrop-downlistintheGeneralrollout.ThePROPERTIESpaletteafterspecifyingtheparametersisdisplayed,asshowninFigure9-31.Afterspecifyingproperties,pressESC.

Figure9-31ThePROPERTIESpaletteafterspecifyingtheparameters3. Similarly, select all the Telephone Points in the PROPERTIES palette, and then select the E-Telephone(TELEPHONE)optionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist.Also,selecttheZ-Schematics-GoptionfromtheLayerdrop-downlist.

ConnectingSymbolswithSchematicLineNow,youneedtoconnectalltheschematicsymbolswiththeirrelevantschematiclines.1. Choose the Schematic Line tool from the Build panel in the Home tab of the Ribbon; thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,asshowninFigure9-32.

Figure9-32ThePROPERTIESpaletteafterchoosingtheSchematicLinetool2.Select theE-230VPower(230-PWR)option from theSystemdrop-down list and theWire optionfromtheStyledrop-downlist.

3.ClickonSchematicEndConnectorofthePCatthetop-leftinthedrawing,refertoFigure9-33; theschematiclinegetsattachedtothecursor.

Figure9-33Theschematicendconnectortobeselected4.Move the cursor towards right and select theSchematicEndConnector of the 240v-110vSwitchedSocketOutletadjacenttotheselectedPC.Similarly,connecttheInlineFuseElectricalinthedrawingarea.

5.Similarly,connectrestofthesymbols,referto9-34.

Figure9-34ThedrawingafterconnectingallthesymbolsoftheElectricalPower(Global)andElectricalSchematic(Global)categories

6. Choose the Schematic Line tool again and select theE-Telephone (TELEPHONE) option fromSystemdrop-downlistinthePROPERTIESpalette;youarepromptedtospecifythestartpointoftheline.

7.ClickontheSchematicEndConnectoroftheTelephonepoint;theschematiclinegetsattachedtothecursor.

8.Connectallthetelephonepointswiththeschematiclines,asshowninFigure9-35.

Figure9-35Thedrawingafterconnectingallthetelephonepointswiththeschematiclines

SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:

1.Schematicsymbolsarethesymbolicrepresentationofphysicalobjectsrequiredinabuildingsystem.(T/F)

2.Whenyoudeletea schematic line inwhich the In-line symbolsareattached, the symbolsdonotgetdeletedwiththeline.(T/F)

3. The System drop-down list is available in the __________ rollout of the Design tab in thePROPERTIESpalette.

4.The__________handleisusedtomodifythelocationofthesymbol.5. Inwhich of the following drawing files, the 360Camera symbol is available in theSelect Styledialogbox?

(a)ElectricalCommunications(Global)(b)ElectricalLighting(Global)(c)MechanicalEquipment(Global)(d)ElectricalSchematic(Global)REVIEWQUESTIONSAnswerthefollowingquestions:1.TheOrthooptionisusedtoplacethesymbolsperpendiculartotheinsertionpoint.(T/F)2.ThestyleofschematiclinescanbechangedbyusingtheStyleManager.(T/F)3.The __________ option is used to select a schematic symbol from the list of symbols available inAutoCADMEP.

4.The__________optionintheLevelofDetailsflyoutisusedtodisplaytheschematicrepresentationofadrawing.

5.Inwhichofthefollowingdrawingfiles,theCardReadersymbolisavailableintheStyledialogbox?(a)ElectricalCommunications(Global)(b)ElectricalLighting(Global)(c)MechanicalEquipment(Global)(d)ElectricalSchematic(Global)EXERCISEEXERCISE1In thisexercise,youwillcreateaschematicdrawing,asshowninFigure9-36.Theschematic lineforconnectingthesymbolsshouldbeoftheE-230VPower(230-PWR)system.(Expectedtime:30min)

Figure9-36SchematicdrawingforExercise1

AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest1.T,2.F,3.System,4.Location,5.ElectricalCommunications(Global)

Chapter10

Project

LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthisproject,youwillbeableto:•Createaprojectfile•Addarchitecturaldrawingtotheproject•Addmechanicalsystemtotheproject•Addelectricalsystemtotheproject•Addpipingsystemtotheproject•Addplumbingsystemtotheproject

PROJECTIn thisproject,youwillcreatecompletesystemofa forgingplant.Figure10-1shows thearchitecturaldrawingsoftheplant.Figure10-2showstheHVACdrawingsoftheplant.Figure10-3showsthepipingdrawings of the plant. Figure 10-4 shows the electrical drawings of the plant. Table 10-1 shows theparametersrequiredforvariousdevices.(Expectedtime:4hr)

Figure10-1Architecturaldrawingsoftheplant

Figure10-2HVACdrawingsoftheplant

Figure10-3Pipingdrawingsoftheplant

Figure10-4Electricaldrawingsoftheplant

Table10-1Theparametersrequiredforvariousdevices

Thefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethisproject:1.Startanewprojectfile2.Createcategoriesintheproject3.Createlevelsintheproject4.Createarchitecturaldrawings

•Createarchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor•CreatewallsinthearchitecturaldrawingforgroundFloor•Changethedoorstyleinthearchitecturaldrawing•Createdoorsinthearchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor•Createwindowsinthearchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor•Createarchitecturaldrawingoffirstfloor•Createwallsinthearchitecturaldrawingforfirstfloor•Createdoorsinthearchitecturaldrawingoffirstfloor•Createwindowsinthearchitecturaldrawingoffirstfloor

5.CreateHVACdrawings•CreateHVACdrawingofgroundfloor•Importthearchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor•Addairterminalsinthearchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor•Createtheductlineofgroundfloor•Calculatetheductsizesofgroundfloor•Createreturnductforthegroundfloor•Createreturnductlineforthegroundfloor•Calculatetheductsizesofgroundfloor•CreateHVACdrawingoffirstfloor•Importthearchitecturaldrawingoffirstfloor•Addairterminalsinthearchitecturaldrawingoffirstfloor•Addductlinetothediffusers•Addairhandlingunit•Addreturngrillesinthearchitecturaldrawingoffirstfloor•Createreturnductlineforthefirstfloor•Calculatetheductsizesoffirstfloor

6.Createpipingdrawings•Createpipingdrawingofgroundfloor•Importthearchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor

•Addballvalvesinthearchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor•Addpipelineinthearchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor•Connectballvalveswiththepipeline•Createpipingdrawingoffirstfloor•Importthearchitecturaldrawingoffirstfloor•Addtankinthefirstfloor•Addpumpsinthefirstfloor•Addpipelineinthefirstfloor

7.Createelectricaldrawings•Createelectricaldrawingofgroundfloor•Importthearchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor•Add300x1200surfacetypelightstothedrawing•Addsocketstothedrawing•Add300x600recessedlightstothedrawing•Configuredevicesofgroundfloor•Createpanelofgroundfloor•Configurecircuitsofgroundfloor•Addwiresofgroundfloor•Calculateloadandwiresizesofgroundfloor•Addtransformerandemergencygeneratortothedrawingbasedontotalload•Createelectricaldrawingoffirstfloor•Importthearchitecturaldrawingoffirstfloor•Addlightsinthedrawingoffirstfloor•Addsocketsinthedrawingoffirstfloor•Configuredevicesoffirstfloor•Createpaneloffirstfloor•Configurecircuitsoffirstfloor•Addwiresoffirstfloor•Calculateloadsandwiresizesoffirstfloor

StartingaNewProjectFile1. StartAutoCADMEPby using theAutoCADMEP2015 -English (Global) icon displayed on yourdesktop.

2.ChooseNew>ProjectfromtheApplicationMenu;theProjectBrowserisdisplayed.3.Choose theNewProject button available at the bottom of theProject Browser; theAddProjectdialogboxisdisplayed.

4.EntertheprojectnameasForgingPlantintheProjectnamefield,0001intheProjectNumberfieldand other descriptions in their respective fields.Make sure that theCreate from template projectcheckboxisclear.

5.ChoosetheOKbutton;thenewlycreatedprojectfilenameisdisplayedintheleftpaneoftheProject

Browser,refertoFigure10-5.

Figure10-5TheProjectBrowser

6. Choose the Close button from the Project Browser; the PROJECT NAVIGATOR palette isdisplayedinthedrawingareaandthenewprojectgetsactivated.

CreatingCategoriesintheProjectNow,youneedtocategorizetheproject.1. To categorize a project, choose the Add Category tool from the bottom of the PROJECTNAVIGATORintheConstructstab;anewcategoryisaddedtotheConstructsnode.

2.SpecifythenameofthecategoryasArchitecturalandpressENTER.3.Similarly,addothercategoriesandnamethemasMechanical,Piping,andElectrical.CreatingLevelsintheProjectNow,youneedtocreatelevelsintheproject.1. To create levels, choose the Project tab from the PROJECT NAVIGATOR; the PROJECTNAVIGATORisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-6.

Figure10-6ThePROJECTNAVIGATORwiththeProjecttabchosen

2.ChoosetheEditLevelsbuttonfromtheLevelsrolloutofthePROJECTNAVIGATOR; theLevelsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-7.

Figure10-7TheLevelsdialogbox3.Enter3000intheFloortoFloorHeightcolumncorrespondingto1intheNamecolumn.

4.ChoosetheAddLevelbuttonontherightinthedialogbox;anewlevelisaddedwiththename2tothelistdisplayedinthedialogbox.

5.ChoosetheOKbuttoninthedialogboxtoexit.IfyougetamessageboxwiththemessagethatdoyouwantAutoCADMEPtoregenerateall theviewsinthisproject,asshowninFigure10-8,choosethe

Yesbuttonfromthemessagebox.

Figure10-8TheAutoCADMEPmessagebox

CreatingArchitecturalDrawingsNow,youneedtocreatearchitecturaldrawingsforthegroundfloorandfirstfloor.CreatingArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloor1.SelecttheArchitecturalcategoryfromtheConstructstabinthePROJECTNAVIGATORandthenchoosetheAddConstructbuttonavailableatthebottom;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-9.

Figure10-9TheAddConstructdialogbox

2.SelecttheOpenindrawingeditorcheckboxfromthebottomofthedialogbox.3.EnterGroundFloorArchitecturalintheNamefieldofthedialogbox.4.ClickintheDescriptionfield;theDescriptiondialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-10.

Figure10-10TheDescriptiondialogbox5.EnterthedescriptionasThisdrawingismeantforarchitecturalplanofthegroundfloorintheEditthedescriptioneditboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox.

6.Selectthecheckboxcorrespondingtolevel1intheDivisioncolumnintheAddConstructdialogbox.Also,makesurethattheOpenindrawingeditorcheckboxisselectedandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox; thedrawing isopened inAutoCADMEP.Also, theGroundFloorArchitecturaldrawingisdisplayedwithalockiconadjacenttoitinthePROJECTNAVIGATOR.

7. Choose the Workspace Switching option from the Drawing Status Bar and then choose theArchitectureoptionfromtheflyoutdisplayed;theArchitectureworkspaceisactivated.

CreatingWallsintheArchitecturalDrawing1.ChoosetheWalltoolfromtheWalldrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youareprompted tospecify thestartingpointof thewall.Also, thePROPERTIES palette isdisplayed,refertoFigure10-11.

2.Enter thebaseheight of thewall as4000,widthas254, and set theJustify option asRight in thePROPERTIESpalette.

3.Enterthecoordinates0,0,0atthecommandbarandpressENTERtospecifythestartpoint;arubberbandwallisdisplayedwithitsotherendattachedtothecursor.

4. Press F8 towork in theORTHOMODE and specify the horizontal length of thewall 18000 at thecommandbar.Next,pressENTER.

5. Move the cursor vertically upward and specify the value 18000 at the command bar. Next, pressENTER.

6.Movethecursortowardstheleftandspecifythevalue18000atthecommandbar.Next,pressENTER.7.EnterCat thecommandprompt tocreate the lastwall.Thedrawingdisplays thearchitecturalouterboundaryoftheplant,refertoFigure10-12.

Figure10-12Thearchitecturalouterboundaryoftheplant

8.Similarly,create thewalls inside theplant, as shown inFigure10-13.Fordimensionsof thewalls,refertoFigure10-1.

Figure10-13Thedrawingaftercreatingallwalls

ChangingtheDoorStyleintheArchitecturalDrawing1.ChoosetheStyleManagertoolfromtheStyle&DisplaypaneloftheManagetabintheRibbon;theStyleManagerisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-14.

Figure10-14TheStyleManager2.Clickontheplussignadjacent toArchitecturalObjectson the left in theStyleManager;a listofarchitecturalobjectsisdisplayedundertheArchitecturalObjectscategory.

3.ClickontheplussignadjacenttoDoorStyleinthelist;theStandarddoorstyleisdisplayedinthelist.4.SelecttheStandarddoorstyle; theoptionsrelatedtothedoorstylearedisplayedontherightintheStyleManager,refertoFigure10-15.

Figure10-15TheStyleManagerwithdoorstyleselected5.ChoosetheDesignRules tabintheStyleManager; theoptionsrelated to theshapeof thedooraredisplayed.

6. Select theRectangular option from thePredefined drop-down list of theShape area in theStyleManager.

7.SelecttheDoubleoptionfromtheDoorTypearea.

8.ChoosetheStandardSizestab;theoptionsrelatedtothesizeofdooraredisplayedontherightintheStyleManager.

9.ChoosetheAddNewStandardSizebuttonfromtheright in theStyleManager; theAddStandardSizedialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-16.

Figure10-16TheAddStandardSizedialogbox

10.EnterthedescriptionasInnerDoorintheDescriptioneditboxofthedialogbox.11.Specify thewidthandheight as1000 and3000 in the respective fields of thedialogbox and thenchoosetheOKbutton.

12.ChoosetheAddNewStandardSizebuttonagainandcreateadoorstylewithwidthandheightas4000and3500,respectively.SpecifyMainDoorintheDescriptioneditbox.

13.ChoosetheOKbuttontoexittheStyleManager.

CreatingDoorsintheArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloor1.ChoosetheDoortoolfromtheDoordrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointofthedoor.Also,thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-17.

Figure10-17ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheDoortool2.Selectthe1000X3000optionfromtheStandardsizesdrop-downlistintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.

3.SelecttheOffset/CenteroptionfromthePositionalongwalldrop-downlistintheLocation rolloutandspecify150intheAutomaticoffseteditbox.Clickinthedrawingarea;thedoorgetsattachedtothecursor.Addalltheinnerdoorswiththerespectivewalls,asshowninFigure10-18.PressENTERtoexitthetool.

Figure10-18Thedrawingafteraddinginnerdoors

4.Again, choose theDoor tool; you are prompted to select awall or grid.Also, thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.

5.Selectthe4000X3500optionfromtheStandardsizesdrop-downlistintheDimensionsrolloutandclickinthedrawing;thedoorgetsattachedtothecursor.

6.Clickonthewallstocreatemaindoors,refertoFigure10-19.

Figure10-19ThedrawingafteraddingmainandinnerdoorsCreatingWindowsintheArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloor1. Choose theWindow tool from theWindow drop-down in theBuild panel of theHome tab in theRibbon; you are prompted to select awall or a grid assembly.Also, thePROPERTIES palette isdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-20.

Figure10-20ThePROPERTIESpaletteonchoosingtheWindowtool2.ChoosetheOffset/CenteroptionfromthePositionalongwalldrop-downlistintheLocationrolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteandenter0 intheAutomaticoffseteditbox.Choose thewindowsize1010X1510fromtheStandardsizesdrop-downlistintheDimensionsrollout.Also,selectYesfromtheRelativetogriddrop-downlistintheLocationrollout.

3.Clickonthewallsofthegroundfloorarchitecturaldrawingandlocatethewindowsatthecenterofthewall,showninFigure10-21.

Figure10-21Thewallstobeselectedforaddingwindows

4.Savethedrawingandcloseit.

CreatingArchitecturalDrawingofFirstFloor1.SelecttheArchitecturalcategoryfromthePROJECTNAVIGATORandchoosetheAddConstructtoolfromthebottom;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.

2.SpecifythenameasFirstFloorArchitecturalintheNameeditboxofthedialogbox.3.ClickintheDescriptionfieldandspecifythedescriptionasThisdrawingismeantforarchitecturalplanofthefirstfloorinthedialogboxdisplayed.MakesurethattheOpenindrawingeditorcheckboxisselected.

4.Selectthecheckboxcorrespondingtolevel2intheDivisioncolumnoftheAddConstructdialogboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttontoexit;thedrawingisdisplayedinthedrawingeditor.MakesurethattheArchitectureoptionischosenintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.

CreatingWallsintheArchitecturalDrawing1.ChoosetheWalltoolfromtheWalldrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifythestartingpointofthewall.Also,thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.

2.Enter0,0,0atthecommandbartospecifythestartingpointofthewallandpressENTER.Movethecursorverticallyupwardandenter18000atthecommandprompt.

3.Movethecursortowardrightandthenenter8000atthecommandbar.4.Movethecursorverticallydownwardandthenenter9000atthecommandbar.5.Movethecursortowardrightandthenenter10000atthecommandbar.6.Move thecursorverticallydownwardandenter9000 at thecommandbar.EnterC at thecommandprompttocreatethelastwall.

Theouterboundaryofthefirstflooriscreated,refertoFigure10-22.Now,youneedtocreateroomsinthebuilding.

Figure10-22Outerboundaryofthefirstfloor

7.Similarly,usingtheWalltool,createtherooms,asshowninFigure10-23andfordimension,refertoFigure10-1.

Figure10-23Drawingoffirstflooraftercreatingrooms

CreatingDoorsintheArchitecturalDrawingoftheFirstFloor1.ChoosetheDoortoolfromtheDoordrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youarepromptedtoselectawalloragrid.Also,thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.

2. Specify width as 1500 in theWidth edit box and height as 3000 in theHeight edit box of theDimensionsrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.

3.SelecttheOffset/CenteroptionfromthePositionalongwalldrop-downlistintheLocation rolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.

4.Clickonawall;thedoorgetsattachedtothecursorandcanmovealongthewalls.5.Clickonthewallagain;thedoorisadded.Similarly,addrestofthedoors,refertoFigure10-24.

Figure10-24Drawingofthefirstflooraftercreatingdoors

CreatingWindowsintheArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloor1. Choose theWindow tool from theWindow drop-down in theBuild panel of theHome tab in theRibbon; you are prompted to select awall or a grid assembly.Also, thePROPERTIES palette isdisplayed.

2.SelecttheOffset/CenteroptionfromthePositionalongwalldrop-downlistoftheLocation rolloutinthePROPERTIESpaletteandthenselect thewindowsize1010X1510 fromtheStandardsizesdrop-downlistintheDimensionsrollout.

3.Clickonthewalls,asshowninFigure10-25,toaddwindows.

Figure10-25ThewallstobeselectedforaddingwindowsThedrawingafteraddingwindowsisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-26.

Figure10-26Thedrawingafteraddingwindows4.Savethedrawingandcloseit.CreatingHVACDrawingsNow, you need to createHVACdrawings for the building. For creatingHVACdrawings, you need toswitchtotheHVACworkspace.CreatingHVACDrawingoftheGroundFloor1.Select theMechanicalcategoryfromthePROJECTNAVIGATOR andchoose theAddConstructbuttonavailableatthebottom;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.

2.EnterthenameGroundFloorMechanicalintheNamefieldofthedialogbox.3.ClickintheDescriptionfield;theDescriptiondialogboxisdisplayed.

4.EnterthedescriptionasThisdrawingismeantforHVACplanofthegroundfloorandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox.

5.Selectthecheckboxcorrespondingtolevel1intheDivisioncolumnandmakesurethattheOpenindrawingeditorcheckbox isselected in theAddConstructdialogbox.Next,choose theOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;thedrawingisopened.Also,theGroundFloorMechanicaldrawingisdisplayedwithalockiconadjacenttoitinthePROJECTNAVIGATOR.

6.Click on theWorkspaceSwitching option in theDrawing StatusBar and then choose theHVACoptionfromtheflyoutdisplayed.

ImportingtheArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloorBeforeaddinganyHVACsystemto theproject,youneed to import thearchitecturalplanof thegroundfloor.

1.InthePROJECTNAVIGATOR,clickontheplussignadjacenttotheArchitecturalcategoryintheConstructstab;alistofarchitecturaldrawingsisdisplayed.

2. Select Ground Floor Architectural drawing from the list and drag it to the current drawing; thearchitecturaldrawingisattachedtothecurrentdrawingasanexternalreference.

AddingAirTerminalstotheArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloor1.Choose theAirTerminal tool from theEquipment panel of theHome tab in theRibbon; theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-27.

Figure10-27TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox2.Clickon the+ signadjacent to theDiffusers andchoose the600x600mmSquareFacedCeilingDiffuserpartfromtheParttabofthedialogbox;thepreviewofthediffuserisdisplayedontherightinthedialogbox.

3.Selectthe600x600mmSquarePlaqueFaceCeilingDiffuser-150mmNeckoptionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistatthebottomofthedialogbox.

4.Enterthevalue3200intheElevationeditbox.5.ChoosetheFlowtab;thedialogboxismodified,asshowninFigure10-28.

Figure10-28TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwiththeFlowtabchosen6.Specify8intheFlow(EachTerminal)editbox.7.Placethediffuserscenteredsymmetrically,asshowninFigure10-29.

Figure10-29Thedrawingafteraddingdiffusersintheouterarea

Now,youneedtoaddtheairterminalstotheoffices,havingaflowrateof2literperhour.8.Choose theAirTerminal tool from theEquipment panel of theHome tab in theRibbon; theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed.

9.Selectthe600x600mmSquareFacedCeilingDiffuserpartfromtheParttabofthedialogbox;thepreviewofthediffuserisdisplayedontherightinthedialogbox.

10.Selectthe600x600mmSquarePlaqueFaceCeilingDiffuser-150mmNeckoptionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistatthebottominthedialogbox.

11.Enterthevalue3200intheElevationeditbox.

12.ChoosetheFlowtabandspecifythevalueofflowas2intheFloweditboxofthedialogbox.13.Placethediffuserssuchthattheyarecenteredsymmetricallyintheoffices,refertoFigure10-30.

Figure10-30Thedrawingafteraddingdiffusersintheoffices

CreatingtheDuctLineofGroundFloor1.ChooseToolsfromtheToolsdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theTOOLPALETTESisdisplayed.

2.ChoosethePropertiesbuttononthetopleftintheTOOLPALETTES;aflyoutisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-31.

Figure10-31ThePropertiesflyoutoftheTOOLPALETTES

3.ChoosetheHVACoptionfromtheflyout,ifitisnotalreadychosen;thetoolsrelatedtoHVACsystemaredisplayedintheTOOLPALETTES,refertoFigure10-32.

Figure10-32TheTOOLPALETTES-HVAC4.Choosethe1-LinetoolfromtheTOOLPALETTES;youarepromptedtospecifythestartpointoftheduct.

5.Clickon theDuctEndConnector of the first duct at the top in theouter areaof theplant, refer toFigure10-33.

Figure10-33Theducttobeselectedforaddingductline6.Clickontheductadjacenttothepreviousonetoconnectittotheductline.Similarly,connectalltheotherductstotheductline,refertoFigure10-34.

Figure10-34TheductlinecreatedbetweentheouterductsToconnecttheductsatthesameelevation,youmightneedtoswitchtoisometricviews.

7.Connectalltheductsintheofficeareatotheductatthemiddleoftheductlineusingthe1-Line tool,refertoFigure10-35.

Figure10-35Addingofficeductstotheductline

8.Similarly,connectaduct line to themainduct lineforcalculating theductsizeand transforming theductlineintoductsofrequiredsizes,refertoFigure10-36.

Figure10-36Addingaductlineforloadcalculation

CalculatingtheDuctSizes

1.Select theduct linecreated for loadcalculations; theDuct contextual tab is displayed, as shown inFigure10-37.

Figure10-37TheDuctcontextualtab

2.ChoosetheCalculateDuctSizes tool fromtheCalculationspanelof theDuctcontextual tab in theRibbon;theDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-38.

Figure10-38TheDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogbox3.SelecttheRoundoptionfromthefirstdrop-downlistinthe2areaofthedialogbox.

4.ChoosetheStartbuttonfromthe4areaofthedialogbox;theChooseaPartdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-39andyouarepromptedtoselectasuitablepartfromthepartlistavailableattheleftinthedialogbox.

Figure10-39TheChooseaPartdialogboxNoteTheChooseaPartdialogboxwillbedisplayedduringtransitiononlywhenthereisanelevationorsizedifferencebetweenthetwomatingducts.5.SelectthedesiredpartfromtheleftareaofthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;thedesiredpartisaddedandtheChooseaPartdialogboxisdisplayedagain.

6.SelectthedesiredpartfromthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton.Repeattheproceduretillalltheparts are added; the success rateof theduct size isdisplayed in the5 areaof thedialogbox. If thesuccessrateisnot100%,thenthereisanerrorinthefittingsaddedtotheductline.

7.Tochecktheproblemsintheductline,choosetheViewEventLogbuttonfromthe5areaofthedialogbox;theEventLogdialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure10-40.Insuchcases,youneedtorearrangetheductsystem.TheductlineafterrearrangingisshowninFigure10-41.

Figure10-40TheEventLogdialogbox

Figure10-41Theductlineafterrearrangement

8.Again,selecttheductlinecreatedforcalculatingductsizesandchoosetheCalculateDuctSizestoolfromtheDuctcontextualtab;theDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogboxisdisplayed.

9.ChoosetheStartbuttonfromthe4areaofthedialogboxandaddthedesiredpartbyusingtheSelectaPartdialogbox; thesystemapplies thetransitionsautomaticallyandtheductsystemisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-42.

Figure10-42TheDuctsystemaftercalculatingductsizesandapplyingtransitionsCreatingReturnDuctfortheGroundFloor1.ChoosetheAirTerminaltoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHome tab intheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-43.

2.ClickontheplussignadjacenttoGrillesintheParttabofthedialogbox;variousgrillesavailableinAutoCADMEParedisplayed.

3.SelecttheReturnAirGrillespartfromthepartlist;previewofthepartsisdisplayedintherightinthedialogbox.

4.Selectthe75X625mmReturnAirGrilleoptionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.5.Enterthevalue3600intheElevationeditboxavailableatthebottom.6.ChoosetheFlowtabandspecifythevalue8intheFlow(EachTerminal)editbox.7.Addthereturngrilles,asshowninFigure10-44.

Figure10-44ThedrawingafteraddingthereturngrillesCreatingReturnDuctLinefortheGroundFloor1. Choose the1-Line tool from theBy Shape area of theTOOLPALETTES; you are prompted tospecifythestartpointoftheductline.

2.Clickonthereturngrillandcreatetheductline,refertoFigure10-45.

Figure10-45Thedrawingafterconnectingthereturngrilleswiththeductline

CalculatingtheDuctSizesforReturnGrillSystem1.Selectaductlineinthereturngrillsystem;theDuctcontextualtabisdisplayed.2. Choose theCalculateDuct Sizes tool from theCalculations panel in the contextual tab; theDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogboxisdisplayed.MakesurethatRound isselectedinthefirstdrop-downlistofthe2areainthedialogbox.

3.ChoosetheStarttoolfromthe4areaofthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthesuccessivedialogboxes;theductsizesarecalculatedandtransitionisappliedautomatically.

4.ChoosetheClosebuttonfromtheDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogboxtoexit.5.Savethedrawingandcloseit.CreatingMechanicalDrawingoftheFirstFloor1.Select theMechanicalcategoryfromthePROJECTNAVIGATOR andchoose theAddConstructbuttonavailableatthebottom;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.

2.EnterthenameFirstFloorMechanicalintheNamefieldofthedialogbox.

3.ClickintheDescriptionfield;theDescriptiondialogboxisdisplayed.

4.EnterthedescriptionasThisdrawingismeantformechanicalplanofthefirstfloorandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox.

5.Selectthecheckboxcorrespondingtolevel2intheDivisioncolumnintheAddConstructdialogboxandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;thedrawingisopened.Also,theFirstFloorMechanicaldrawingiconisdisplayedwithalocksignadjacenttoitinthePROJECTNAVIGATOR.

6.ClickontheWorkspaceSwitchingoptionintheApplicationStatusBarandchoosetheHVACoptionfromtheflyout.

ImportingtheArchitecturalDrawingoftheFirstFloorBeforeaddingamechanicalsystemtothisdrawing,youneedtofirstimportthearchitecturalplanofthefirstfloor.1.OpenthePROJECTNAVIGATORandthenclickontheplussignadjacenttoArchitecturalcategoryintheConstructstab;alistofarchitecturaldrawingsisdisplayed.

2. Select First Floor Architectural drawing from the list and drag it to the current drawing; thearchitecturaldrawingisattachedtothecurrentdrawingasanexternalreference.

AddingAirTerminalstotheArchitecturalDrawingoftheFirstFloor1.Choose theAirTerminal tool from theEquipment panel of theHome tab in theRibbon; theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed.

2.Select the600x600mmSquareFacedCeilingDiffuserpart from thePart tabof thedialogbox;previewofthediffuserisdisplayedintherightofthedialogbox.

3.Selectthe600x600mmSquarePlaqueFaceCeilingDiffuser-150mmNeckoptionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistatthebottomofthedialogbox.

4.Enterthevalue3200intheElevationeditbox.5.ChoosetheFlowtab;thedialogboxismodified,asshowninFigure10-46.

Figure10-46TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwiththeFlowtabchosen

6.Enterthevalueas4intheFloweditbox.7.Placethediffuserssuchthattheyarecenteredsymmetrically,asshowninFigure10-47.

Figure10-47ThedrawingafteraddingdiffusersNoteYoucanalsospecifytheElevationvalueintherespectiveeditboxoftheBASIC>LocationrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.

AddingDuctLinetotheDiffusers1. Choose the1-Line tool from theBy Shape area of theTOOLPALETTES; you are prompted tospecifythestartpointoftheductline.

2.ClickontheDuctEndConnectorsandconnecttheductstotheductline,refertoFigure10-48.

Figure10-48Thedrawingafteraddingtheductline

AddingAirHandlingUnit1.ChoosetheAirHandlertoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-49.Also,youarepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointfortheairhandlerunit.

2.ClickontheplussignadjacenttoPackagedAirHandlingUnitinthepartlist;thelistofairhandlingunitsisdisplayed.

3.SelectAirHandlingUnit-FloorMountedFrontDischargefromthelist;previewoftheairhandlingunitisdisplayedontherightinthedialogbox.

4.Setthevalueofelevationas3200intheElevationeditboxavailableinthebottomofthedialogboxandclickinthedrawingareatoplacetheairhandlingunit,refertoFigure10-50.

Figure10-50Thedrawingafterplacingtheairhandlingunit

5.Connectthediffuserswiththeairhandlingunit,refertoFigure10-51.

Figure10-51ThedrawingafterconnectingthediffuserstotheairhandlingunitAddingReturnGrillesintheArchitecturalDrawingofFirstFloor1.Choose theAirTerminal tool from theEquipment panel of theHome tab in theRibbon; theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed.Also,youarepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointoftheairterminal.

2.ClickontheplussignadjacenttoGrillesinthepartlistandthenchoosetheReturnAirGrillespartfrom the part list; the preview of the air grilles is displayed in the right of the dialog box, refer toFigure10-52.

3. Select the 75 x 625mmReturn AirGrille option from thePart Size Name drop-down list andspecifythevalueofelevation3600intheElevationeditbox.

4.ChoosetheFlowtabandspecifythevalueforflowas4intheFlow(EachTerminal)editbox.5.Addthereturngrilles,asshowninFigure10-53.

Figure10-53Thedrawingafteraddingreturngrilles

CreatingReturnDuctLinefortheFirstFloor1. Choose the1-Line tool from theBy Shape area of theTOOLPALETTES; you are prompted tospecifythestartpointoftheductline.

2.Clickonthereturngrillandcreatetheductline,refertoFigure10-54.

Figure10-54Thedrawingafteraddingductlinetothereturngrilles

CalculatingtheDuctSizes1.Selectaductlineinthediffusersystem;theDuctcontextualtabisdisplayed.2.ChoosetheCalculateDuctSizestoolfromtheCalculationspanelintheHometabintheribbon;theDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogboxisdisplayed.

3.ChoosetheStarttoolfromthe4areaofthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthesuccessivedialogboxes;theductsizesarecalculatedandtransitionisappliedautomatically.

4.Choose theOK button from the successiveChooseaPart dialog boxes and then choose theClosebuttonfromtheDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogbox;thetransitionsareappliedtotheductline,asshowninFigure10-55.

Figure10-55Thedrawingafterapplyingtransitionstothediffuserductline

5.Similarly,calculatetheductsizesoftheductlinecreatedforreturnduct.Ondoingso,thedrawingisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-56.

Figure10-56Thedrawingafterapplyingtransitionstothereturngrilleductline6.Savethedrawingandcloseit.CreatingPipingDrawingsNow,youneedtocreatepipingdrawingsinthebuilding.Tocreatepipingdrawings,youneedtoswitchtothePipingWorkspace.CreatingPipingDrawingoftheGroundFloor1.SelectthePipingcategoryfromthePROJECTNAVIGATORandchoosetheAddConstructbuttonavailableatthebottom;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.

2.EnterthenameGroundFloorPipingintheNamefieldofthedialogbox.3.ClickintheDescriptionfield;theDescriptiondialogboxisdisplayed.

4.EnterthedescriptionasThisdrawingismeantforpipingplanofthegroundfloorandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox.

5.Selectthecheckboxcorrespondingtothelevel1intheDivisioncolumnintheAddConstructdialogbox and choose theOK button; the drawing is opened. Also, the Ground Floor Piping drawing isdisplayedwithalockiconadjacenttoitinthePROJECTNAVIGATOR.

6.Clickon theWorkspaceSwitching option in theDrawingStatusBar and choose thePiping optionfromtheflyout.

ImportingtheArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloorBeforeaddinganymechanicalsystemintheproject,youneedtofirstimportthearchitecturalplanofthegroundfloor.1.OpenthePROJECTNAVIGATORandthenclickontheplussignadjacenttoArchitecturalcategoryintheConstructstab;alistofarchitecturaldrawingsisdisplayed.

2. Select Ground Floor Architectural drawing from the list and drag it into the current drawing; thearchitecturaldrawingisattachedtothecurrentdrawingasanexternalreference.

AddingBallValvesintheArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloor1.ChoosetheValvetoolfromtheEquipmentpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-57.

2.ClickontheplussignadjacenttoValvesundertheMechanicalnodeinthepartlistofthedialogbox;varioustypesofvalvesaredisplayedinthelist.

3. Select theBall Valve - Threaded - Nickel plated part from the list; the preview of the part isdisplayedintherightofthedialogbox,refertoFigure10-58.

Figure10-58TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwiththeballvalveselected4.Selectthe40mmBallvalve-Threaded-Nickelplated(‘A’=108‘B’=161‘C’=80)optionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.

5.Specifytheelevationvalueas1000intheElevationeditbox.6.Placetheballvalvessymmetrically,asshowninFigure10-59.

Figure10-59Thedrawingafteraddingballvalves

AddingPipeLineintheArchitecturalDrawingofGroundFloor1.ChoosethePipetoolfromthePipedrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon; thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-60.Also,youarepromptedtospecifythestartpointofthepipe.

Figure10-60ThePROPERTIESpaletteonchoosingthePipetool2.Selectthe40optionfromtheNominalSizedrop-downlist.

3.Select theYes option from theSpecify cut lengthdrop-down list; theCut length edit box is displayedbelowthedrop-downlist.

4.Specify6000intheCutlengtheditbox.5.Clickinthedrawingareaanddrawthepipeline,asshowninFigure10-61.

Figure10-61Thedrawingafterdrawingthepipeline

ConnectingBallValveswiththePipeLine1.Clickontheballvalveattheleftendofthebottomrow;thevalveisdisplayedwithplussigns,refertoFigure10-62.

Figure10-62Theballvalvewithplussigns2.Clickon theplus sign, refer toFigure10-62andconnect theball valvewith thepipe line, refer toFigure10-63.

Figure10-63Theballvalveafterconnectingtothepipeline

3.Similarly,connectalltheballvalvestothepipeline,refertoFigure10-64.

Figure10-64Pipingsystemafterconnectingalltheballvalvestothepipeline4.Selecttheelbowatthebottomleftcornerofthedrawingandthenclickontheplussigndisplayedon

theelbow,asshowninFigure10-65;theelbowtransformsintoatee.

Figure10-65Theplussigntobeselected5.Movethecursorhorizontallytowardstheleftandspecify1000atthecommandbarandpressENTER.PressENTERagaintoexitthetool.

6.Savethedrawingandcloseit.

CreatingPipingDrawingoftheFirstFloor1.SelectthePipingcategoryfromthePROJECTNAVIGATORandchoosetheAddConstructbuttonavailableatthebottom;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.

2.EnterFirstFloorPipingintheNamefieldofthedialogbox.3.ClickintheDescriptionfield;theDescriptiondialogboxisdisplayed.

4. Enter the description This drawing is meant for piping plan of the first floor in the Edit theDescriptioneditboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox.

5.Selectthecheckboxcorrespondingtothelevel2intheDivisioncolumnoftheAddConstructdialogboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;thedrawingisopenedinAutoCADMEP.Also,the First Floor Piping drawing is displayed with a lock icon adjacent to it in the PROJECTNAVIGATOR.

6.ClickontheWorkspaceSwitchingoptionintheDrawingStatusBarandthenchoosethePipingoptionfromtheflyoutdisplayed;thePipingworkspacegetsactivated.

ImportingtheArchitecturalDrawingoftheFirstFloorBeforeaddinganypipingsystemtotheproject,firstyouneedtoimportthearchitecturalplanofthefirstfloor.1.OpenthePROJECTNAVIGATORandthenclickontheplussignadjacenttoArchitecturalcategoryintheConstructstab;alistofarchitecturaldrawingsisdisplayed.

2. Select the First Floor Architectural Drawing from the list and drag it to the current drawing; thearchitecturaldrawingisattachedtothecurrentdrawingasanexternalreference.

AddingTankintheFirstFloor1.ChoosetheTanktoolfromtheEquipmentpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-66.

Figure10-66TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox2.SelecttheHorizontalStorageTankspartfromthepartlist;thepreviewofthetankisdisplayedontherightinthedialogbox.

3.Selectthe1300LiterHorizontalStorageTankoptionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistandspecifythevalueofelevation0intheElevationeditbox.

4.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifytheinsertionpointofthetank,refertoFigure10-67.

Figure10-67Thedrawingafteraddingthetank

AddingPumpsintheFirstFloor1.ChoosethePumpstoolfromtheEquipmentpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed.

2.SelecttheHorizontalSplitCasePumpspartfromthepartlistavailableattheleftofthedialogbox;thepreviewofthepumpisdisplayedintherightofthedialogbox.

3.Selectthe1200x600mmHorizontalSplitCasepumpoptionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist and specify the value of elevation as0 in theElevation edit box available at the bottomof thedialogbox.

4.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifytheinsertionpointforthepump,refertoFigure10-68.

Figure10-68Thedrawingafteraddingpump

AddingPipeLineintheFirstFloor1.Selectthetankinthedrawingarea;plussignsaredisplayedonthetank.2.Clickontheplussignattherightofthetank;arubberbandpipegetsattachedtothecursor,refertoFigure10-69.

Figure10-69Therubberbandpipeattachedtothecursor

3.ClickontheadjacentPipeEndConnectorofthepump;theChooseaPartdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-70.

Figure10-70TheChooseaPartdialogbox

NoteTheChooseaPart dialog boxwill be displayed onlywhen there is an elevation or size differencebetweenthetwojoiningequipments.

4.Choose theOKbutton from thedialogboxesdisplayedsuccessivelyand thenpressENTER;apipelineiscreatedbetweenthetankandthepump.

5.Similarly,createthepipelineontheotherendconnectors,asshowninFigure10-71.

Figure10-71Thedrawingafteraddingpipelines6.Savethedrawingandcloseit.

CreatingElectricalDrawingsNow, you need to create electrical drawings of the building. To do so, switch to the Electricalworkspace.CreatingElectricalDrawingoftheGroundFloor1. Select theElectrical category from thePROJECTNAVIGATOR and choose theAdd Constructbuttonavailableatthebottom;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.

2.EnterGroundFloorElectricalintheNamefieldofthedialogbox.3.ClickintheDescriptionfield;theDescriptiondialogboxisdisplayed.

4.EnterthedescriptionThisdrawingismeantforelectricalplanofthegroundfloor intheEdit theDescriptioneditboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox.

5.Selectthecheckboxcorrespondingtothelevel0intheDivisioncolumnintheAddConstructdialogboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;thedrawingisopenedinAutoCADMEP.Also,theGroundFloorElectrical drawing is displayedwith a lock icon adjacent to it in thePROJECTNAVIGATOR.

6.ClickontheWorkspaceSwitchingoptionintheDrawingStatusBarandselecttheElectricaloptionfromtheflyout.

ImportingtheArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloor

Beforeaddinganyelectricalsystemintheproject,youneedtoimportthearchitecturalplanofthegroundfloor.1.OpenthePROJECTNAVIGATORandthenclickontheplussignadjacenttoArchitecturalcategoryintheConstructstab;alistofarchitecturaldrawingsisdisplayed.

2. Select theGroundFloorArchitectural drawing from the list and drag it to the current drawing; thearchitecturaldrawingisattachedtothecurrentdrawingasanexternalreference.

Adding300X1200SurfaceTypeALightstotheDrawingNow,youneedtoaddlightstothedrawing.1. Choose theDevice tool from theBuild panel of theHome tab in theRibbon; thePROPERTIESpaletteismodified,refertoFigure10-72.

Figure10-72ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheDevicetool

2.ClickintheStylefieldofthePROPERTIESpalette;theSelectStyledialogboxisdisplayed.3.SelecttheLightingFluorescent(Global)optionfromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlist;thelightstylesavailableinAutoCADMEParedisplayed.

4.Selectthe300X1200SurfaceTypeALightoptionfromthelightstylesandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;thelightgetsattachedtothecursor.

5.Placethelightsinthedrawing,asshowninFigure10-73.

Figure10-73ThedrawingafteraddinglightsAddingSocketstotheDrawingNow,youneedtoaddsocketstothedrawing.1.ChoosetheDevicetoolfromtheBuildpanel;thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.

2.ClickintheStylefieldofthePROPERTIESpalette;theSelectStyledialogboxisdisplayed.3.Select theSockets (Global) option from theDrawingfile drop-down list; various styles of socketsavailableinAutoCADMEParedisplayedinthedialogbox.

4. Select theSingle Pole SwitchedOutlet socket style from the dialog box and then choose theOKbutton;thesocketgetsattachedtothecursor.

5.Placethesocketsalongthewall,asshowninFigure10-74.

Figure10-74Thedrawingafteraddingsockets

Adding300x600RecessedLightstotheDrawingNow,youneedtoaddlightstothedrawing.1.ChoosetheDevicetoolfromtheBuildpanel;thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.

2.ClickintheStylefieldofthePROPERTIESpalette;theSelectStyledialogboxisdisplayed.3.SelecttheLightingFluorescent(Global)optionfromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlist;variousstylesoflightsavailableinAutoCADMEParedisplayedinthedialogbox.

4.Selectthe300x600RecessedLightsstylefromthedialogboxandthenchoosetheOKbutton;thelightgetsattachedtothecursor.

5.Placethelightsinthecenteroftheinnerareaofthegroundfloor,refertoFigure10-75.

Figure10-75ThedrawingafteraddinglightsinthecenteroftheinnerareaConfiguringDevices1.SelectasocketfromthedrawingareaandthenselecttheSelectSimilaroptionfromtheSelectSimilardrop-downlistintheDevicecontextualtabdisplayed;allthesocketsavailableinthedrawingareaareselected.

2.Clickon theElectricalproperties field in theAdvanced rollout of thePROPERTIES palette; theElectricalPropertiesdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-76.Nowinthisdialogbox,youneedtospecifytheparametersthataregiveninTable10-1.

Figure10-76TheElectricalPropertiesdialogbox3.Selectthe230VPoweroptionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist.4.Specifythevalue300intheLoadPhase1editbox,refertoTable10-1.

5.Selectthe230optionfromtheVoltagedrop-downlist.6.Similarly,selectthe1optionfromtheNumberofPolesdrop-downlist.7.Enter thevalueofmaximumovercurrent ratingas10 in theMaximumOvercurrentRating (amps)editbox.

8.Specifythevalueas0.8inthePowerFactoreditbox.ChoosetheOKbuttontoexitthedialogbox.

9.Similarly,specifytheparametersforotherdevicesintheElectricalPropertiesdialogboxbyusingthestepsdiscussedabove.Forparameters,refertoTable10-1.

CreatingPanelAll the devices are connected to circuits. These circuits are joined to a panel for electricity supply.

Therefore,youneedtocreateapanelwithcircuitsinthissection.

1.ChoosethePaneltoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifyaninsertionpointforthepanelandthePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-77.SelecttheSurfaceDoor3stylefromtheStylefieldinthePROPERTIESpalette.

Figure10-77ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingthePaneltool2.ClickintheNameeditboxintheADVANCED>DesignDatarolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteandspecifythenameasMainPanel.

3.Specifythevalue800intheRatingeditbox.4.Selectthe230optionfromtheVoltagephase-to-neutraldrop-downlist.5.Selectthe240optionfromtheVoltagephase-to-phasedrop-downlist.6.SpecifyMaintypeasMaincircuitbreaker,Mainsize(amps)as15,Designcapacity(amps)as20,andAICratingas800inthePROPERTIESpalette.

Now,youneedtocreatecircuitsforthepanel.7. Click in theCircuit Settings field under ADVANCED > Circuits rollout of the PROPERTIESpalette;theCircuitSettingsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-78.

Figure10-78TheCircuitSettingsdialogbox8.Setthevalueas2intheTotalnumberofslotsandNumberof1-polecircuitsspinnersandselectthe230 option from the Voltage drop-down list adjacent to the spinner. Make sure that Power andLighting isselectedintheSystemTypedrop-downlistand230VPower isselected in theSystemdrop-downlist.

9.ChoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogboxtoexit.10.SelecttheYesoptionfromtheCreateCircuitdrop-downlistintheAdvancedrollout.Clickinthedrawingareatoplacethepanel,refertoFigure10-79.Also,theAutoCADMEP-ElectricalProjectDatabasedialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure10-80.

Figure10-79Thedrawingwiththepanelplaced

Figure10-80TheAutoCADMEP-ElectricalProjectDatabasedialogbox

11. Choose theCreate a new EPD file option from the dialog box and save the file at the desiredlocationwiththenamelight_panel;thepaneliscreatedatthespecifiedlocation.

12.Asexplainedinprevioussteps,place theotherpanelfor230VPower(230VPOWER)systemandrenameitasSocketsPanel,refertoFigure10-81.

Figure10-81Thedrawingwithotherpanelfor230VpoweraddedConfiguringCircuits1.Select thepanel thatwas created first and then choose theCircuitManager tool from theCircuitspanel in thePanel contextual tab of theRibbon; theCIRCUITMANAGER is displayed, refer toFigure10-82.

Figure10-82TheCIRCUITMANAGER2.SpecifythenameOuterLightsinthefield1oftheNamecolumnintheCIRCUITMANAGER.3.SpecifythenameInnerLightsinthefield2oftheNamecolumnintheCIRCUITMANAGER.4.ClickontheplussignadjacenttoSocketspanelontheleftintheCIRCUITMANAGER; thelistofcircuitsavailableinthepanelisdisplayedbelowit.

5.SelectPowerandLightingfromtheleftoftheCIRCUITMANAGER;thelistofcircuitsisdisplayedontheright.

6.Double-clickon1undertheNamepanelandspecifythenameasSockets.7.Double-clickintheVoltagefieldforSocketsandselectthe230optionfromthedrop-downlist.8.Selectthe230VPoweroptionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist.9.ClosetheCIRCUITMANAGERdialogbox.AddingWires1.ChoosetheWiretoolfromtheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifythe start point of the wire for an electrical device and thePROPERTIES palette is displayed, asshowninFigure10-83.

Figure10-83ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheWiretool2.Selectthe230VPower(230VPOWER)optionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist.3.SelectthePVCSingleoptionfromtheStyledrop-downlistundertheGeneralRollout.

4.Connectallthesocketsusingwires,refertoFigure10-84.MakesurethattheLineoptionisselectedintheSegmentdrop-downlist.

Figure10-84Thedrawingafterconnectingsocketsusingwires5.Similarly,connectallthelightstotheotherpanelusingthe230VLightingsystem,refertoFigure10-85.MakesurethatthecircuitselectedforinnerlightsisInnerLightsandforouterlightsisOuterLights.

Figure10-85ThedrawingafteraddingwirestolightsCalculatingLoadandWireSizesNow,youneedtocalculatethetotalloadoftheelectricalsystemandthewiresize.1.Choose thePowerTotals tool from theElectrical panel in theAnalyze tabof theRibbon; you arepromptedtoselectthedevices.

Figure10-86ThePowerTotalsdialogboxThetotalloadisdisplayedintheTotalLoadfieldofthedialogbox.Now,youneedtocalculatethewiresizeofthecircuit.

3. To calculate wire size, select all the wires in the drawing area; the PROPERTIES palette isdisplayed.

4. Click on the Calculate sizes for the wire button available on the right of the ADVANCED >DimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette;thewiresizesaredisplayedintheHotsize,Neutralsize,andGroundsizeeditboxesintheDimensionsrollout.

AddingTransformerandEmergencyGeneratorAfter making calculations, the total load of the ground floor comes out to be approximately 7.3kVa.Assumingthesamecapacityforfirstfloorandconsideringthepeakloadcondition,youneedtoplaceatransformerandageneratorofcapacity15kVainthedrawingarea.1.ChoosetheEquipmenttoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure10-87.

2.ClickontheplussignadjacenttoElectricalinthepartlistavailableattheleftofthedialogbox;theelectricalequipmentaredisplayedbelowit.

3. Click on the plus sign adjacent toPowerTransformers in the part list and select theDry TypeTransformer-3-150kVapart;thepreviewofthetransformerisdisplayed,refertoFigure10-87.

4.Selectthe15kVaDryTypeTransformeroptionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistavailableatthebottominthedialogboxandplacethetransformeratanappropriatedistancefromthebuildingintheouterarea,refertoFigure10-88.

Figure10-88Thedrawingafterplacingatransformer5.Similarly,placetheemergencygeneratorhavingthecorrespondingcapacityinthedrawingadjacenttothepowertransformer.

6.Connectthetransformerandemergencygeneratorwiththepanels,refertoFigure10-89.

Figure10-89ThedrawingafterconnectingtransformerandgeneratortothecircuitCreatingElectricalDrawingoftheFirstFloor1. Select theElectrical category from thePROJECTNAVIGATOR and choose theAdd Constructbuttonavailableatthebottom;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.

2.ClickintheNamefieldofthedialogboxandenterthenameasFirstFloorElectrical.3.ClickintheDescriptionfield;theDescriptiondialogboxisdisplayed.

4.EnterthedescriptionThisdrawingismeantforelectricalplanofthefirstfloorandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox.

5.Selectthecheckboxcorrespondingtolevel1intheDivisioncolumnoftheAddConstructdialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton; thedrawingisopenedinAutoCADMEP.Also, theFirstFloorElectricaldrawingisdisplayedwithalockiconadjacenttoitinthePROJECTNAVIGATOR.

6.ClickontheWorkspaceSwitchingoptionoftheDrawingStatusBarandchoosetheElectricaloptionfromtheflyout.

ImportingtheArchitecturalDrawingoftheFirstFloor

Beforeaddinganymechanicalsystemtotheproject,youneedtofirstimportthearchitecturalplanofthefirstfloor.1.OpenthePROJECTNAVIGATORandthenclickontheplussignadjacenttoArchitecturalcategoryintheConstructstab;thelistofarchitecturaldrawingsisdisplayed.

2. Select First Floor Architectural drawing from the list and drag it to the current drawing; thearchitecturaldrawingisattachedtothecurrentdrawingasanexternalreference.

AddingLightsintheDrawingNow,youneedtoaddlightstothedrawing.1. Choose theDevice tool from theBuild panel of theHome tab in theRibbon; thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,refertoFigure10-90.

Figure10-90ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheDevicetool2.ClickintheStylefieldofthePROPERTIESpalette;theSelectStyledialogboxisdisplayed.3.SelecttheLightingFluorescent(Global)optionfromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlist;thelightstylesavailableinAutoCADMEParedisplayed.

4. Select the 300X600RecessedLight from the light styles and then choose theOK button from thedialogbox;thelightsymbolgetsattachedtothecursor.

5.Placethreeequidistantlightsineachroominthedrawing,refertoFigure10-91.

Figure10-91ThedrawingafteraddinglightsandsocketsAddingSocketsintheDrawingNow,youneedtoaddsocketstothedrawing.

1.ChoosetheDevicetoolfromtheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheribbon;thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.

2.ClickintheStylefieldofthePROPERTIESpalette;theSelectStyledialogboxisdisplayed.3.Select theSockets (Global) option from theDrawingfile drop-down list; various styles of socketsavailableinAutoCADMEParedisplayedinthedialogbox.

4. Select theSingle Pole SwitchedOutlet socket style from the dialog box and then choose theOKbutton;thesocketsymbolgetsattachedtothecursor.

5.Placethesocketsalongthewall,refertoFigure10-91.

ConfiguringDevices1.SelectasocketfromthedrawingareaandthenselecttheSelectSimilaroptionfromtheSelectSimilardrop-downlistintheDevicecontextualtabdisplayed;allthesocketsavailableinthedrawingareaareselected.

2. Click in theElectrical properties field in theCircuits rollout of the PROPERTIES palette; theElectricalPropertiesdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-92.

Figure10-92TheElectricalPropertiesdialogbox

Now,youneedtospecifytheparametersthataregiveninTable10-1.3.Selectthe230VPoweroptionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist.4.Specifythevalue300intheLoadPhase1editbox,refertoTable10-1.

5.Selectthe230optionfromtheVoltagedrop-downlist.6.Similarly,selectthe1optionfromtheNumberofPolesdrop-downlistinthedialogbox.7.Specifythevalueofmaximumovercurrentrating10intheMaximumOvercurrentRating(amps)editboxinthedialogbox.

8.Specifythevalueas0.8inthePowerFactoreditboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttontoexitthedialogbox.

9.Similarly,specifytheparametersforotherdevicesintheElectricalPropertiesdialogboxbyusingthestepsdiscussedabove.Forparameters,refertoTable10-1.

CreatingPanelAsdiscussedearlier,all thedevicesareconnected tocircuits.Thesecircuitsare joined toapanel forelectricitysupply.So,youneedtocreateapanelwithcircuitsinthissection.

1.ChoosethePaneltoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifyaninsertionpointforthepanelandthePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-93.SelecttheSurfaceDoor3stylefromtheStylefieldinthePROPERTIESpalette.

Figure10-93ThePROPERTIESpalette2.ClickintheNameeditboxoftheADVANCED>DesignDatarolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteandspecifythenameasPanel1.

3.Specifythevalue800intheRatingeditbox.4.Selectthe230optionfromtheVoltagephase-to-neutraldrop-downlist.

5.Selectthe240optionfromtheVoltagephase-to-phasedrop-downlist.6.SpecifyMaintype asMain circuitbreaker,Main size (amps) as15,Design capacity (amps) as20,andAICratingas800intheADVANCED>DesignDatarolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.

Now,youneedtocreatecircuitsforthepanel.

7.Click in theCircuitSettings field in thePROPERTIESpalette; theCircuitSettings dialog box isdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-94.

8.Setthevalueas2intheTotalnumberofslotsandNumberof1-polecircuitsspinnersandselectthe230 option from the Voltage drop-down list adjacent to the spinner. Make sure that Power andLighting isselectedintheSystemTypedrop-downlistand230VPower isselected in theSystemdrop-downlist.

9.ChoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogboxtoexit.SelecttheYesoptionfromtheCreatecircuitsdrop-downlistintheCircuitsrollout.

10. Click in the drawing area to place the panel, refer to Figure 10-95. Also, theAutoCADMEP -

ElectricalProjectDatabasedialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure10-96.

Figure10-95Thedrawingwiththepaneltobeadded

Figure10-96TheAutoCADMEP-ElectricalProjectDatabasedialogbox11. Choose theCreate a new EPD file option from the dialog box and save the file at the desiredlocationwiththenametop_panel;thepaneliscreatedatthespecifiedlocation.

ConfiguringCircuits1.SelectthepanelcreatedandthenchoosetheCircuitManagertoolfromtheCircuitspanelinthePaneltaboftheRibbon;theCIRCUITMANAGERisdisplayed.

2. Click in the field 1 in theName column of theCIRCUITMANAGER and specify the name asSockets.

3.Clickinthefield2intheNamecolumnoftheCIRCUITMANAGERandspecifythenameasLights.4. Double-click in theVoltage field for Sockets and select the 230 option from the drop-down listdisplayed.

5.Double-clickintheSystemfieldforthecircuitandselectthe230VPoweroptionfromthedrop-downlistdisplayed.

6.Double-clickintheSystemfieldforLightsandselectthe230VLightingoptionfromthedrop-downlistdisplayed.

7. Double-click in the Voltage field for Lights and select the 230 option from the drop-down listdisplayed.

TheCIRCUITMANAGERafterapplyingtheaboveconfigurationisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-97.

Figure10-97TheCIRCUITMANAGERafterapplyingconfiguration

AddingWires1.ChoosetheWiretoolfromtheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifythestartpointofthewireonanelectricaldeviceandthePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-98.

Figure10-98ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheWiretool2.Selectthe230VPower(230VPOWER)optionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist.3.SelectthePVCSingleoptionfromtheStyledrop-downlist.

4.Connectallthesocketstothepanelusingwire,refertoFigure10-99.MakesurethattheLineoptionisselectedintheSegmentdrop-downlist.

Figure10-99Thedrawingafteraddingallthesocketswiththepanel

5.Similarly,connectall the lights to thepanelusing the230VLightingsystem, refer toFigure10-100.MakesurethatthecircuitselectedforlightsisLights.

Figure10-100Thedrawingafteraddinglightstothepanel

CalculatingLoadsandWireSizes1.Choose thePowerTotals tool from theElectrical panel in theAnalyze tabof theRibbon; you arepromptedtoselectthedevices.

Figure10-101ThePowerTotalsdialogboxThetotalloadisdisplayedintheTotalLoadfieldofthedialogbox.Now,youneedtocalculatethewiresizeforthecircuit.

3. To calculate wire size, select all the wires in the drawing area; the PROPERTIES palette isdisplayed.

4. Choose the Calculate sizes for the wire button available at the right of the ADVANCED >Dimensions rolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette; thecalculatedwiresizesaredisplayed in theHotsize,Neutralsize,andGroundsizeeditboxesintheDimensionsrollout.

5.Saveandclosethedrawing.

OtherPublicationsbyCADCIMTechnologiesThe following is the list of some of the publications by CADCIM Technologies. Please visitwww.cadcim.comforthecompletelisting.ANSYSTextbooks•ANSYSWorkbench14.0:ATutorialApproach•ANSYS11.0forDesignersAutodeskInventorTextbooks•AutodeskInventor2015forDesigners,15thEdition•AutodeskInventor2014forDesigners•AutodeskInventor2013forDesigners•AutodeskInventor2012forDesignersSolidEdgeTextbooks•SolidEdgeST6forDesigners,11thEdition•SolidEdgeST5forDesigners•SolidEdgeST4forDesignersNXTextbooks•NX9.0forDesigners,13thEdition•NX8.5forDesigners•NX8forDesigners•NX7forDesignersAutoCADTextbooks•AutoCAD2015:AProblemSolvingApproach,BasicandIntermediate,21stEdition•AutoCAD2015:AProblemSolvingApproach,3DandAdvanced,21stEditionAutoCADMEPTextbooks•AutoCADMEP2014forDesignersSolidWorksTextbooks•SolidWorks2014forDesigners,12thEdition•SolidWorks2014:ATutorialApproach•SolidWorks2013forDesigners•SolidWorks2012:ATutorialApproach•SolidWorks2012forDesigners•LearningSolidWorks2011:AProjectbasedApproachCATIATextbooks

•CATIAV5-6R2013forDesigners,11thEdition•CATIAV5-6R2012forDesigners•CATIAV-5R21forDesigners•CATIAV-5R20forDesignersCreoParametricandPro/ENGINEERTextbooks•CreoParametric2.0forDesigners•CreoParametric1.0forDesigners•Pro/ENGINEERWildfire5.0forDesigners•Pro/ENGINEERWildfire4.0forDesignersAutodeskAliasTextbooks•LearningAutodeskAliasDesign2015,3rdEdition•LearningAutodeskAliasDesign2012•LearningAutodeskAliasDesign2010AutoCADLTTextbooks•AutoCADLT2014forDesigners•AutoCADLT2013forDesignersAutoCADElectricalTextbooks•AutoCADElectrical2014forElectricalControlDesigners•AutoCADElectrical2013forElectricalControlDesignersEdgeCAMTextbooks•EdgeCAM11.0forManufacturersAutodeskRevitArchitectureTextbooks•AutodeskRevitArchitecture2015forArchitectsandDesigners,11thEdition•AutodeskRevitArchitecture2014forArchitectsandDesigners•AutodeskRevitArchitecture2013forArchitectsandDesigners•AutodeskRevitArchitecture2012forArchitectsandDesignersAutodeskRevitStructureTextbooks•ExploringAutodeskRevitStructure2015,5thEdition•ExploringAutodeskRevitStructure2014•ExploringAutodeskRevitStructure2013•ExploringAutodeskRevitStructure2012AutoCADCivil3DTextbooks•ExploringAutoCADCivil3D2015,5thEdition•ExploringAutoCADCivil3D2014•ExploringAutoCADCivil3D2013•AutoCADCivil3D2012

AutoCADMap3DTextbooks•ExploringAutoCADMap3D2015,5thEdition•ExploringAutoCADMap3D2014•ExploringAutoCADMap3D20133dsMaxDesignTextbooks•Autodesk3dsMaxDesign2015:ATutorialApproach,15thEdition•Autodesk3dsMaxDesign2014:ATutorialApproach•Autodesk3dsMaxDesign2013:ATutorialApproach•Autodesk3dsMaxDesign2012:ATutorialApproach3dsMaxTextbooks•Autodesk3dsMax2015:AComprehensiveGuide,15thEdition•Autodesk3dsMax2014:AComprehensiveGuide•Autodesk3dsMax2013:AComprehensiveGuidePaperCraftBook•Constructing3-DimensionalModels:APaper-CraftWorkbookAutoCADTextbooksAuthoredbyProf.ShamTickooandPublishedbyAutodeskPress•AutoCAD:AProblem-SolvingApproach:2013andBeyond•AutoCAD2012:AProblem-SolvingApproach•AutoCAD2011:AProblem-SolvingApproach•AutoCAD2010:AProblem-SolvingApproach•CustomizingAutoCAD2010TextbooksAuthoredbyCADCIMTechnologiesandPublishedbyOtherPublishers3DStudioMaxandVIZTextbooks•Learning3dsMax:ATutorialApproach,Release4Goodheart-WilcoxPublishers(USA)•Learning3DStudioVIZ:ATutorialApproachGoodheart-WilcoxPublishers(USA)•Learning3DStudioR4:ATutorialApproachGoodheart-WilcoxPublishers(USA)3dsMaxTextbook•3dsMax2008:AComprehensiveGuide(SerbianEdition)MikroKnjigaPublishingCompany,SerbiaSolidWorksTextbooks•SolidWorks2008forDesigners(SerbianEdition)MikroKnjigaPublishingCompany,Serbia•SolidWorks2006forDesigners(RussianEdition)

PiterPublishingPress,Russia•SolidWorks2006forDesigners(SerbianEdition)MikroKnjigaPublishingCompany,Serbia•SolidWorks2006forDesigners(JapaneseEdition)MikioObi,JapanNXTextbooks•NX6forDesigners(KoreanEdition)Onsolutions,SouthKorea•NX5forDesigners(KoreanEdition)Onsolutions,SouthKoreaPro/ENGINEERTextbooks•Pro/ENGINEERWildfire4.0forDesigners(KoreanEdition)HongReungSciencePublishingCompany,SouthKorea•Pro/ENGINEERWildfire3.0forDesigners(KoreanEdition)HongReungSciencePublishingCompany,SouthKoreaAutoCADTextbooks•AutoCAD2006(RussianEdition)PiterPublishingPress,Russia•AutoCAD2005(RussianEdition)PiterPublishingPress,Russia•AutoCAD2000Fondamenti(ItalianEdition)•AutoCAD2000TecnicheAvanzate(ItalianEdition)•AutoCAD2000(ChineseEdition)ComingSoonfromCADCIMTechnologies•NXNastran9.0forDesigners•SOLIDWORKS2015:ATutorialApproach•ExploringPrimaveraP6V8.1•ExploringBentleySTAADProV8iOnlineTrainingProgramOfferedbyCADCIMTechnologiesCADCIM Technologies provides effective and affordable virtual online training on animation,architecture,andGISsoftwares,computerprogramminglanguages,andComputerAidedDesignandManufacturing(CAD/CAM)softwarepackages.Thetrainingwillbedelivered‘live’viaInternetatanytime,anyplace,andatanypacetoindividuals,studentsofcolleges,universities,andCAD/CAMtrainingcenters.Formoreinformation,pleasevisitthefollowinglink:http://www.cadcim.com

AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers

Documents

AutoCAD MEP 2015

AUTOCAD MEP < ROBOBAT >

Autocad Mep User Guide

Autocad Mep 2009

Revit MEP Revit MEP Design West Revit Architecture AutoCAD

Autodesk AutoCAD MEP - dds-cad.de · PDF fileSeite 1 von 12 Dokumentenversion: 2.0, Datum: 10.09.2008 Autodesk AutoCAD MEP Beispielprojekt Das Gesamtprojekt wurde in AutoCAD MEP 2009

The Benefits of Using the MEP Toolset in AutoCAD€¦ · AutoCAD MEP) is now included with AutoCAD as a specialized toolset. The MEP toolset contains tools geared to mechanical, electrical,

Autocad Mep User Guide English

AutoCAD 2018 Neuerungen - stadtcad.de AutoCAD 2019... · Only One. AutoCAD. AutoCAD 2019 AutoCAD Architecture AutoCAD AutoCAD Electrical AutoCAD Plant 3D AutoCAD MEP AutoCAD Map3D

Autocad Mep

Autodesk AutoCAD MEP - dds-cad.de · Seite 1 von 12 Dokumentenversion: 2.0, Datum: 10.09.2008 Autodesk AutoCAD MEP Beispielprojekt Das Gesamtprojekt wurde in AutoCAD MEP 2009 erzeugt

Autocad Mep User Guide German

GettingStartedwith AutoCADMEP - WordPress.com · Getting Started with AutoCAD MEP Welcome to AutoCAD MEP , an AutoCAD-based design and construction document solution for mechanical,

AutoCAD 2013 AutoCAD Architecture 2013 AutoCAD MEP 2013 · AutoCAD® 2013 AutoCAD® Architecture 2013 AutoCAD® MEP 2013 It will not work with previous versions of these applications

AutoCAD MEP 2008 ElectricalTutorial

ME318-1L Creating Revit MEP Content for Engineering Coordination · AutoCAD MEP .NET, and Revit MEP using .NET. Martin has worked closely with both the AutoCAD MEP and the Revit MEP

Au-2014_6393 Fast AutoCAD Mep Content

ME104-2L Introduction to the AutoCAD MEP .NET API · Introduction to the AutoCAD MEP .NET API ... systems designer and, ... AutoCAD MEP should launch, and the Test.dwg file should

AutoCAD® Architecture 2013 Viewer AutoCAD® MEP 2013 ... · Viewer Installation AutoCAD® 2013 AutoCAD® Architecture 2013 AutoCAD® MEP 2013

AutoCAD MEP Tutorials